AVEVA Everything3D Laser SolutionsDescripción completa
AVEVA Everything3D Laser Solutions
proiectarea asistata de calculator folosind AVEVA PDMS
AVEVAFull description
AEVA E3D TUTORIALFull description
aveva every 3d manual instruction
aveva every 3d manual instructionFull description
Full description
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide
AVEVA Solutions Ltd
Disclaimer 1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free from viruses. 1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar losses; loss of anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or information; any special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or expenses which may be suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise. 1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the user's claim is brought. 1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law. 1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software licence under which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.
Trademark AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden. AVEVA product/software names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide). The copyright, trademark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product or software, its name or logo belongs to its respective owner.
Transferring Data to and from AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical 7:2 Exporting to AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2 Importing from AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
About this User Guide This user guide is for AVEVA P&ID 12.1. The sections of the guide, and their content, are as follows: Overview An overview of this user guide and of AVEVA P&ID. Project Configuration Information on the configuration requirements at the start of a project, and those that may be necessary from time to time during the project. Principles and Concepts Recommended drawing practices and background information on the operation of AVEVA P&ID. The Graphical User Interface Information on the Engineering and Symbol Explorers, drawing page features, toolbars, menus and other aspects of the GUI. Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings Procedures for using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility and AVEVA P&ID facilities to upgrade “dumb" AutoCAD drawings to "intelligent" AVEVA P&ID drawings. Drawing P&IDs A guide to the generating P&IDs, with links to the appropriate detailed procedures. Data Transfer Information on transferring data to and from AVEVA P&ID. AVEVA P&ID Procedures Step-by-step instructions on carrying out AVEVA P&ID procedures for creating, editing, and exporting data from P&IDs. Appendices Data on commands, file formats, item and label types, and the AutoCAD defaults used by AVEVA P&ID.
1.2
Overview of AVEVA P&ID AVEVA P&ID is an AutoCAD 2011 (64-bit) based application that enables the creation of intelligent P&IDs quickly and accurately. As a user inserts engineering symbols, and draws flow lines in AVEVA P&ID engineering intelligence is embedded in the AutoCAD drawing that identifies the items and the connectivity between them. Engineering tag information or labels, such as Equipment, Pipeline and Instrument identifiers can be added as the items
are created, or later to suit the progressive development of P&IDs and the engineering data available at the time. The AVEVA lists of the customised engineering software.
P&ID Graphical User Interface (GUI) comprises a project explorer displaying Lines, Equipment and Instruments on the drawing, plus symbol libraries, menus and toolbars and properties dialog style dialog boxes for entering tags or labels, which integrate smoothly with the AutoCAD display and
Information is validated online as it is entered into AVEVA P&ID by a conformance check against validation lists.
1.2.1
Interfaces with other Applications AVEVA P&ID Reports is an engineering database fully integrated with P&ID. Item data can be exported to AVEVA P&ID Reports from P&ID drawings. AVEVA P&ID Reports can be used to add to, edit and manage this data between imports from AVEVA P&ID, use this data to create custom reports and queries in Excel, and to manage pipes that span multiple P&IDs. Data in a P&ID Reports database can be viewed in the P&ID Data Grid and used to label drawings. Data can be saved directly into PDMS Schematic databases in the AVEVA PDMS Schematic Model Manager. Feedback from such PDMS load activities is captured and displayed in the P&ID user interface. The content of a Schematic database can be viewed in the P&ID Data Grid and the data used to label drawings. AVEVA P&ID can export instrument data and electrical equipment data to AVEVA Instrumentation (AI) and AVEVA Electrical (AE), and drawings containing the exported data can be viewed in the AI and AE core applications. A stockpile of Instruments created in AI and equipment created in AE can be viewed in the P&ID Data Grid and can be inserted into the P&ID drawings, and item data used to label drawings. Engineering tag information and connectivity from each drawing can be synchronised with data in AVEVA VPE Workbench, where the engineering items are automatically created or revised. As data is transferred from the P&IDs to VPE Workbench a logical Plant Connectivity Model (PCM) is created and maintained automatically, that identifies all the Lines, Equipment and Instruments on the project and the Line connectivity between items and the ownership implied by the P&ID connections. Once the PCM has been populated engineers can review the P&ID changes and Issue this information for detailed engineering, where the P&ID data forms the basis of their engineering datasheets, project reports, and schematics. Once detailed engineering design data has been entered into VPE Workbench and Released by other groups of engineers, this data can be referenced, displayed on the P&ID and automatically updated when it changes. This ensures data consistency between the design information and the drawings.
1.3
Features of AVEVA P&ID AVEVA P&ID provides the designer with a flow diagram development system which has the following features: •
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) that includes and supports the Microsoft Office 2010 Fluent User Interface. Familiarity with the GUI enables users to concentrate on the features provided and hence reduce the learning periods.
Fast Performance and Graphical Creation. When each entity is placed on a flow diagram by AVEVA P&ID, it is assigned an engineering type reference which determines its 'behaviour' (new items are assigned a type reference at the outset).
•
Both object driven (select object(s) then select command to apply to object(s), and command driven (select command then object(s) to which the command is to be applied) methods of drawing can be utilised.
•
Intelligent 'labels' as engineering item tags are overlaid on graphics. The 'labels' can be added to items as they are created or later when project data becomes available, hence preventing bottlenecks in flow diagram production.
•
Online validation of intelligent labels as they are placed on the flow diagram from project data entered into VPE Workbench and exported, or by manually created project validation lists. It is possible to export the validation files from VPE Workbench if the flow diagram data is to be loaded back into that database.
•
Project specific configuration including layer/level, line styles, symbol sets, tag formats and colour, allows conformity to client standards.
•
Items that logically reside together (for example, items of equipment with nozzles) are associated together when placed by AVEVA P&ID.
•
Data security is provided through AutoCAD's extensive programming capabilities and cannot be accessed without an application to do so.
•
AVEVA P&ID can co-exist with AutoCAD with no change to the setup parameters for the underlying CAD software.
•
Data can be transferred from P&ID drawings into AVEVA P&ID Reports databases where it can be edited and managed, and used to produce a range of reports in Excel format. Data in a P&ID Reports database can be viewed in the P&ID Data Grid and used to label drawings.
•
Data can be saved directly into PDMS Schematic databases in the AVEVA PDMS Schematic Model Manager. The content of a Schematic database can be viewed in the P&ID Data Grid and the data used to label drawings.
•
AVEVA P&ID can export instrument data to AVEVA Instrumentation (AI), and drawings containing the exported instrument data can be viewed in AI. Instruments created in AI can be viewed in the P&ID Data Grid and can be inserted into the P&ID drawings, and instruments data used to label drawings.
•
AVEVA P&ID can export electrical equipment data to AVEVA Electrical (AE), and drawings containing the exported equipment data can be viewed in AE. Electrical equipment created in AE can be viewed in the P&ID Data Grid and can be inserted into the P&ID drawings, and equipment data used to label drawings
•
Ability to work online with the VPE Workbench for two-way data transfers enabling flow diagram information to be exported to VPE Workbench and Pipeline, Instruments and selected Equipment design information can be referenced from the database onto the flow diagram for display and data consistency.
•
Ability to work offline with the VPE Workbench database. P&IDs can be edited offline from the database and synchronized back into the project by connecting to VPE Workbench at any time.
•
Data can be transferred automatically to an SQL database when it is entered or edited, or “manually” synchronized.
•
Data can be exported to Microsoft Excel spreadsheets, where it can be edited. The edited data can then be imported back into AVEVA P&ID.
•
Easy substitution of client symbols with no naming restrictions.
•
Ability to read in client drawings/designs or to scan them for use as backgrounds.
•
Ability, in conjunction with the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility, to upgrade "dumb" AutoCAD lines and blocks to "intelligent" AVEVA P&ID pipes and symbols.
Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects A revised version of pipe lines that improved the performance and usability of the application considerably was introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3. For projects developed using previous versions of AVEVA P&ID, an upgrade of the pipes and symbols on the project drawings is required before the drawings can be used in AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3 or AVEVA P&ID 12.0 or later. It is mandatory to verify that all the pipes are valid in 7.2 SP2 (or previous 7.2 versions) before executing the upgrade process. This validation process can be executed by using the command “net validate all”. It is also mandatory to Synchronise (see 8.8.5: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database) each of the legacy drawings to be upgraded, using the legacy version machine. This process must be successful and the output files generated must be kept in the Project Area (e.g. …\Vantage\...). All the project files must then be copied to the 12.0 or later machine where the upgrade process will be continued. Once the files are copied to the 12.0 or later machine, the project must be upgraded using the Project Wizard in the normal way. This process does not upgrade the pipes and the symbols but it upgrades the project from the legacy versions to the latest version. The next steps are to upgrade the symbol library, and then run the AVEVA Legacy Project Upgrade Utility to upgrade the symbols and pipes on the project drawings.
2.1.1
Upgrading the Symbol Library The upgrade procedure for symbols in the project symbol library is as follows: 1. In 7.2 SP3 and 12.0 or later, all symbols in the symbol must have ports. To upgrade the symbols in the symbol library by adding ports, access the Symbol Explorer, right-click on the lower pane and select the Upgrade Ports from the menu that is then displayed. Each project symbol is then upgraded in turn. Wait until the process is finished. Note: Only the symbol files located in the \PMETSYM (Metric projects) or \PIMPSYM (Imperial projects) symbol folders, or in sub-folders in these folders, are included in the upgrade. Note: If single connection symbols are included in the upgrade, it is recommended that they are checked afterwards to ensure that ports have been placed on the correct sides of the symbols. It is not always possible for the upgrade routine to detect which this is.
2. A log file is created in the project symbol folder that contains lists the symbols that were correctly upgraded, any errors that occurred, and warnings that single connection symbols were upgraded (and therefore should be checked). For example:
[C:\Aveva\P&ID\PROJECT\IPE\Autocad\Pmetsym\NV.DWG] succesfully upgraded Error: Symbol not found in project area [WEVA] Warning: Symbol with single insertion [C:\Aveva\P&ID\PROJECT\IPE\Autocad\Pmetsym\Line Fittings\FLAG2.DWG] [PFL]
[VLV]
point
The log files are best viewed in WordPad. 3. To manually upgrade symbols, use the Symbol Editor.
2.1.2
Upgrading Symbols and Pipes on Drawings 1. Once the symbol library has been upgraded, the existing symbols and pipes on the projects can be upgraded from the revised symbol library. This is done using the AVEVA P&ID Upgrade Utility. Note: •
If upgrading symbols in a legacy project, the drawings must first be synchronised (see 8.8.5: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database). The output files generate by the synchronisation process must be available in the AVEVA Data Path directory.
•
The project .PRJ file must be available for selection (see below).
•
The INST.VAL, EQUIP.VAL and PID.SYM must be available in the Validation directory.
•
It is recommended that the upgraded symbols are tested in an empty drawing before proceeding to edit real project drawings.
Select AVEVA > P&ID > AVEVA P&ID Upgrade Utility > AVEVA P&ID Project Upgrade from the Programs menu.
The AVEVA Legacy Project Upgrade dialog is then displayed.
2. In the Select Input Folder field, enter the folder in which the drawings to be upgraded are located, or press the Browse button and browse for the location. The full location and file name of each AVEVA P&ID drawing in the selected input folder is the listed in the dialog. 3. In the Select P&ID Project File field, enter the location and file name of the configuration file (.PRJ) of the P&ID project associated with the drawings, or press the Browse button and browse for the file. 4. In the Select Output Folder field, enter the folder in which the upgraded drawings are to be placed, or press the Browse button and browse for the location. 5. The utility may optionally be used to export data from drawings to XML files in ISO 15928 format. This data can subsequently be imported into AVEVA PDMS using Schematic Model Manager. If this is required, check the ISO 15926 checkbox. 6. In the Select ISO Output Folder field, enter the folder in which the XML files are to be placed, or press the Browse button and browse for the location. 7. Select ISO 15926 schema version to be used, either 3.2 or 3.3. 8. If all the P&ID drawings found in the input folder are to be upgraded (and optionally have data exported from), select the Select All checkbox. If only certain drawings are to be upgraded and exported from, check or uncheck the Select File checkboxes for the individual drawings as required. 9. Select the Process button. The upgrade operation then takes place.
10. When a drawing has been processed successfully, a green tick is displayed in its Progress field. A red cross is displayed if the drawing is processed with errors. 11. To stop the operation, select the Cancel button. 12. Once a drawing has been processed, details of errors and warnings an be viewed by selecting its View Log File button. 13. Close the utility by selecting the Exit button. Once the symbols have been upgraded the next step is to upgrade pipes and process links.
Project Options Overview AVEVA P&ID can be configured to suit project requirements by means of project options. These options are contained within the project catalogue file, .prj, which resides in the working directory of the current project. The options in this catalogue are modified using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program. Project specific configurations can be established for directory paths, project numbers and units, pipe thickness and styles, and many others. Most changes in the project configuration are applied to an existing drawing when it is loaded into the drawing editor, or when the Refresh Settings option in the AVEVA P&ID Group of the Home Tab is selected. See 8.2: Implementing Configuration Changes. Some configuration changes, those that would significantly slow down the opening of drawings, must be triggered by the user after the drawing has opened. Theoretically, changes can be made to the project catalogue configuration right up to the point of data synchronisation with VPE Workbench although this is undesirable. If several drawings have been created and such a change occurs, it is advisable to write a simple script file which loads each drawing, saves it, and unloads it. Warning:
Changes made to project options should be authorised in advance and the details documented, as these affect all other AVEVA P&ID users and can also affect work already completed. If changes made to the project configuration result in configuration conflicts that prevent a drawing from loading, use the Recovering Project Configuration Settings procedure to resolve this problem.
Introduction AVEVA P&ID can be configured to suit project requirements by means of various options set using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. See 2.2: Project Options Overview for an overview of the use and impact of these options. Most changes in the project configuration are applied to an existing drawing when it is loaded into the drawing editor, or when the Refresh Settings option in the AVEVA P&ID Group of the Home Tab is selected.. See 8.2: Implementing Configuration Changes. If changes made to the project configuration result in configuration conflicts that prevents a drawing from loading, use the Recovering Project Configuration Settings procedure to resolve this problem. The AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is a separate application from AVEVA P&ID. It can be opened from the Project Administrator option in the AVEVA P&ID Group of the Home Tab, or from a shortcut on the Programs menu (e.g. AVEVA Plant > Engineer > P&ID 12.1 > Projects > [Project Name] > Project Administrator [Project Name]), or from a desktop shortcut:
The LogIn dialog is displayed:
Enter the project login details for accessing the Administration program and press the OK button (these are set when the project is installed/upgraded but can be amended using the Project Database Configuration Category).
The password used if the Login as Administrator with password (SQL Server Security) option is selected is set using the User Access Configuration Category of the Administration program. The following is then displayed:
The File menu consists of the following options: •
Save: Saves project file settings for the current project. A toolbar button is also available to perform this function.
•
Open: Used to browse for and open another project. Project settings are stored in files with a suffix of .PRJ. A toolbar button is also available to perform this function. If a project is already open it must be closed by using the Close option.
•
Close: Closes the settings dialogs for the current project.
•
Recent: Displays a list of recently opened projects. Double-click on a project to switch to it. If a project is already open it must be closed by using the Close option.
•
Help: Opens a sub-menu from which the online help and "About" information can be opened.
•
Application Event Log: Displays a dialog in which application events are listed.
Project Catalogue Editor Dialog Display the settings of a project by clicking the File tab (click on the File tab again to return to the File menu). The following is then displayed:
The dialog box consists of two distinct sections: •
The Explorer is used to navigate to the different Configuration Categories for which settings and data are to be configured. Each Configuration Category is concerned with a different aspect of the project configuration. For example, Item Types, Signal Styles, Equipment, etc. For some Configuration Categories, e.g. Drawing, information sub-categories are available, e.g. Grid, Labels and Layers etc. Expand or close a Configuration Category by clicking on the +/- boxes. For example:
As well as by using the Explorer, Configuration Categories may be selected from a menu accessed by clicking the title of the current Configuration Category.
Following selection of a Configuration Category, the relevant data and configuration parameters are displayed in the application pane.
The fields, checkbox etc in the application panes are used to change project settings. The majority of displayed data may be amended, and is validated on data entry where applicable. Tables of data associated with a Configuration Category are displayed in grids. Grids are provided with standard facilities for grouping data by columns, pinning rows, re-ordering columns and filtering the displayed data (similar to those of the P&ID Data Grid - see 4.5.9: Configuring the Grid Layout). A set of toolbars buttons is also provided to manage data in grids:
To create a new record in a grid, use the button. A dialog is then displayed in which the unique identifier of the record must be entered. The new record is then added to the grid.
•
To move up and down the list of rows in order to edit existing entries, use the
and
buttons. •
To delete a row, scroll to the row in question and select the
button.
•
To copy a row, scroll to the row in question and select the button. As each record must have a unique identifier, a dialog is then displayed in which the unique identifier for the record copy must be entered. The copied record is then added to the grid as a new row.
•
To rename a row, scroll to the row in question and select the button. A dialog is then displayed in which the new unique identifier of the record must be entered.
Not all these button are active for every grid. Some are not applicable for some grids and are disabled. The Configuration Categories are as follows: •
The Project Configuration Category is configured using a single application pane:
The application pane is divided into seven sections:
•
Project Number Section The Project Number field is used to set the identifier of the project, and is established when the project is generated using the project wizard but can be changed if required. The project number provides security when a synchronisation with VPE Workbench procedure performed and prevents accidental transfers to the wrong project within VPE Workbench.
Project Units Section This section is used to specify two settings: •
The Drawing Units field displays the drawing units specified by the project wizard. Drawing units should never be changed once the project is under way, as they affect the size of drawings, line thicknesses, symbols etc in AutoCAD, and so the field is read-only.
•
Select either the Metric or Imperial Label Units button. This setting controls whether sizes entered as part of item labels are in metric or imperial units, and which list of values file is used to validate the entries. Label units may be changed part way through a project as required. Drawings will be automatically updated with the new units when they are reloaded.
Note: Changes to drawings resulting from the label units being changed are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded. See 8.2.5: Convert Project Label Units.
•
Project Paths Section During the procedure for installing AVEVA P&ID, directory paths are set up. These can be edited using the fields in the Project Paths section. The Browse buttons adjacent to each field may be used to search for a new file path. •
The P&ID Installation Path field is used to specify the directory into which the AVEVA P&ID software was installed.
•
The AVEVA Data Path field is used to specify the output directory into which drawing output files are saved. AVEVA P&ID also imports instrument loop numbers from VPE Workbench via this directory, if the project is configured to do so.
•
The Validation Directory Path field is used to specify the location of the files that contain on-line validation data (lists of valid values against which item labels are checked on entry). These validation files can be exported from VPE Workbench, in which case they should not be edited locally.
•
The Project Tag Data Path field is used to specify the location of the Access database to which data could be exported in previous versions of AVEVA P&ID. This path is used when upgrading a project to the current version.
•
The Standard Metric Symbol Pat is used to specify displays the directory in which standard metric symbols are located.
•
The Project Metric Symbol Path field is used to specify the directory in which project symbols are located.
•
The Standard Imperial Symbol Path field is used to specify the directory in which standard imperial symbols are located.
•
The Project Imperial Symbol Path field is used to specify the directory in which project imperial symbols are located.
•
The Helpfile Path field is used to specify the location of the Online Guide.
•
The Monitor File Path field is used to specify the location of the monitor file generated each time an export takes place.
•
The Drawing Location field is used to specify the directory in which project drawings are located. Drawings can only be opened from this folder and from sub-folders in this folder.
•
The Assemblies Path field is used to specify the directory in which assemblies are located.
When P&ID data is transferred to VPE Workbench, a copy of the P&ID drawing may be made available for use by AVEVA Model Management. In the Save Path field, specify the interface directory into which the copies of the P&IDs are to be saved
If the project is set to use Metric drawing units, the Standard Imperial Symbol Path and the Project Imperial Symbol Path fields will be 'greyed out'. If the project is set to use Imperial drawing units, the Standard Metric Symbol Path and the Project Metric Symbol Path fields will be 'greyed out'.
•
Symbol Search Priority Section It is possible to create a project symbol with the same name as a standard symbol supplied with the installation. If this occurs, it is necessary to determine which directory, and which version of the symbol, is to be searched for first and be the preferred version for the project. See the 2.3.10: Symbols Configuration Category topic for details of symbol creation. Select either the Project or Standard button to determine the symbol search priority. The search priority also affects which directory any assemblies are created under, either standard or project. It is recommended that in normal circumstances the search priority is set to Project so that project assemblies are created in the project directories.
•
Update Graphical Changes Automatically on Start Up Section If drawings are to be automatically updated when opened for the first time after changes have been made to graphical Project Administration settings, check the Update checkbox. If the user is to prompted to choose whether or not the changes are to be implemented when opening the drawings, uncheck the checkbox. The checkbox controls how changes to the followings settings are implemented: Pipe Tags Equipment Tags Pipe Styles Signal Styles Item Type properties changes (Layers and Colours)
The application pane is divided into four sections. -
Synchronise Settings Section In the VPE Config File field, specify the location of the .INI configuration file of the VPE Workbench installation with which the AVEVA P&ID project is to interface. This may be a copy of the original file located on the VPE Workbench middle tier server. In the VPE Service Path, enter the path to the EngAPIService component that will handle the transfer of data to VPE Workbench. This should be located on the VPE Workbench middle tier server. This path must include the port (which must be open) to be used for data transfers. The default port is 8080.
-
Explore Database Unassigned Settings Section If the unassigned items in the VPE Workbench Database, i.e. those that have not yet been included on a project P&ID, are to be displayed in the Engineering Explorer check the Show Unassigned Items in Explorer checkbox.
-
VPE Settings Section In the Publisher Folder field, specify the folder into which drawings are published when loading to the selected VPE Workbench project. In the Database Project field, select the VPE Workbench project with which the AVEVA P&ID project is to interface. The list of projects available in this field is taken from the specified .INI file (see above). The Export to VPE Workbench checkbox is used to set the default setting (checked or unchecked) of the Export Data to Publishing Area checkbox on the Synchronise dialog (see Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database). When a drawing is loaded to a VPE Workbench 5.8 or later project, e-mails can be sent to users of that project to inform them of this. Enter the user names and e-mail addresses of the VPE Workbench project users in the grid at the bottom of the section. If a new e-mail recipient is to be entered, use the button to create a new row. Enter the user name of the new recipient in the dialog that is then displayed:
User names cannot be edited. The user name row must be deleted and re-entered with a new user name.
Batch Load to Workbench Section This section is used to load/publish data from multiple drawings into a VPE Workbench database. The Select Drawings to Publish pane lists all the drawings that were either individually synchronised using the Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database procedure, or had output files generated using the Synchronising Multiple Drawing Data with VPE Workbench procedure. The procedure for loading/publishing depends on whether drawing data is being exported to a VPE Workbench 5.8 (or later) project, or a VPE Workbench 5.6 or 5.7 project. Loading/Publishing to VPE Workbench 5.8 or later Projects Note that drawings can optionally be loaded/published to a VPE Workbench 5.8 project as part of the Synchronise procedure. If the project is a VPE Workbench 5.8 or later project, select the drawings to be loaded in the Select Drawings to Publish pane and load/publish them by pressing the > button. The drawings are moved to the Publishing Area pane and loaded into the VPE Workbench project. A message is displayed in the messages pane at the bottom of the section to indicate the successful loading of the drawing data to the publishing area, for example: "905675 File Successfully Loaded to Staging Area". Use the >> button to load/publish all the listed drawings. Loading/Publishing to VPE Workbench 5.6 or 5.7 Projects If the project is a VPE Workbench 5.6 or 5.7 project, check the Using Workbench Legacy Version (5.6/5.7) checkbox. A connection to the VPE Workbench Database must then be established, if this has not already been done. Press the Login button. The VPE Workbench Log In dialog is then displayed.
For information on the use of this dialog and other options for connecting the a VPE Workbench database see the Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database procedure. Once the connection has been made, select the drawings to be loaded in the Select Drawings to Publish pane and use the > button to move them to the Publishing Area pane. Use the >> button to select all the listed drawings for loading. Start the load by pressing the Load button.
Progress, error and warning messages are displayed in the message pane at the bottom of the section. Once loaded, the drawings are removed from the Publishing Area pane. To view the log file of messages generated while loading/publishing, press the View Log button. The file then opens in Notepad. To delete all the drawings currently in the publishing area, press the Clear button. A message is then displayed requesting that the deletion be confirmed. Press Yes to continue with the deletion.
•
Tables Sub-Set The Tables pane is used create and maintain the definitions of tables of VPE Workbench data that can be placed on AVEVA P&ID drawings:
-
Existing Tables Section This section lists all existing table definitions.
To create a new table, select the Add Table button. Enter the name of the new table in the dialog that is then displayed:
The name of the new table definition is then added to the list. Continue by entering the settings of the table definition in the Table Details Section (see below). Note that the Table Details Section will initially be populated with the settings entered for the previous table definition, or if no table definition has been created previously, with default settings.
-
•
To delete a table definition, select it and the Delete Table link.
•
To rename a table definition, select it and the Rename Table link. Enter the new name of the table definition in the dialog that is then displayed, and press the OK button.
•
To edit an existing table definition, select it from the list. The current settings for the selected table definition are then displayed in the Table Details Section and may be changed as required.
Table Details Section Specifying the Appearance of a Table: 1. The Colour field defines the colour of the table (both the table borders and the table text). 2. The Browse button adjacent to the Colour field is used to select the colour. On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:
The colour can be selected by the following three methods: •
By selection of one of the colours shown in the palette.
By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Not applicable for tables.
•
By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Tables will automatically assume the colours of the layers they are inserted into, as set on the Layers SubSet the Drawing Configuration Category.
•
By manually entry into the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in Colour field. 3. The X and Y fields are used to specify the coordinates that the table will be placed at on drawings. 4. The Text Style field is used to specify the style of the table text. Select the required style from the list. Text styles are set up using the Text Styles pane. The default will be the ROMANS style, which is supplied with the product and does not need to be set up. 5. The Row Height field is used to specify the height of the table rows. 6. The Text Height field is used to specify the height of text in the table. Specifying the Type of Data a Table will display: The API Group Set, API Group and API Group Set Argument fields are used to specify the type of data that is to appear in the table: 1. Select the API Lookup button. If a connection to the project database has not been established, the AVEVA P&ID Logon dialog is then displayed:
2. Complete the Username and Password fields, and select the required project from the drop-down list in the Project field. 3. Select the OK button. The API Group Lookup dialog is then displayed. 4. If a connection to the database has already been established in this session, this dialog is displayed when the API Lookup button is selected.
5. Select the API Group and the Group Set which contain the required data, and press the Set button. 6. The API Group Set and API Group fields in the Table Details Section are then populated with the selected Group and the Group Set. By default, tables will only be populated with data relating to items that are on the drawing on which the tables are placed. Alternatively, the table or tables that data is to be extracted can be specified in the API Group Set Argument field. For example, if the following is entered: Drawing_ID="9999" Data will be extracted from the project drawing with the ID of 9999. If data is to be extracted from multiple drawings, multiple arguments may be entered. Setting up Table Columns: Once the type of data has been specified, the columns that the table is to consist of, and the data that is to populate these columns is set up using the grid section. Adding a Column: 1. To add a column, select the button and enter the column name in the dialog that is then displayed. A new row is then added to the grid. Each row in the grid is used to set up one table column. 2. The Column field displays the number of each column. These numbers control the order in which columns are displayed in the table, i.e. the column with the lowest number will be the first column on the left. The Column field is read-only. To change the order of columns, use the copy and delete facilities. 3. In the Caption field, enter the text that is to appear as the heading for the column. 4. In the Designator field, select the required designator. When the table is placed on a drawing, the designator is replaced with the appropriate value. The list of designators is restricted to those in the selected API Group and the Group Set.
5. In the Width field, enter the width of the column. 6. The Text Align field is used to specify the alignment of the text in the column. Enter the appropriate code (1 to 9): 1 = Top Left
2 = Top Centre 3 = Top Right 4 = Middle Left 5 = Middle Centre 6 = Middle Right 7 = Bottom Left 8 = Bottom Centre 9 = Bottom Right If no value is entered, the alignment defaults to Middle Left.
The Project Database Configuration Category is configured using the Settings subcategory:
-
SQL Server Settings Section Project data is stored in an SQL database. This section is used to enter details of the SQL server the project database is to use. These details are initially specified when a project is installed or upgraded, but they may subsequently be amended here. Enter a valid server name in the Server Name field. Depending on whether the database is to be logged into using Windows Authentication or SQL Server Authentication, select either the Use Windows Integrated Security (Windows Authentication) option or the Login as Administrator with password (SQL Server Security) option. If the second option is selected, enter the login details in the Admin Login Name and Password fields. This login must be a valid SQL Server Administrator account login.
Test that the entered details are valid by selecting the Test Connection button. A message will then be displayed indicating whether or not the connection details are valid. For example:
-
Online Editing Section If label data is to be saved automatically to an SQL database when it is entered, check the Save to database on Update checkbox. The saved data is used when validating the uniqueness of tags in a project. See 6.13.4: Label Validation across all Project P&IDs When a project is upgraded, in order for Spec Driven data and functionality to be available (see 2.3.23: Spec Driven Configuration Category), the project database schema must be updated by selecting the Upgrade Specdriven Database Schema - Upgrade button.
The P&ID Reports Configuration Category is configured using the main P&ID Reports Configuration Category pane and the Settings sub-category:
•
•
P&ID Reports Configuration Category Pane
•
Settings Sub-Set
P&ID Reports Configuration Category Pane
A P&ID Reports database is supplied with the product (PidReports). By default, AVEVA P&ID will be set to export data to this database. To create a new, blank P&ID Reports database, press the Create button. A new database will then be created. The filename of the new database will be "PidReports__. The P&ID Reports Server Name field displays the name of the SQL server, as specified on the Project Database Configuration Category. The P&ID Reports Database field displays the name of the current P&ID Reports database. Select a different database from the list available from this field if required. The list consists of all P&ID Reports databases created for the project.
P&ID Reports Settings UDA values are displayed in AVEVA P&ID Reports on the UDA tab. If UDA values are also to be displayed on the same tabs as the items they are associated with (assuming there are fields available for them to be displayed in), check the Merge UDA Values checkbox. The Update P&ID Reports after Synchronize checkbox controls the default setting of the Export to PID Reports checkbox on the Synchronise dialog. If the Update P&ID Reports after Synchronize checkbox is checked, then the default setting of the Export to PID Reports checkbox is checked, and vice versa. The Update and Consolidate P&ID Reports Database after Synchronize checkbox controls the default setting of the Export & Consolidate Database checkbox on the Synchronise dialog. If the Update and Consolidate P&ID Reports Database after Synchronize checkbox is checked, then the default setting of the Export & Consolidate Database checkbox is checked, and vice versa. If the Add P&ID Drawing Details to Database checkbox is checked, the comments regarding an export that may be entered in the Description dialog during the export process are added to the P&ID Reports database.
Line Consolidation Section This section is used to select which line properties are to be compared when attempting to consolidate lines which are present on multiple P&IDs when they are transferred into P&ID Reports. Both the properties of lines and the properties of the components on the ends of lines may be compared. As required, check the checkboxes in the First / Last component fields and/or Line fields sections. Note that the unique pipe validation fields specified in the P&ID project settings are compared regardless of these settings. When the fields of two lines with unique pipe validation tag do not match, the lines are not consolidated and warning message is displayed in log tab of P&ID Reports.
The fields in the Grid application pane are used to set up the dimensions and other elements of the drawing grid. The application pane is divided into two sections. -
Drawing Frame Settings Section This section contains the following settings: •
Drawing Length and Height fields. These fields specify the length and height of the drawing.
Horizontal Start, Mid and End Distance fields are used to specify the horizontal dimensions of the drawing frame grid.
•
The Horizontal Start field is used to set the distance from the left-hand edge (0,0) of the sheet to the left-hand edge of the frame.
•
The Horizontal Mid field is used to set the length of AVEVA P&ID grid squares within the frame.
•
The Horizontal End field is used to set the distance from the right-hand edge of the frame to the right-hand edge of the sheet.
•
The Vertical Start, Mid and End Distance fields are used to specify the vertical dimensions of the drawing frame grid.
•
The Vertical End field is used to set the distance from the top edge of the sheet to the top edge of the frame.
•
The Vertical Mid field is used to set the height of AVEVA P&ID grid squares within the frame.
•
The Vertical Start field is used to set the distance from the bottom edge of the frame (0,0) to the bottom edge of the sheet.
Only objects within the limits of drawings, as specified here using Drawing Length and Height fields, will be validated. -
Grid Settings Section This section contains the following settings: •
Vertical Grid Direction. This is a group of two buttons - Up and Down. It is only possible to have one button selected at a time. Depending on the button selected, the grid will increment from the top or the bottom along the Y-axis.
•
Horizontal Grid Direction. This is a group of two buttons - Left and Right. It is only possible to have one button selected at a time. Depending on the button selected, the grid will increment from the left or from the right along the X-axis.
•
Vertical and Horizontal Grid Type. This is a group of two buttons - Letters and Numbers. It is only possible to have one button select at a time. Depending on the button selected, the X and Y-axes are assigned either letters or numbers.
•
Grid Spacing field. This field is used to specify the size of the AutoCAD grid spaces. Note that the AutoCAD grid is a separate feature from the AVEVA P&ID grid (see below).
•
Snap Spacing field. This field is used to specify the size of the snap spacing. Usually, the snap spacing is set first and then the grid spacing is set to match the snap spacing. AVEVA P&ID grid and snap definitions will override AutoCAD settings so snap and grid settings must always be defined in the project configuration to suit the symbol set in use.
•
Grid Letters to Ignore field. This field is used to specify the grid letters to ignore, for example I and O, which may be confused with one and zero. List the letters to be excluded, using commas as separators, or enter NONE.
The AutoCAD drawing grid, and the AVEVA P&ID drawing grid are two distinct features. The AutoCAD drawing grid is a standard AutoCAD feature switched on by pressing the GRID button at the bottom of the P&ID drawing pane. The AutoCAD drawing grid is a grid of dots laid over the P&ID as a drawing aid. The Grid Spacing field described above is used to specify the size of the grid squares. The AVEVA P&ID drawing grid is used to give each item on a P&ID a location identifier derived from the letters and/or numbers of the grid axes e.g. G5. When P&ID data is transferred to VPE Workbench, the location identifier of each item is also transferred. This is to help VPE Workbench users find items more easily if they have to refer back to a P&ID.
Please note that all grid calculations performed by AVEVA P&ID assume that the border sheet has its bottom left corner at the 0,0 AutoCAD coordinate. If this is not the case grid references will not be correct, and some items could report to be off of the grid.
•
Labels Sub-Set
The Labels sub-category is used to configure how project drawings themselves (as opposed to items on these drawings) are labelled with a drawing title. The Labels application pane is divided into two sections. -
Drawing Labels Section This section contains the following settings: •
If the design area of drawings is required as part of the drawing title label, and is also to be used as a prefix for instrument/equipment labels, check the Design Area from Title Block used for Instrument Label Field 1 checkbox.
•
If the project number is to be part of the drawing title label, check the Place Project Number Label as part of Drawing Title checkbox.
•
Number of Design Area Labels to place, Number of Drawing Number Labels to place and Number of Project Number Labels to place. Several labels may be placed for Drawing Area, Drawing Number and Project Number when using the Adding a Title to a Drawing and entering Drawing Sheet Attributes procedure. Enter the number of labels required for each in the three fields provided.
VPE Drawing Attributes Section The VPE Drawing Attributes section is used to select VPE Workbench data with which to label drawings in the project, for example information regarding systems that items on the drawings are allocated to. The section contains Default X Pitch and Default Y Pitch fields and a grid with three columns - Designator, Default X Pitch and Default Y Pitch. Enter or edit the Designator name in the first field, the Default X Pitch value in the second field and the Default Y Pitch value in the third field. The X and Y pitch values control the spacing between VPE Workbench attribute data where there is more than one such attribute labelling a drawing. Change the default values as required.
-
Creating a new VPE Drawing Attribute If a VPE Drawing Attribute is to be created, select the is then displayed:
button. The following dialog box
Enter a unique value for the VPE Drawing Attribute designator and press the OK button. The dialog box will be closed and the entered value will be displayed in the Designator column. The Default X Pitch and Default Y Pitch will automatically default to the values entered in the corresponding fields above the grid. To edit a designator name, select the is then displayed.
button and enter the new value in the dialog that
To edit the Default X Pitch and Default Y Pitch values scroll to the row in question and click. This will activate the cursor within the selected row, and the value may then be edited.
AVEVA P&ID is supplied with layers already set up for pipes, equipment, instruments, labels and a non-plotting layer. The Layers application pane is used to edit these layers and to add new layers as required. -
Creating a new Drawing Layer If a layer is to be created, select the
button. The following dialog box is then displayed:
Enter a unique value for the drawing layer and press the OK button. The dialog box will be closed and the entered new value will be displayed in the Drawing Layer column. The colour code will be set automatically to the default value, but may be amended. See below for details To edit a drawing layer name, select the that is then displayed. -
button and enter the new value in the dialog
Entering a Colour Code Scroll to the row in question. The colour box dialog button is displayed:
On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:
The Colour Code can be selected by the following methods: •
Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
•
By manually entering the Colour Code field
The Assume Owner Colour and Assume ByLayer options are not applicable in this case. Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the grid. If the colour of an existing layer is changed, drawings will be updated with the new colour when they are reloaded.
The Settings application pane is divided into two sections. The pane also includes the Entity selected is added to the current selection set checkbox. This checkbox is used to specify the method used to select multiple objects on drawings. If the checkbox is unchecked (the default setting), to select multiple drawing objects, press the Shift key while selecting each of the objects. If the Shift key is not pressed when an object or objects are selected, any previously selected objects are de-selected. If the checkbox is checked, it is not necessary to press Shift in order to select multiple objects. Each object is added to the set of selected objects as it is selected. To remove objects from the set of selected objects, press Shift and select them. -
User Defined Sheet Attributes Section This section is used to enter the field names for the Sheet Attribute fields on the Advanced Drawing Properties sheet. These fields are used to enter drawing sheet properties in addition to those of the drawing title. As required, enter meaningful field titles in the ten fields provided.
The first field on the Advanced Drawing Properties sheet will always display the Design Area attribute, though the field name may still be changed if required. The attributes entered in the Advanced Drawing Properties sheet are not used to label the drawing sheet themselves, but the values entered may be properties that are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design area, and may be "inherited" into label fields of these items. This inheritance is set up for each category of item (e.g. equipment) using the appropriate Configuration Category pane. -
Drawing History Settings Check the Show Drawing History checkbox if the Description dialog is to be displayed automatically when saving changes to a drawing and during the Synchronisation process. The dialog is used to enter comments regarding changes to the drawing.
-
Drawing Labels Settings This section is used to specify the positions of labels that may be used to label the drawing. The grid lists all the label types of the drawing properties under the Label Type heading. The description of each of the label types is displayed under the Description heading. Label types and descriptions cannot be edited. If a label is to be placed in its default position on the drawing, select N from the list in the Fix Position field. If a label is to be placed at specified coordinates, select Y. Note: Some drawing properties are not placed on drawings by default, for example minimum and maximum line and loop numbers. However, if coordinates are entered for them, they will be placed at these coordinates. Enter the X and Y coordinates of the label in the X and Y fields. For the drawing title label type (XDT) an Y offset may also be entered. This is because drawing title label may consist of multiple lines (up to 5). The Y offset specifies the vertical gap between each line. If any drawing title is to consist of more than one line, enter a number in the Y Offset (XDT Only) field. Note that the offset number should be negative, as second and subsequent lines should be placed below the first line.
This sub-category is used to specify the permitted format of entries into selected drawing properties fields. In the fields provided, enter the following characters as required: Code
Description
A
Upper Case Alpha Character [A-Z]
a
Lower Case Alpha Character [a-z]
M
Mixed Case Alpha Character [A-Z, a-z]
F
Upper Case Free Character [A-Z, 0-9, white space]
f
Lower Case Free Character [a-z, 0-9, white space]
X
Mixed Case Free Character [A-Z, a-z, 0-9, white space]
N
Numeric Character [0-9]
For example, if AaN is entered for the Design area Attribute field, when a user is completing this field in the Drawing Properties dialog, the first character must be an uppercase letter, the second a lower case letter, and the third a number. The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to each field.
To test how the validation will work in practice, make an entry in the Test Data field of the Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating whether or not the test data would be a valid entry. To directly edit the regular expression that comprises the validation entry, select the Advanced tab. The expression is displayed in the Regular Expression field and may be amended as required. For help on editing Regular Expressions, click on the help link displayed on this tab.
The Item Types Configuration Category is divided into two sub-categories:
•
•
Standard Sub-Set
•
Signal Sub-Set
Standard Sub-Set
This sub-category is used to set default drawing layers and colours for item types other than signal line item types. These are edited using the Signal sub-category. When an item is inserted into a drawing, it will be placed on the default layer in the default colour, unless another layer and colour are specified for that particular item as it is inserted. Layers are configured on the Drawing - Layers Sub-Set. If the item type of an item is not in the list on this pane, it will be placed on the current layer, in the default colour of that layer. The item colour will also be set to the default colour of the layer it is placed on if no colour is specified when the item is inserted. Item types that break into lines can alternatively be set to have a colour entry of 300. Such items will automatically assume the colour of the line that they are being inserted into. If the colour of an item is required to default to the drawing layer colour, set the colour to 256. The application pane consists of a grid with four columns - Item Type, Drawing Layer, Colour and Description. The Item Type and Description are not editable; edit the Drawing Layer name in the second field, and the colour of the layer in the third field.
Changing a Drawing Layer If a Drawing Layer is to be changed, scroll to the row in question and double click. The following list of values selection box will then be displayed:
Choose the required value from the list and press Enter to save the selection. -
Entering a Colour Code Scroll to the row in question. The colour box dialog button is displayed:
On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:
The Colour Code can be selected by the following four methods: •
Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
•
By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Items will automatically assume the colours of the owning items, e.g., the colours of the lines they are inserted into. When there is no owning item, they will be set to the default colour.
By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Items will automatically assume the colours of the layers they are inserted into, as set on the Layers Sub-Set the Drawing Configuration Category.
•
By manually entering the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the grid.
•
Signal Sub-Set
This sub-category is used to set default drawing layers (levels) and colours for signal line item types. It can also be used to create new signal line item types. To change the drawing layer or colour of a signal line item type, proceed as described above for standard item types. To add a new signal line item type, select the displayed:
button. The following dialog box is then
All signal line item type identifiers are three-letter codes beginning with "S". The "S" is added automatically to the beginning of the entered identifier. Enter the second and third characters and press OK.
The dialog box will be closed and the new item type will be displayed in the grid. Select a default drawing layer and change the default colour as required. Signal item types identifiers cannot be edited. The item type row must be deleted and reentered with a new identifier.
The Label Types application pane is used to set up the default layers, colours, text height and other text options of types of labels.
The application pane is divided into two sections.
•
Label Details Section This section contains the following settings: •
Select either the Metric or Imperial Label Units button. Labelling units may be changed part way through a project; drawings will be automatically updated with the new units when they are reloaded (these buttons perform the same function as those on the Project pane).
•
The Label Null Character field is used to choose the null character which is used during item labelling. During labelling, if data is not yet known, the null character, for example a question mark, may be put in its place. This may then be replaced with the "real" data at a later stage. If the null character is changed, the next time a drawing including the null character is loaded, the previous null character will be replaced with the new one.
•
If text styles are not in use on the project (see below), the Label Font field is used to specify the font of all labels. The default font is ROMANS, a standard AutoCAD font, but any other available font may be entered. The label font may be changed part way through a project. Drawings will be automatically updated with the new font when they are reloaded.
•
If text styles are to be used, check the Use Text Style checkbox. Select the default style in the Default Text Style field. Text styles are set up using the Text Styles pane. The
initial default will be the ROMANS style which is supplied with the product and does not need to be set up.
•
•
If unlabelled nozzles are to result in a warning being displayed during synchronisation, the Nozzle Error-Balloon Placement checkbox must be checked.
•
If unlabelled reducers are to result in an error being displayed during synchronisation, check the "Reducer Not Labelled' Error-Balloon Placement checkbox.
•
If unlabelled ports on port valves are to result in an error being displayed during synchronisation, check the Port Error-Balloon Placement checkbox. Port valves are valves that have ports whose sizes are inherited from attached pipes or may be individually labelled with their sizes if they are connected to a process link.
Label Types Grid Section This section is used to set up the default layers, colours, text height and other text options of types of labels.
•
•
The default justification and/or rotation of text can be overridden when a label is placed. If the label type of a label is not in the list in this section, it will be placed on the current layer/level, in the default colour of that layer/level, with a text height of 2.5mm or 1/8".
•
If a label is given a colour entry of 300 it will assume the colour of the owning item.
•
This section consists of a grid that includes the following columns - Label Type, Drawing Layer, Text Height, Text Options and Description. The Label Type and Description are not editable. Edit the Drawing Layer name in the second field, the Text Height in the third field, and the colour of the layer in the fourth field. See below for details on setting up these options.
•
The Text Options field is used to specify the justification of the label, and whether or not prompts will be received to specify text height and rotation when the label is inserted. See below for details on setting up these options.
•
If text styles are to be used, select text styles for labels from the list in the Text Style field, or leave set to the default style selected in the Default Text Style field (see above).
Changing a Drawing Layer If a Drawing Layer is to be changed, scroll to the row in question and double click. The following list of values selection box will then be displayed:
Choose the required value from the list and press Enter to save the selection.
Entering a Colour Code Scroll to the row in question. The colour box dialog button is displayed:
On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:
The Colour Code can be selected by the following three methods: •
Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
•
By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Labels will automatically assume the colours of the owning items. When there is no owning item, they will be set to the default colour.
•
By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Labels will automatically assume the colours of the layers they are inserted into, as set on the Layers Sub-Set the Drawing Configuration Category.
•
By manually entering the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the grid.
•
Editing Text Options Scroll to the row in question. The label options box dialog button is displayed:
The Label Options selection dialog box is then displayed:
Select the required options and press OK. The selected options will then be displayed in the grid as comma delimited text e.g. M, N, N. The first letter indicates the justification setting, the third letter the rotation setting. The second letter is an indicator related to a legacy setting that is no longer used. If Y is entered in the Rotation field, the text rotation is specified by the user when labels of this type are inserted.
The Text Styles application pane is used to set up text styles. These styles are subsequently applied to label types using the Label Types application pane. When an item is labelled, the label uses the text style applied to the label type.
•
Adding a Style If a style is to be added, select the
button. The following dialog box is then displayed:
Enter a style name and press the OK button. The dialog box will be closed and the entered new style name will be displayed in the grid. Style names cannot be edited. The style row must be deleted and re-entered with a new name.
•
Defining Text Styles 1. Allocate a type face for each new text style. 2. If a font file is to be used, enter Y in the Use Font File column, and select the file in the Font File column. 3. If a "Big Font" is to be used, enter Y in the Use Big Font column, and select the file in the Big Font File column. 4. Only fonts available to the AutoCAD installation may be selected. To check the available fonts, check the available font files, for example at C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2008\Fonts. 5. If the text style is to be bold or italic, enter Y as required in the Bold and/or Italic columns. 6. As required, enter the width of the text in the Text Width column.
The Symbols pane is used to update the definitions of all the symbols that can be inserted into a AVEVA P&ID drawing.
•
When the product is installed, a standard set of symbols is installed with it. Also installed is a default project. This includes symbol data as part of the project catalogue which includes settings that define the behaviour of all the standard symbols. A copy of symbol data is automatically copied into the directory structure of a new project whenever a new project is generated.
•
A project can be granted access to the standard set of symbols via the appropriate Standard Symbol Path, as displayed on the Project pane of the Administration program. In this way, a common set of symbols can be made available to all projects.
•
The standard symbol set can be changed simply by redrawing or replacing the standard symbols using AutoCAD. The default symbol data should also be changed to reflect this by the use of this screen in the administrator, replacing the symbol names of the supplied set with those of the replacement set.
•
If project specific symbols are required in addition to the standard symbol set, these can either be drawn in AutoCAD or preferably by using the Symbol Editor facility, and placed as appropriate in the project symbol directory.
•
The symbols grid of the Symbols pane provides facilities for adding definitions of project symbols to the project, and for editing them as required. These new definitions are added to the project copy of the symbol data in the project catalogue.
•
The pane in fact provides facilities for editing the settings of all symbols that are available to the project, including standard symbols. Since these changes are saved and stored in the project catalogue, changes made to the settings of standard symbols for a project do not change the default settings for these symbols as stored in the default project.
The application pane is divided into four sections.
Import Symbols Section This section contains two hyperlinks - Import/Re-Import ALL Standard Symbols and Import/ Re-Import ALL Project Symbols. On selection of Import/Re-Import ALL Standard Symbols, the following dialog box is called:
On selection of Import/Re-Import ALL Project Symbols, the following dialog box is called:
Select the Yes or No buttons as required. These options are used to replace the standard or project symbols currently listed in the symbols grid with those that are actually currently stored in the standard and project symbol directories respectively. This may be required if, for example: •
The standard symbols set has been changed since the project was created, and the project needs to be updated to reflect this.
•
A large number of new project specific symbols have been placed in the project symbol directory and need to be made available to the project. Usually it would be quicker to individually add definitions of new project symbols using the facilities available from the symbols grid, but if there are enough new symbols, it might be quicker to use the import facility.
After an import takes place, the settings of the imported symbols will have to be entered in the symbols grid, as the only fields that will be completed with anything other than default settings will be the Symbol Name fields. See below for details of completing the symbol grid and its facilities.
•
Symbol Viewer Section This section contains two hyperlinks - Open Symbol Viewer Window… and Close Symbol Viewer Window…
On selection of Open Symbol Viewer Window…, a window is opened in which the symbol currently selected in the symbol grid is graphically displayed. The Symbol Viewer is refreshed with the appropriate symbol if another symbol is selected from the symbol grid.
The window can be moved and 'docked' within the application pane. On selection of Close Symbol Viewer Window…, the viewer window is closed. Note: If using AutoCAD 2009, the AutoCAD background colour must be set to black in order to correctly display symbols in the Symbol Viewer Window. To do this, open the Symbol Editor Window (see below), and from the Tools menu, "Options Display" and then the "Colours" icon. Set the background colour to black, then save the Symbol Editor Window and close it.
•
User Defined Attributes Section After User-Defined Attributes (UDAs) have been added to symbols or edited using the Symbol Editor, in order to implement these changes to all project drawings, or to a selection of project drawings, the Refresh UDAs facility must be used. Click the Upgrade UDAs In Drawings hyperlink. The Refresh UDAs dialog is then opened. See below for more details.
•
Symbol Grid Section The Symbols grid is used to manage the properties of symbols. See below for guidance on entering symbol data.
Adding a New Symbol If a symbol definition is to be added to the project, select the dialog box is then displayed:
•
button. The following file
If a new symbol definition is to be created and added to the project, press the New button. Enter the name of the new symbol in the Symbol Name field. Select a P&ID type and enter a description in the PID Type and Symbol Description fields. Browse for the location for the new symbol file via the button adjacent to the File/Directory path field.
Note: In the case of pipe flags (off-sheet connectors), the symbol name must end with either -IN or -OUT depending on whether the flag symbol is intended to represent a connector into drawings or out of drawings. •
If an existing symbol definition is to be added to the project, one that has already been drawn, perhaps in another project, press the Existing button. Then browse for the appropriate symbol drawing file using the button adjacent to the File/Directory path field. Select a P&ID type and enter a description in the PID Type and Symbol Description fields.
When all details of the symbol have been entered, press OK. The dialog box will be closed and the values of the added symbol will be displayed in the grid. New symbols can now be drawn using the Symbol Editor, and Existing symbols edited. Symbol names cannot be edited. The symbol row must be deleted and re-entered with a new name.
•
Entering Symbol Data •
Column 1: Symbol Name
•
Column 2: P&ID Type
•
Column 3: Fixed Size or User Defined
•
Column 4: Insertion in Pipes, Links and Signal Lines
Note: In the case of port valves, most of the data described below is derived automatically from the physical attributes of the symbol drawing. The only attribute that may need to be set is the Number of Insert Points. -
Column 1: Symbol Name The column may contain a maximum of 32 characters and holds the name of the block defined by the user.
-
Column 2: P&ID Type Decide which AVEVA P&ID item type the new block falls into. If in doubt, look at the default blocks provided with the installation. Once decided, enter the 3 character type in this column in capital letters e.g. VLV-valve. The AVEVA P&ID type dictates the block's behaviour and labelling capabilities in the drawing. If uncertain, leave the symbol out and do this later. Establish whether it will appear in the instrument or valve list, if not, leave the symbol off the drawings completely. Do not insert it as a Miscellaneous item type otherwise it may be necessary to remove it, purge the drawing, reinsert the correct symbol and label it.
-
Column 3: Fixed Size or User Defined This setting determines whether the block can be re-sized or not. The only items which can be re-sized are equipment items of AVEVA P&ID types EQU, EQV and EQE Select 1 for Fixed or 2 for User Defined for these types only. Set to 0 for all other types.
-
Column 4: Insertion in Pipes, Links and Signal Lines This setting governs whether a block may break into a pipe, signal line or process link. Enter 1 for No or 2 for Yes. Take extra care when creating new symbols such as reducers and insulation; some only need to overlay the pipe and some actually need to break into a pipe in order to be exported correctly.
Column 5: Symbol Length Any block that is connected to or breaks into a line needs a length to be defined for it. This is because AVEVA P&ID needs to know the length of the corresponding break to be made in the line. Enter the length of the block, if applicable, as a decimal number e.g. 8.0. If 1 was the entry in column 4, enter 0.0 for null. Avoid entering lengths which divide by 2 to give an odd number, as this then forces the user to have a snap spacing of 1, which is too small to be workable.
-
Column 6: Break Offset The distance from the insert point of the block to the start of the break in the line, pipe etc. Enter 0.0 for null if the entry in Column 4 was 1 (No). Alternatively, enter the offset as a decimal number, e.g. 2.0. If the offset is not half the length, AVEVA P&ID will allow the picking of an offset distance moving in a left to right direction.
Column 7: Number of Insert Points The block may have one or more insert points depending on what it consists of e.g. spec break, reducer, handwheel. Enter 1 if the block should assume the angle of the pipe into which it is breaking or 0 degrees. Enter 2 if the program should ask the user for a second point to show the angle.
Note: The number of insertion points is significant when upgrading project symbols developed before AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3. Symbols with single insertion points may have to be upgraded manually. Refer to 2.1: Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects for details. -
Column 8: Graphical Creation Angle The graphical creation angle must be taken into account when creating blocks. The basic rule is that AVEVA P&ID subtracts the graphical creation angle from the angle of the pipe so that the group always aligns itself with the pipe upon insertion and hence looks "correct".
A graphical creation must be stated when creating 2-way, 3-way, or angled valves dependent on the insertion point.
Enter the graphical creation angle if applicable, as a decimal figure e.g. 90.0. This number can easily be changed using the Project Administration program if it is discovered that on insertion the angle is incorrect. Often the easiest way of understanding this requirement is to change the angle and make an insertion; go back to the Project Administration program and keep altering it until the desired result is achieved. -
Column 9: Graphical Trace Around Enter 2 if the block is an inline item and should be traced around. Enter 1 if the symbol should not be traced around.
-
Column 10: Trace Width Enter a decimal number to denote the width of the tracing. Enter 0.0 for null.
-
Column 11: Item Type This prompt is shown when a symbol is inserted. It is a description of the block which may be up to 32 characters in length.
Column 12: Valve Type For instruments only, the type of valve e.g. globe. Enter up to 32 characters or NONE if this column does not apply.
-
Column 13: Valve Actuator Type For instruments only, the type of actuator on a valve e.g. diaphragm. Enter up to 32 characters or NONE if this column does not apply.
-
Column 14: Instrument Location For instruments only, the location of the instrument e.g. panel, rack etc. Enter up to 32 characters and NONE if this column does not apply.
-
Column 15: PDMS Type Field used by AVEVA Model Management and PDMS.
-
Column 16: PDMS Sub Type Field used by AVEVA Model Management and PDMS.
Updating UDAs After User-Defined Attributes (UDAs) have been added to symbols or edited using the Symbol Editor, in order to implement these changes to all project drawings, or to a selection of project drawings, the Refresh UDAs facility must be used. Click the Upgrade UDAs In Drawings hyperlink. The Refresh UDAs dialog is then opened.
In the Select Drawing Folder field, select the folder in which the drawings to be updated are located, or press the Browse button to browse for the required folder. All the AVEVA P&ID drawings in the selected folder are then listed.
To select a drawing to be updated with the UDA changes, check the appropriate Select File checkbox. To select all drawings, check the Select All checkbox. When the required drawings have been selected, select the Process button. A warning message is then displayed advising the user to ensure that none of the drawings selected
are currently being edited. Assuming that this is the case, select the OK button. The selected drawings are then updated with the UDA changes. The Progress field will indicate the progress of the operation.
To view details of the process once it is complete, press the View Log button. The log of the process will then be displayed in Notepad.
The log will list for each selected drawing, which UDAs have been added or deleted and the symbols to they have been added/deleted to/from. To close the Refresh UDAs dialog, select the Exit button.
The List of Values set application pane is used to edit the lists of values available when labelling items. A default set of lists of values is provided with the product. If online validation is active (as described later in the Miscellaneous Configuration Category topic), data entered during labelling is checked against these lists, with only values in these lists being valid. User-defined lists can also be created.
Select the required validation data set from this list. The content of the data set is then displayed in the grid below and may be edited as required. For more information see Principle and Concepts - Validation. The list also includes any user-defined lists of values. See below for the procedure for creating user-defined lists of values. The list also includes the AlphaNumeric/Numeric equivalent Size list. This is used to specify the numeric equivalents of alphanumeric size values, to be used when data is exported, for example to a Schematic database.
In the above example, the alphanumeric size value of 20A has a numeric equivalent of 20. As a result, when size values of 20A are exported, they will automatically be converted to 20.
•
Adding a Value If a value is to be added, select the
button. The following dialog box is then displayed:
2:63
12.1
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Project Configuration
Enter a unique value and press the OK button. The dialog box will be closed and the entered new value will be displayed in the grid. Enter a description in the adjacent Description field. To edit a value, select the displayed.
button and enter the new value in the dialog that is then
Note: In order for reducers to automatically change orientation, so that the wide end is always connected to the larger pipe size and the narrow end is always connected to the smaller pipe size, the list of values for sizes used on the project (Metric Sizes or Imperial Sizes) must set up sorted from smallest size to largest size.
•
Editing Pipe Styles Data entered on this application pane includes the pipe styles that are valid for the project. Select Pipe Styles from the drop down list. Update existing values, or add new pipe styles as required. If the style of a pipe that exists on a drawing is changed, the drawing will be updated with the new style when it is reloaded. 1. In the Multi-Line (Y/N) field enter Y if the new style is to consist of multiple lines, otherwise enter N. For further details on creating multi-lines, refer to AutoCAD documentation. 2. In the Line Type field, select the AutoCAD line type that the new style is to be based on. 3. Enter a meaningful description in the Description field. 4. If the change the drawing layer that pipes of a pipe style are to be placed on, double click on the appropriate field. Choose the required value from the list of values that is then displayed and press Enter to save the selection. 5. To change the colour of a pipe style, double click on the appropriate field. The colour box dialog button is displayed:
On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:
The Colour Code can be selected by the following three methods: •
Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
•
By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Items will automatically assume the colours of the owning items. When there is no owning item, they will be set to the default colour.
•
By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Labels will automatically assume the colours of the layers they are inserted into, as set on the Layers Sub-Set the Drawing Configuration Category.
•
By manually entering the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the grid.
•
Creating User-Defined Lists of Values To create a user-defined list of values, select this button in the User-Defined List of Values section of the pane:
.
The following dialog box is then displayed:
Enter the name of the new list of values and press the OK button. The dialog box will be closed and the name of the list will be displayed in the grid in the User-Defined List of Values section. Note that the application automatically prefixes the names of user-defined lists of values with "USERLOV_".
The LOV File Name field displays the filename of the list. This is automatically generated and cannot be changed. Once a list of values has been created, it can be selected from the list of list of values at the top of the pane. The values that comprise the list can then be entered as described above. The toolbar buttons in the User-Defined List of Values section work in the same way as those in the upper section, as described above. Use these to rename lists of values, sort the lists in the grid, delete lists etc. To edit a list of values name, select the that is then displayed.
The fields in this application pane are used to set up the configuration properties of pipes. The application pane is divided into twelve sections. -
Settings Section If items are to inherit some of their properties from the pipe that they are owned by, the Inherit Item Labels from Owner Pipe checkbox must be checked. If pipe connection size data is to be output when synchronising with a VPE Workbench database, ensure that the Pipe Size Connection Output checkbox is checked. Select the default style of process links in the Default Process Link Style field. Select the default style of instrument process links (also known as "Legacy" process links) in the Default Instrument Process Link Style field.
-
Breaks Section This section contains the following settings: •
The 'Automatic Breaks ON' checkbox governs whether pipes break automatically or not when crossed by another pipe. If the checkbox is not checked, warnings are given that junctions have not been formed when pipes cross each other. If the checkbox is checked, pipelines drawn crossing other pipes will be drawn with breaks positioned according to the setting of the Break Pipe Direction field (see below).
•
The Break Distance field is used to set the width of the gap created in the pipe when it is broken by another. This distance separates the break symbols.
•
Depending on which Break Pipe Direction button is selected, Horizontal and Vertical, pipes will either break vertically or horizontally, assuming the Automatic Breaks ON checkbox has been checked.
•
The Symbol Name field is used to specify the break symbol inserted when a pipe is broken, e.g. LBRK. The symbol name is selected from a drop down list.
•
The Symbol Layer field is used to specify the layer on which the break symbols reside. The layer name is selected from a drop down list.
•
The Symbol Colour field defines the colour of the break symbol inserted when a pipe is broken. The Browse button adjacent to the Symbol Colour field is used to select the colour. On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:
The Colour Code can be selected using the following methods: •
Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
•
By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Items will automatically assume the colours of the owning items, e.g., the colours of the lines they are inserted into. When there is no owning item, they will be set to the default colour.
•
By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Items will automatically assume the colours of the layers they are inserted into, as set on the Layers SubSet the Drawing Configuration Category.
•
By manually entering the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the Symbol Colour field. -
Flow Arrows Section This section contains the following settings:
-
•
The Automatic Arrows checkbox governs the presence or absence of flow arrows at the direction change points of pipes.
•
The Symbol Name field specifies which flow arrow symbol is used. The symbol name is selected using the drop down list.
Values to Remember from Last Pipe Edit Section The section contains fifteen checkboxes - Size, Fluid/Service, Number, Area, Specification, Insulation (Table), Insulation (Index), Insulation (Condition), Paint Code, Tracing (Number), Tracing (Size), Tracing (Type), Project Field 1, Project Field 2 and Project Field 3. A project can be configured so that a value entered in a field in a Properties dialog is "remembered" by the same field when that Properties dialog is accessed again when labelling another, previously unlabelled, item of that type. If, for example, the functionality is switched on for the pipe Number field, and a pipe is labelled with a value of "001". The next time a pipe is labelled for the first time, when the Properties dialog for this item is opened, the Number field will automatically be completed with the value "001". This can be replaced by another value if required. This new value will then be the "remembered" value for the pipe Number field. This functionality is switched on and off for individual Properties dialog fields by checking and unchecking the checkboxes in this section.
-
Label Validation Across P&IDs Section The project may be set to check that all pipe labels in all P&IDs in a project are unique. •
Select the Prevent button if users are to be prevented from entering project duplicate pipe labels. If this is attempted, an error message is displayed and the duplicate label may not be placed on the P&ID.
Select the Warn button if users are to be warned if they enter project duplicate pipe labels. The entry of duplicate labels is permitted in this case, but an error message will be displayed on the P&ID, and will accompany the pipe label data when transferred to VPE Workbench.
•
If no uniqueness validation of pipe labels across P&IDs is required, select Ignore button. Duplicate pipe labels may be entered in different P&IDs in this case. Duplicate pipe labels are still not permitted in the same P&ID.
Duplicate pipe labels are not regarded as duplicates if the pipes in question are connected with cross-sheet connectors. Note that if the Prevent or Warn options are set, a connection to the VPE Workbench database must be established before labels can be edited. This is because in order to check the uniqueness of labels across a project, AVEVA P&ID refers to the VPE Workbench database. -
Size Consistency Section If the synchronisation process is to check that nozzle and pipe sizes match and to report any mismatches as errors, check the Enforce Nozzle and Pipe Size Match checkbox. If this checkbox is checked, any such mismatches must be corrected before the nozzles and pipes in question can be successfully synchronised.
-
Populate Specification in Database Section If specification values are not going to be entered into the P&IDs, but populated in VPE Workbench instead, check the Populate Spec in Database checkbox.
-
Inheritance Section The values of pipe attributes may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on the Advanced Drawing Properties sheet. The values entered for these sheet attributes may be values that are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design area. The inheritance facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The attributes of items that do not share these common values may subsequently be edited manually using their properties sheets. The Inheritance section is used to select which pipe attributes are to inherit values from which sheet attributes. As required, select for each pipe attribute the sheet attribute field from which values are to be inherited. Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings Sub-Set.
-
Reducer Setting Section From the Reducer Label Format list, select the direction in which reducer labels are to be orientated.
If "Flow Direction" is selected, the first part of the label (i.e. the first diameter) is positioned on the upstream side of the reducer and the second part of the label on the downstream side of the reducer, e.g.:
If "Largest size first" is selected, the first part of the label is placed on the wider side of the reducer, the second part on the narrower side:
If "Smallest size first" is selected, the first part of the label is placed on the narrower side of the reducer, the second part on the wider side:
Note: In order for this functionality to work correctly, the list of values for sizes used on the project (Metric Sizes or Imperial Sizes) must set up sorted from smallest size to largest size. Lists of values are set up using the List of Values Configuration Category. -
Cascade Settings Section By default, when the properties of parent pipe label are edited, any changes to these properties may immediately be reflected in the labelling of the branches off that pipe. If required, this cascading of changes may be disabled for selected properties. If this is required, check the Disabled Cascading in Branches checkbox.
To select the property fields to be excluded from cascading, select the Browse button adjacent to the Select Fields to Disable field. The Select Fields to Disable Cascading dialog box is then displayed:
Select the fields to be disabled from the list of values and then select the OK button. The Select Fields to Disable field will then list the numbers representing the selected fields. Note: Fields specified for unique validation (see the Labels Sub-Set below) will still be cascaded regardless of these settings. -
Legacy Settings Section Check the Use Legacy Process Link checkbox if the pre-AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3 type of process links are to be used (PLK item type). These are known as "Legacy" or instrument process links. If this checkbox is not checked (default setting), process links are drawn as pipes (i.e. as branches between main pipes and offline items - PMA item type) in the process link pipe style.
-
Synchronise warning settings or unconnected items Section If, when a drawing is synchronised, a warning message is to be displayed on the drawing for “unconnected” items, i.e. items for which owner details are not available, check the Display owner warning checkbox.
The fields in this application pane are used to set up the pipe label configuration format. The application pane is divided into eleven sections. -
Main Pipe Label Colour Section The Main Pipe Label Colour field defines the colour of the pipe label that is selected in the pipe label set to represent the main values of the pipe.
The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the colour. On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:
The Colour Code can be selected using the following methods: •
Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
•
By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Labels will automatically assume the colours labelled items. When there is no owning item, they will be set to the default colour.
•
By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Labels will automatically assume the colours of the layers they are inserted into, as set on the Layers sub-category of the Drawing Configuration Category.
•
By manually entering the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the Main Pipe Label field. -
Default Reporting Label Format Section A pipe may be labelled with labels in various formats. One of these labels may be set as the default label, i.e. the label that will be used to identify the pipe in the database. If required, such labels may be highlighted on drawings by having them displayed in a different colour. If this is required, check the Default Reporting Label Format checkbox. To select the colour, select the Browse button adjacent to the Default Reporting Label Colour field, and select the colour from the Colour dialog (see above). The number code of the selected colour is then displayed in the field.
-
Source and Destination Formats Section A different display format from the normal display format (see below) may be used for pipe source and destination labels on a drawing, where the sources and/or destinations are different pipes. This section is used to switch on this facility and to define the required formats. Check the Source Label Format and/or Destination Label Format checkboxes as required to switch on this facility for source/and or destination formats. The buttons next to the Select Source Label Format and Select Destination Label Format are used to open the Tag Format Editor field in which the required format may defined.
See the Display Label Format section below for details.
-
Pipe Label Format Section This section contains the following settings: •
When using the properties dialog for pipe labelling, it is possible to toggle between standard and single-field pipe labelling. The Fixed Pipe Label Format checkbox determines which the default setting is. If fixed (i.e. standard) pipe labelling is on, the whole of a pipe label must be placed on the drawing. If switched off, the option is available to place individual fields of the pipe label on the drawing.
•
The Pipe Label Format fields are used to select the fields included in pipe labels, and the order in which they are displayed. Pipe labels may consist of up to fifteen fields and must include Size, Number and Specification (unless the 'Populate Spec in Database' checkbox is set) as a minimum.
The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the format. On selection of the button, the Pipe Label Format dialog box is displayed:
The Pipe Label Format can be selected by using the drop down lists. A field cannot be selected twice. Following selection, press OK. The selected Pipe Label Format will then be shown in the Pipe Label Format field as a set of values separated by commas, e.g. 1,3,5,6,10. The numbers represent label fields are follows: 1. Size 2. Fluid/Service 3. Number 4. Area 5. Specification 6. Insulation (Table) 7. Insulation (Index) 8. Insulation (Condition) 9. Paint Code 10. Tracing (No of Tracers) 11. Tracing (Size) 12. Tracing (Type) 13. Project1 (Project definable) 14. Project2 (Project definable)
Display Label Format Section This section contains the following settings: •
The Display Label Format fields are used to select the types of data displayed in pipe labels, and the order in which they are displayed. Fields may appear in a different order from those of the "actual" pipe label, and fields that are in the "actual" pipe label may be left out, though additional fields may not be included. At least one display label format must be set up. Multiple display label formats may set up, one of which will be set as the default. When labelling pipes, the label will default to this format, but another format may be selected if required. The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the format. On selection of the button, the Select a Tag Format dialog is displayed:
The dialog lists the existing display formats. To set a format as the default, select if from the list and select the Set as Default button. The current default format is indicated by the word "True" in the IsDefault column. To edit a format, select it and then select the Edit button. The Tag Format Editor dialog is then displayed. Edit the format as described below. To delete a format, select it and then select the Delete button.
To create a new format, select the New button. The Tag Format Editor dialog is then displayed.
The Tag Format field cannot be edited. It displays the current display label format configuration (i.e. the selected fields and delimiters). Enter a description of the format in the Description field. If required, enter any additional information in the Remarks field. The format is selected by using the drop down lists below these fields. A field cannot be selected twice. Unlike the "actual" pipe label format, which uses the delimiter entered in the Delimiter field (see below) for every part of the label, the display format may have different delimiters displayed after each label component. Enter a delimiter for each label field used, or leave blank if no delimiter is required. When the new display label format has been set up, select the Save button. The new format is then added to the list in the Select a Tag Format dialog. If required, set it as the default display label format as described above. Press OK. The default display label format will then be shown in the Pipe Label Format field, e.g. 1,-,2,-,3,/,4,-,5,. Refer to the previous section (above) for the meanings of these numbers. •
The Delimiter field defines the delimiter separating the Pipe Label Format fields. The use of a '|' character is restricted as this is the delimiter used in the transfer files to VPE Workbench.
•
The Unique Validation field is used to specify which combination of fields in pipe labels are to be checked for uniqueness.
The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the values. On selection of the button, the Unique Validation dialog box is displayed:
The Unique Validation fields can be selected by using the drop down lists. Following selection, press OK, and the selected Unique Validation values will be shown in the Unique Validation field. e.g. 2, 9, 11. •
The Trim Label Prefix field is used to specify the text prefix to the trim identifier in a trim label. Whenever a trim label is created on a vessel, this word appears in front of the main label. If no prefix is required, change the setting to NONE.
•
If a delimiter is required after an area code, the Delimiter After Area Field checkbox must be checked if display label format is not being used.
•
If a delimiter is not required after an area code, the program needs to know how many characters are allowed for the Area field. Complete the Number of Characters fields with this value.
Note: Changes to drawings resulting from changes to the Display Label Format settings are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded. See 8.2.3: Updating PipeTags. -
Project Definable Fields Section The fields in the Project Definable Fields section specify the boilerplate text for the three project definable fields, which appear on the pipe labelling Properties dialog. These fields are not validated within AVEVA P&ID. The values in these fields are exported, so the field titles should match those set-up for the Line Tag in VPE Workbench. The fields may be validated during the Issue to Engineering operation into VPE Workbench.
If required, from the adjacent drop-down lists, select lists of values that entries in these fields must be chosen from. If this is not required, select the value from the list (this is the default entry). Lists of values are set up on the List of Values Configuration Category of the Administration program. -
Split Format Section It is possible to place some fields of a pipe label above the pipe and the remainder below the pipe. This is termed Split Pipe Labelling and is controlled by the three fields in the Split Format section. The Split After Field field is used to indicate which field in the pipe format to split on. The number entered here determines how many fields to count from the left of the pipe label before the split occurs. The Y offset above line and Y offset below line fields are used to specify the positions of the two parts of the label as follows: •
If a pipe label symbol (see below) is not placed with a split label, the Y offset above line value is not used. The first part of the label is placed at the position specified by the user.
•
If a pipe label symbol is placed with a split label, the first part of the label is offset by the amount specified in the Y offset above line field from the insertion point of the pipe label symbol, plus the offset specified in the Symbol X Offset and Symbol Y fields in the Pipe Label Symbols section (see below). It is recommended that 0 is entered in this field.
•
Whether or not a pipe label symbol is placed, the second part of the label is then offset from the first part of the label by the amount specified in the Y offset below line field.
Note: The Y offset above line setting will be overridden by the Offset Distance setting (see below) if the Fix pipe label position checkbox is checked.# -
Define Split labels and offset for symbol Section If split label formatting (see above) is to be used and a pipe labels symbol (see above) is to be used, up to four label fields may be placed before the split in the selected label symbol. This section is used to select which fields will be placed in the symbol and their to define their positions in the symbol. Select the required fields from the list of values in the Label Type field. Select from the list where no field is required. Select the position of each field relative to the insertion point of the label symbol in the Offset X and Offset Y fields.
-
Display Instrument Labels at Pipe Destination Section This section contains the following settings: •
In the Display Instrument Labels at Pipe Destination Section, if the Pipe Instrument Labelling checkbox is checked, instrument labels will be used for a pipes source or destination.
•
The Instruments Allowing Labelling field is used to enter the list of instrument types which will be used as valid pipe sources or destinations. Enter a list of item types, for example: IRA,IR3,IR4,IRV,IBD.
Pipe Label Symbols Section This section contains the following settings:
-
•
If the Pipe Label Symbol checkbox is checked, a symbol will be placed with fixed pipe labels. For example, a box may be placed around the labels.
•
The Symbol Name field is used to select the name of the symbol that will be placed with the pipe labels.
•
The Symbol X Offset and Symbol Y fields control the offset of the labels in relation to the point selected when placing pipe symbols. Note that for split labels, the label insertion point may be further adjusted by the entry in the Y offset above line field (see above).
Fix Single Pipe Label from owner segment If the Fix pipe label position checkbox is checked, pipe labels subsequently placed will automatically be placed a fixed distance from the pipe segments they are labelling. This does not change the positioning of labels placed before the checkbox was checked. Enter the distance that labels are to be placed from pipe segments in the Offset Distance field.
•
Validation Sub-Set
This section is used to specify the permitted format of entries into selected pipe label fields.
In the fields provided, enter the following characters as required: Code
Description
A
Upper Case Alpha Character [A-Z]
a
Lower Case Alpha Character [a-z]
M
Mixed Case Alpha Character [A-Z, a-z]
F
Upper Case Free Character [A-Z, 0-9, white space]
f
Lower Case Free Character [a-z, 0-9, white space]
X
Mixed Case Free Character [A-Z, a-z, 0-9, white space]
N
Numeric Character [0-9]
For example, if AaN is entered for the Number field, when a user is completing this field in the Pipe labelling Properties dialog, the first character must be an uppercase letter, the second a lower case letter, and the third a number. The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to each field.
To test how the validation will work in practice, make an entry in the Test Data field of the Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating whether or not the test data would be a valid entry. To directly edit the regular expression that comprises the validation entry, select the Advanced tab. The expression is displayed in the Regular Expression field and may be amended as required. For help on editing Regular Expressions, click on the help link displayed on this tab.
Automatic Tag Format Sub-Set If pipes are to be tagged automatically, the format of pipe tags is defined using this subcategory.
If automatic tagging is to be used, check the Apply Project based Auto Tagging checkbox. Place the cursor in the Tag Expression field, and select the Insert Counter button. The counter is added like so: [Counter]. Enter the number that the counter is to be incremented by in the Increment By field. Select the length of the counter number from the list in the Format field. To clear the Tag Expression field, select the Clear button. The counter may be reset to 0 for the project by selecting the Reset Counter button.
The Signal Styles application pane is used to configure signal styles for the project.
The first section of the application pane consists of a Default Signal Line Style field, which has a drop down list for selecting the default Signal Style.
•
Creating New Signal Line Styles If a signal line style is to be created, select the displayed:
button. The following dialog box is then
Enter a unique value for the signal line style and press the OK button.
The dialog box will be closed and the entered new value will be displayed in the Signal Name column. Once a signal line style has been added its layer and colour must be configured in the Item Types - Signal Sub-Set. For the complete procedure for creating new signal line styles, see 2.7: Defining a New Signal Line Type.
•
Editing Signal Styles When editing an existing signal line style, you can select a P&ID Type from a list of values, select the base AutoCAD line style from the Line Type field, and add or change the description in the Type field. When defining a new signal style, a new P&ID type has to be created. This is achieved by assigning a unique type value of three characters, starting with 'S'. AVEVA P&ID will then recognize this as a new signal line type. Then select the base AutoCAD line style from the Line Type field, and add or change the description in the Type field. To edit a signal style name, select the is then displayed.
The Tracing application pane is used to configure tracing styles for the project.
The application pane is divided into two sections. The first section contains the following settings: •
In the Offset field, enter the distance between pipe lines and the tracing lines on project P&IDs. Must be at least 1mm or 0.075".
•
From the Default field select the default graphical tracing style from the list of available styles (e.g. ELEC).
•
From the Select Trace File field, select the tracing file that you wish to edit. The contents of the selected file are then displayed in the grid section. There are four tracing files.
•
The Graphical Tracing Style file controls the appearance of the different tracing styles on project P&IDs, while the others are lists of values used when tracing is defined in pipe label fields.
Two default graphical styles, ELEC and STEAM, are supplied with the product. These styles may be edited, and new styles added as required. The other three files contain the lists of values available from the fields on the Pipe Properties dialog used for defining the tracing properties of pipes: Code, Size and Type. The second section of the application pane consists of a grid. This grid is used to edit the selected trace file. When defining a new graphical tracing style, or editing an existing one, you can select the base AutoCAD line style from the Line Type field, and add or change a descriptive name in the Trace Type field. When editing one of the other files, you can add, change or delete values as required.
Creating a new Tracing Style or Value If a tracing style or value is to be created, select the then displayed:
button. The following dialog box is
Enter a unique name for the tracing style, or a new value as appropriate, and press the OK button. The dialog box will be closed and the entered new entry will be displayed in the grid. To edit a tracing style name, select the is then displayed.
The application pane is divided into seven sections. -
Number of TAG fields Section If four tag fields are to be used for project instruments (Prefix, Type, Number, Suffix), select the 4 Tag Fields option. If six tag fields are to be used for project instruments (Block, Function, Prefix, Type, Number, Suffix), select the 6 Tag Fields option. Note: Two extra tag fields (block and Function) were introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP1. Before a project can use these two new fields, the project database schema must be updated by selecting the Upgrade Database Schema - Upgrade button on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category.
-
Values to Remember from Last Instrument Edit Section This section contains a number of checkboxes - Block, Function, Prefix, Type, Number, Suffix, Descriptor, Pattern Reference, Alarm 1, Alarm 2, Alarm 3, Alarm 4, Size and Specification. Note that the Block and Function checkboxes are only active if the 6 Tag Fields option in the Number of Tag fields section is selected. A project can be configured so that a value entered in a field in a Properties dialog is "remembered" by the same field when that Properties dialog is accessed again when labelling another, previously unlabelled, item of that type. If, for example, the functionality is switched on for the instrument Prefix field, and an instrument is labelled with a value of "20". The next time an instrument is labelled for the first time, when the Properties dialog for this item is opened, the Prefix field will automatically be completed with the value "20". This can be replaced by another value if required. This new value will then be the "remembered" value for the instrument Prefix field. This functionality is switched on and off for individual Properties dialog fields by checking and unchecking the checkboxes in this section.
-
Instrument Panel Dialog Labels Section This section contains four fields, which are used to specify the boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Prefix, Tag, Number and Suffix in the Instrument Panel Reference Properties dialog and other dialogs.
-
Instrument Dialog Labels and List of Values Section This section contains four or six active fields, depending on the setting in the Number of Tag fields section. They are used to specify the boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Block, Function, Prefix, Tag, Number and Suffix in the Label Instrument Properties dialog and other dialogs.
The first two fields are not active if the 4 Tag Fields option in the Number of Tag fields section is selected, i.e.:
In the Delimiter After Field 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 fields, enter the delimiters used to separate the fields. Note that these delimiters are not displayed on P&IDs or in the Engineering Explorer. They are used to ensure tag format consistency when exporting to PDMS via the ISO15926/P&ID Manager interface. If required, from the drop-down lists next to each field, select the list of values against which entries in a tag field are to be validated: Area Code, Block Code, Function Code or Instrument Type. •
Area Code
•
Block Code
•
Equipment Type
•
Function Code
•
Imperial Size
•
Instrument Type Letter
•
Insulation Table
•
Insulation Condition
•
Insulation Index
•
Metric Size
•
Paint Code
•
Service/Fluid Code
•
Specification Code
•
Valve Code
•
Valve Closure
A list cannot be selected more than once. Lists of values are set up on the List of Values Configuration Category of the Administration program. Note: List of values validation takes priority over both pipe label inheritance and sheet attribute inheritance (see below). -
Inheritance Section This section contains the following settings: •
If instrument properties are to be inherited from owner pipes the Inherit Item Labels from Owner Pipes checkbox must be checked. Note the Inherit Item Labels from Owner Pipes checkbox on the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Set must also be checked, as this activates the pipe label inheritance feature for the project as a whole.
Note: If an instrument label field is set to be validated against a list of values its Fields from Pipes field will not be accessible. List of values validation takes priority over pipe label inheritance. However, pipe label inheritance takes priority over sheet attribute inheritance (see below). •
If item labels are to be inherited from owner pipes, the fields to be inherited from for each label are specified in the Instrument Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix fields, plus the Block and Function fields if the 6 Tag Fields option in the Number of Tag fields section is selected.
•
The Browse button adjacent to these fields is used to select the fields to be inherited from. On selection of the button, the following dialog box is displayed:
The fields required are selected using the drop down lists. Following selection, press OK. The selected fields will then be displayed in the Instrument Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix fields, plus the Block and Function fields if the 6 Tag Fields option in the Number of Tag fields section is selected. •
The values of instrument labels may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on the Advanced Drawing Properties sheet. The values entered for these sheet attributes may be values that are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design area. The inheritance facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The labels of items that do not share these common values may subsequently be edited manually using their properties sheets. The Fields from Sheet Attribute fields are used to select which instrument label fields are to inherit values from which sheet attributes. As required, select for each instrument label field the sheet attribute field from which values are to be inherited.
Note: If an instrument label field is already set to inherit from the owning pipe, or is set to be validated against a list of values (see above), its Fields from Sheet Attribute field will not be accessible. Both list of values validation and Pipe label inheritance take priority over sheet attribute inheritance.
Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings SubSet. •
Instrument label fields that inherit values from sheet attributes can be hidden, i.e. though they are part of instrument labels and will be included in any exports of P&ID data, they are not displayed on P&IDs. To hide an inherited instrument label field, check the checkbox next to the field in question. The Type and Number fields cannot be hidden.
Note: Changing these settings will not change the appearance existing item labels. Only the appearance of labels subsequently added to a drawing will be affected. -
Label Validation Across P&IDs Section The project may be set to check that all instrument labels in all P&IDs in a project are unique. •
Select the Prevent button if users are to be prevented from entering project duplicate instrument labels. If this is attempted, an error message is displayed and the duplicate label may not be placed on the P&ID.
•
Select the Warn button if users are to be warned if they enter project duplicate instrument labels. The entry of duplicate labels is permitted in this case, but an error message will be displayed on the P&ID, and will accompany the instrument label data when transferred to VPE Workbench.
•
If no uniqueness validation of instrument labels across P&IDs is required, select Ignore button. Duplicate instrument labels may be entered in different P&IDs in this case. Duplicate instrument labels are still not permitted in the same P&ID.
Note that if the Prevent or Warn options are set, a connection to the VPE Workbench database must be established before labels can be edited. This is because in order to check the uniqueness of labels across a project, AVEVA P&ID refers to data that is extracted from the VPE Workbench database. -
Instrument Loop Tag Section This section is used to define which fields are used to identify instrument loops, and which of these fields are inherited by instruments in loops. This section contains four or six pairs of checkboxes, depending on the setting in the Number of Tag fields section. •
As required, check the Block, Function, Prefix and/or Suffix checkboxes to define which fields are to be used to identify instrument loops.
•
The Type and Number checkboxes are checked automatically and cannot be unchecked. Type and Number are the minimum fields required to identify instrument loops.
•
If instruments within a loop are to inherit values from the loop they are in, check the appropriate Inherit Field to Instrument checkbox. For example, if instruments in a loop are to inherit the function of the loop, check the Inherit Function to Instrument checkbox.
•
If an Inherit Field to Instrument checkbox is checked, the adjacent loop field checkbox is checked automatically. For example if the Inherit Function to Instrument checkbox is checked, the Function checkbox is checked automatically.
•
The Inherit Type to Instrument checkbox is unchecked automatically and cannot be changed. The instrument type cannot be inherited.
•
The Inherit Number to Instrument checkbox is checked automatically and cannot be changed. The instrument type is always inherited.
The Display Label Format Fields field is used to select the types of data displayed in instrument loop labels, and the order in which they are displayed. Fields may appear in a different order from those of the "actual" label, and fields that are in the "actual" label may be left out, though additional fields may not be included. The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the format. On selection of the button, the Display Label Format dialog box is displayed:
Use the lists of values to select which fields are to be displayed, and the order that they are to be displayed in. For example, if Type is to appear first, select Type from the list of values in the Field 1 field. A field will not be available for selection unless its checkbox has been checked to specify that it will be part of instrument loop tags, as described above. The number of active fields in the dialog depends on the number of checkboxes checked. As required, enter a delimiter character in the field adjacent to each field selection list. For example, if the Type part of an instrument loop display label is to be separated from the next field in the label by a “-”, enter that symbol in the field next to the field in which Type is selected. Following selection, press OK. The selected Display Label Format will then be shown in the Display Label Format Fields field, e.g. 1,-,2.
The application pane is divided into six sections: -
Label Options Section This section contains the following settings:
-
•
The setting of the Loop Numbers from VPE Workbench checkbox determines whether the instrument loop is imported from VPE Workbench or not. If this checkbox is checked, a temporary loop number is assigned to each instrument when data is exported to VPE Workbench and the loop numbers are then edited in VPE Workbench and exported back to P&ID. When the P&ID is subsequently opened the loop numbers are revised accordingly. If this checkbox is checked the loop numbers are read only in P&ID.
•
If instrument prefixes are required for the project, ensure that the Prefix Label Required checkbox is checked.
•
If instrument labels are to be rotated when the symbol they are associated with is rotated, ensure that the Rotate Labels with Symbol checkbox is checked.
Label Balloon Section This section contains the following settings:
-
•
In the Label Balloon Symbol field, select the symbol name of the Instrument Label Balloon symbol from the drop down list.
•
If all link lines between instruments and their balloons are to be switched off, then ensure that the Label Balloon Link Lines Off checkbox is checked. This setting will not update existing instruments when the drawing is reloaded.
Instrument Label Position Section The fields in this section govern the positions of the different elements that make up an instrument label, relative to the insert point of the labelled instrument. In the fields provided, enter the X and Y coordinates for the instrument labels components. The number of fields in which positions can be entered depends on the option selected in the Number of Tag fields section of the Settings pane. If the 4 Tag fields option is selected, the first two fields (Block and Function) will not be active. If different label positions are needed for different types of instrument balloons, the default positioning can be overridden by selecting the Instrument Label Positional data option in the List of Values Configuration Category.
-
Unique Tags Section The Unique Validation field is used to specify which combination of fields in instrument labels are to be checked for uniqueness.
The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the values. On selection of the button, the Select Unique Identifier(s) dialog box is displayed:
The fields can be selected by using the drop down lists. A field cannot be selected twice. Following selection, press OK, and the numbers of the selected Unique Validation fields will be shown in the Unique Validation field. e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. The numbers represent label fields are follows: 1. Block 2. Function 3. Prefix 4. Tag 5. Number 6. Suffix For example, if PREFIX, SUFFIX, NUMBER, TYPE was selected, the field would display: 3,6,5,4. Note that if the 4 Tag fields option in the Number of Tag fields section of the Settings pane is selected, the first two lists will not be active. Note that, although can be selected from the drop down lists, all fields must be selected. If is selected for any field, the format will reset to the default format of 1,2,3,4. -
Instrument Panel Label Position Section The fields in this section govern the positions of the different elements that make up a panel label, relative to the insert point of the instrument panel reference symbols. In the fields
provided, enter the X and Y coordinates for the Prefix, Letters, Number and Suffix parts of the instrument panel labels. Panel reference label positioning does not automatically update on reload of the drawing if these settings have been changed. -
I/O Label Position Section This section contains the following settings:
•
•
If I/O labels are to be placed on the Non-plot layer, ensure that the Labels on Non-Plot Layer checkbox is checked.
•
I/O labels must be automatically positioned in the same place for each I/O symbol and the X, Y offsets in the Offset from Symbol Origin fields control the automatic positioning of the I/O Address, Card Type, Signal/Area Code and Remarks.
•
The four components of I/O Symbol labels may be individually rotated as they are brought in from VPE Workbench. Check the appropriate Rotate with Symbol checkboxes to activate the rotation. Ensure the checkboxes are unchecked to have the labels placed at zero degrees to the symbol angle.
Patterns Sub-Set
The Pattern application pane is used to edit the definitions of project instrument patterns. The application pane consists of two sections. The first section of the application pane is used to add, amend and delete pattern definitions.
Existing Patterns Section The first section contains a list of existing patterns and three tools for managing patterns Add Pattern, Delete Pattern and Rename Pattern.
-
Adding a New Pattern If a new pattern is to be created, select the Add Pattern…. hyperlink. The following dialog box is then displayed:
Enter a unique value for the pattern name and press the OK button The dialog box will be closed and the new value is displayed in the Existing Patterns list box. -
Deleting a Pattern If a pattern is to be deleted, select the Deleted Pattern…. hyperlink. The following dialog box is then displayed:
To proceed with the deletion select Yes. If the value is not to be deleted select No.
If Yes is selected the dialog box will be closed and the pattern deleted from the Existing Patterns list box. All associated pattern property data is deleted. -
Renaming a Pattern If a pattern is to be renamed, select the Rename Pattern…. hyperlink. The following dialog box is then displayed:
Enter a unique value for the pattern name and press the OK button The dialog box will be closed and the amended name is displayed in the Existing Patterns list box. -
Patterns Components Section The second section contains a grid, which is used to manage the components of a pattern. See below for guidance on entering pattern component data.
•
Entering Instrument Pattern Labels A pattern definition must consist of two types of items, a single substitute instrument (which is the item shown on the drawing), and the component instruments that it represents. The substitute item can appear on any row; it does not have to be positioned first within the pattern listing. Create a new row is created by selecting the displayed:
button. The following dialog box is then
Enter the sequence number of the new row. The new row then is created at the bottom of the grid.
Pattern labels details are entered in the following fields:
-
•
Field 1: Sequence No
•
Field 2: Tag Label
•
Field 3: Suffix Label
•
Field 4: Symbol Name
•
Field 5: P&ID Substitute Item
•
Field 6: Instrument Alarms
•
Field 7: Instrument Desc
•
Field 8: Process Links
•
Field 9: Signal Lines
•
Field 10: No of Signal Line Types
Field 1: Sequence No Normally the item handle forms the unique identifier for an instrument exported to VPE Workbench. However, component pattern items do not posses such a handle. To overcome this lack, the handle of the substitute item is used together with an asterisk and the sequence number of the component item, e.g., AB*1, where AB is the substitute instrument handle, and 1 is the sequence number of the component instrument.
If there are no sequence numbers in the file, an error will occur on output. If pattern instrument data has been loaded into VPE Workbench and the pattern is then changed on the P&ID, the existing sequence numbers should be maintained. For example, if the sequence was 1, 2, 3, and 2 was removed - the new sequence should be 1, 3, not 1, 2. This is to avoid inconsistencies which would occur if the pattern was reloaded into VPE Workbench. Sequence numbers cannot be edited in the grid. The sequence number row must be deleted and re-entered with a new name. -
Field 2: Tag Label •
Substitute Instrument: It is possible to label the substitute instrument with a concatenated label, e.g., FEIT to indicate that it consists of an FE (the substitute item), an FI and an FT. However, the substitute item must appear in the IPT file with its valid name, i.e., FE.
Component Instruments: The tag part of the instrument label must be entered here for component items, e.g., FI, FE, FT.
Field 3: Suffix Label •
Substitute Instrument: If the substitute instrument has a suffix in its label, enter it here.
•
Component Instruments: If two or more pattern items are to be labelled identically when the records are created on export, make sure that the suffices are entered in this column to prevent exact duplicates occurring.
Field 4: Symbol Name •
Substitute Instrument: This field has its data inherited from the P&ID, and must be left blank.
•
Component Instruments: Enter the symbol names here for component items. Symbol names can be identified using the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program or from the item Properties dialogs.
Field 5: P&ID Substitute Item A pattern can consist of any number of component items, but only one inline substitute item is permitted. The substitute item is denoted by an asterisk, *. If an attempt is made to export with two or more asterisks in any one pattern listing, an error message will be received. The substitute item can appear on any row; it does not have to be positioned first within the pattern listing.
-
-
-
Field 6: Instrument Alarms •
Substitute Instrument: This field has its data inherited from the P&ID, and must be left blank.
•
Component Instruments: Enter any alarms here separating them with commas, e.g., H, HH. All other restrictions such as maximum of 4 alarms still apply.
Field 7: Instrument Desc •
Substitute Instrument: This field has its data inherited from the P&ID, and must be left blank.
•
Component Instruments: The description is used within VPE Workbench. When assigning VPE Workbench item types to incoming instruments from AVEVA P&ID, for example, a description of Vortex, Magnetic FLOW, Coriolis, or Turbine could be used to specifically differentiate between different types of FLOW transmitters. A more restricted choice of item types will be available than if the descriptor for the instrument were left blank.
Field 8: Process Links •
Substitute Instrument: The substitute item will either be inline or process connected. Place an asterisk in this column if the substitute item is process connected. Leave blank if the instrument is inline.
•
Component Instruments: Put an asterisk in this column if the pattern item is to appear as process connected in the export file.
Note: If component instruments are both process and signal connected, the process connection takes precedence.
Substitute Instrument: This field has its data inherited from the P&ID, and must be left blank.
•
Component Instruments: Enter the number of signal lines here if the instrument is to be signal connected, i.e., would have been attached to one or more signal lines if actually drawn on the P&ID.
Note: If instruments are BOTH process and signal connected, the process connection takes precedence. -
•
Field 10: No of Signal Line Types •
Substitute Instrument: This field has its data inherited from the P&ID, and must be left blank.
•
Component Instruments: Enter the number of signal line types which are to be connected to the component instrument. On output the signal line types are checked for validity against the signal line validation file.
Validation Sub-Set
This pane is used to specify the permitted format of entries into selected instrument and panel reference label fields. Note that if the 4 Tag fields option in the Number of Tag fields section of the Settings pane is selected, the first two fields in the Instrument Label Field Validation section (Block and Function) will not be active.
In the fields provided, enter the following characters as required: Code
Description
A
Upper Case Alpha Character [A-Z]
a
Lower Case Alpha Character [a-z]
M
Mixed Case Alpha Character [A-Z, a-z]
F
Upper Case Free Character [A-Z, 0-9, white space]
f
Lower Case Free Character [a-z, 0-9, white space]
X
Mixed Case Free Character [A-Z, a-z, 0-9, white space]
N
Numeric Character [0-9]
For example, if AaN is entered for the Prefix Field field, when a user is completing this field in the Instruments labelling Properties dialog, the first character must be an uppercase letter, the second a lower case letter, and the third a number. The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to each field.
To test how the validation will work in practice, make an entry in the Test Data field of the Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating whether or not the test data would be a valid entry. To directly edit the regular expression that comprises the validation entry, select the Advanced tab. The expression is displayed in the Regular Expression field and may be amended as required. For help on editing Regular Expressions, click on the help link displayed on this tab.
Automatic Tag Format Sub-Set If Instruments are to be tagged automatically, the format of instruments tags is defined using this sub-category.
If automatic tagging is to be used, check the Apply Project based Auto Tagging checkbox. Place the cursor in the Tag Expression field, and select the Insert Counter button. The counter is added like so: [Counter]. Enter the number that the counter is to be incremented by in the Increment By field. Select the length of the counter number from the list in the Format field. To clear the Tag Expression field, select the Clear button. The counter may be reset to 0 for the project by selecting the Reset Counter button.
The fields in this application pane are used to set up the configuration properties of equipment. The application pane is divided into eight sections. -
Number of TAG fields Section If four tag fields are to be used for project equipment (Prefix, Type, Number, Suffix), select the 4 Tag Fields option. If six tag fields are to be used for project equipment (Block, Function, Prefix, Type, Number, Suffix), select the 6 Tag Fields option. Note: Two extra tag fields (block and Function) were introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP1. Before a project can use these two new fields, the project database schema must be updated by selecting the Upgrade Database Schema - Upgrade button on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category.
-
Equipment Classification Section If, when equipment is exported (e.g. to AVEVA P&ID Manager), the descriptions of equipment in the equipment type validation files are to be used instead of the descriptions associated with the equipment symbol types, check the Use Equipment Type Specification checkbox
-
Equipment Data from VPE Workbench Section This section contains the following settings: •
The item type of EDL enables a chosen symbol to be placed on a P&ID and associated with a piece of equipment. When an import of equipment data is carried out from VPE Workbench, an EDL file is created. When the P&ID is loaded and AVEVA P&ID initialised with the Import Equipment Data checkbox checked, the exported data from the file will attach itself to the correct EDL symbol and appear on the P&ID.
•
The first piece of data is placed on the insert point of the symbol. The Column X Offsets and Row Y Offsets fields control the offsetting of successive items of equipment information relative to the EDL symbol. The numbers represent relative distances between the pieces of information and are separated by the "pipe" character: |. It is possible to arrange information in a table format using the X and Y offset distances.
•
The Browse button adjacent to the Column X Offsets field is used to select the value for thus field. On selection of the button, the Equipment X Offsets dialog box is displayed:
Following selection press OK. The selected Equipment X Offsets will then be displayed in the Equipment X Offsets field as a set of values separated by a delimiter.
Dialog Box Field Labels and List of Values Section This section contains four or six active fields, depending on the setting in the Number of Tag fields section. They are used to specify the boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Block, Function, Prefix, Tag, Number and Suffix in Equipment properties sheets. The first two fields are only active if the 6 Tag Fields option in the Number of Tag fields section is selected, i.e.:
If required, from the drop-down lists next to each field, select the list of values against which entries in a tag field are to be validated: Area Code, Block Code, Function Code or Equipment Type. •
Area Code
•
Block Code
•
Equipment Type
•
Function Code
•
Imperial Size
•
Instrument Type Letter
•
Insulation Table
•
Insulation Condition
•
Insulation Index
•
Metric Size
•
Paint Code
•
Service/Fluid Code
•
Specification Code
•
Valve Code
•
Valve Closure
A list cannot be selected more than once. List of values are set up on the List of Values Configuration Category of the Administration program. -
Values to Remember from Last Equipment Edit Section This section contains a number of checkboxes - Block, Function, Prefix, Type, Number, Suffix, Size and Specification. Note that the Block and Function checkboxes are only active if the 6 Tag Fields option in the Number of Tag fields section is selected.
A project can be configured so that a value entered in a field in a Properties dialog is "remembered" by the same field when that Properties dialog is accessed again when labelling another, previously unlabelled, item of that type. If, for example, the functionality is switched on for the equipment Prefix field, and an equipment item is labelled with a value of "20". The next time an equipment item is labelled for the first time, when the Properties dialog for this item is opened, the Prefix field will automatically be completed with the value "20". This can be replaced by another value if required. This new value will then be the "remembered" value for the equipment Prefix field. This functionality is switched on and off for individual Properties dialog fields by checking and unchecking the checkboxes in this section. -
Values to Remember from Last In-Line Equipment Edit Section The checkboxes in this section are used in the same way as those in the Values to Remember from Last Equipment Edit Section but for inline equipment Properties dialog fields.
-
Label Validation Across P&IDs Section The project may be set to check that all equipment labels in all P&IDs in a project are unique. •
Select the Prevent button if users are to be prevented from entering project duplicate equipment labels. If this is attempted, an error message is displayed and the duplicate label may not be placed on the P&ID.
•
Select the Warn button if users are to be warned if they enter project duplicate equipment labels. The entry of duplicate labels is permitted in this case, but an error message will be displayed on the P&ID, and will accompany the equipment label data when transferred to VPE Workbench.
•
If no uniqueness validation of equipment labels across P&IDs is required, select Ignore button. Duplicate equipment labels may be entered in different P&IDs in this case. Duplicate equipment labels are still not permitted in the same P&ID.
Note that if the Prevent or Warn options are set, a connection to the VPE Workbench database must be established before labels can be edited. This is because in order to check the uniqueness of labels across a project, AVEVA P&ID refers to data that is extracted from the VPE Workbench database. -
Equipment Inheritance Section The values of equipment labels may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on the Advanced Drawing Properties sheet. The values entered for these sheet attributes may be values that are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design area. The inheritance facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The labels of items that do not share these common values may subsequently be edited manually using their properties sheets. The Fields from Sheet Attribute fields are used to select which equipment label fields are to inherit values from which sheet attributes. As required, select for each equipment label field the sheet attribute field from which values are to be inherited. Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings Sub-Set. Equipment label fields that inherit values from sheet attributes can be hidden, i.e. though they are part of equipment labels and will be included in any exports of P&ID data, they are not displayed on P&IDs. To hide an inherited equipment label field, check the checkbox next to the field in question. The Type and Number fields cannot be hidden.
Note: Changing these settings will not change the appearance existing item labels. Only the appearance of labels subsequently added to a drawing will be affected. -
In-line Equipment Inheritance Section This section contains the following settings: •
If item labels are to be inherited from owner pipes, the fields to be inherited from for each label are specified in the Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix fields, plus the Block and Function fields if the 6 Tag Fields option in the Number of Tag fields section is selected.
•
The Browse button adjacent to these fields is used to select the fields to be inherited from. On selection of the button, the following dialog box is displayed:
The fields required are selected using the drop down lists. Following selection, press OK. The selected fields will then be displayed in the Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix fields, plus the Block and Function fields if the 6 Tag Fields option in the Number of Tag fields section is selected. •
The values of inline equipment labels may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on the Advanced Drawing Properties sheet. The values entered for these sheet attributes may be values that are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design area. The inheritance facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The labels of items that do not share these common values may subsequently be edited manually using their properties sheets. The Fields from Sheet Attribute fields are used to select which inline equipment label fields are to inherit values from which sheet attributes. As required, select for each inline equipment label field the sheet attribute field from which values are to be inherited.
Note that if an inline equipment label field is already set to inherit from the owning pipe (see above), this Fields from Sheet Attribute field will not be accessible. Pipe label inheritance takes priority over sheet attribute inheritance. Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings SubSet.
The fields in this application pane are used to set up the equipment label configuration format. The application pane is divided into seven sections. -
Label Format Section This section contains the following settings: •
Delimiter After Field 1 to 5. These checkboxes control the type and the presence or absence of a delimiter after the Block, Function, Prefix, Type and Number fields when a fixed equipment label format is being used. For example, if a delimiter is to be placed after the first field, check the Delimiter after Field 1 checkbox.
Depending on the set-up of the project options, delimiters will appear automatically when the equipment label is placed. Trailing delimiters will not occur if parts of the equipment label are not used. -
Equipment Label Position Section This section contains the following settings: •
The Use Fixed Equipment Label Format and Use Fixed In-Line Equipment Label Format checkboxes are used to specify whether or not equipment and in-line equipment labels are to be placed as a single text string (fixed formatting), or if the individual components of such labels are to be placed at specified X and Y coordinates from the label insertion point. Uncheck the checkbox if label components are to be placed at specified X and Y coordinates.
•
The Block, Function, Prefix, Type Letter, Number, and Suffix Position fields are used to set the X and Y coordinates of equipment and in-line equipment label components when fixed formatting is not in use. These fields are disabled if the Use Fixed Equipment Label Format checkbox is checked.
The number of fields in which positions can be entered depends on the option selected in the Number of Tag fields section of the Settings pane. If the 4 Tag fields option is selected, the first two fields (Block and Function) will not be active.
Equipment Label Format Section The Equipment Label Format fields are used to specify the format of equipment labels, i.e. the order in which equipment label fields are displayed. The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the format. On selection of the button, the Select Unique Identifiers dialog box is displayed:
The Equipment Label Format can be selected by using the drop down lists. Following selection, press OK, and the numbers of the selected Unique Validation fields will be shown in the Unique Validation field. e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. The numbers represent label fields are follows: 1. Block 2. Function 3. Prefix 4. Tag 5. Number 6. Suffix For example, if PREFIX, SUFFIX, NUMBER, TYPE was selected, the field would display: 3,6,5,4. Note that if the 4 Tag fields option in the Number of Tag fields section of the Settings pane is selected, the first two lists will not be active. Note that, although can be selected from the drop down lists, all fields must be selected. If is selected for any field, the format will reset to the default format of 1,2,3,4.
Note: Changes to drawings resulting from changes to the Equipment Label Format settings are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded. See 8.2.2: Updating Equipment Tags. -
Unique Tags Section The Unique Validation field is used to specify which combination of fields in equipment labels are to be checked for uniqueness. The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the values. On selection of the button, the Select Unique Identifier(s) dialog box is displayed:
The fields can be selected by using the drop down lists. A field cannot be selected twice. Following selection, press OK, and the numbers of the selected Unique Validation fields will be shown in the Unique Validation field. e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4. Refer to the previous section (above) for the meanings of these numbers. -
Equipment Label Symbol Section This section contains the following settings: •
Equipment Label Symbol. If this checkbox is checked a symbol will be placed with equipment labels. For example, a box may be placed around the labels.
•
Symbol Name. This field is used to select the name of the symbol that will be placed with the equipment labels.
•
Symbol X Offset. The X offset to the equipment type letters label.
•
Symbol Y Offset. The Y offset to the equipment type letters label.
In-Line Equipment Label Position Section This section contains the following settings: •
Use Fixed In-Line Equipment Label Format. This checkbox is used to specify whether or not in-line SPP equipment labels are to be placed as a single line (fixed formatting), or if the individual components of such labels are to be placed at specified X and Y coordinates from the label insertion point. Uncheck the checkbox if label components are to be placed at specified X and Y coordinates.
•
Block, Function, Prefix, Type Letter, Number, and Suffix Position. The fields in this section are used to set the X and Y coordinates of in-line SPP equipment label components when fixed formatting is not in use. These fields are disabled if the Use Fixed In-Line Equipment Label Format checkbox is checked.
The number of fields in which positions can be entered depends on the option selected in the Number of Tag fields section of the Settings pane. If the 4 Tag fields option is selected, the first two fields (Block and Function) will not be active. -
In-Line Equipment Label Symbol Section This section contains the following settings: •
In-Line Equipment Label Symbol. If this checkbox is checked a symbol will be placed with in-line equipment labels. For example, a box may be placed around the labels.
•
Symbol Name. This field is used top select the name of the symbol that will be placed with the in-line equipment labels.
•
Symbol X Offset. The X offset to the in-line equipment type letters label.
•
Symbol Y Offset. The Y offset to the in-line equipment type letters label.
This pane is used to specify the permitted format of entries into selected equipment and inline equipment label fields. Note that if the 4 Tag fields option in the Number of Tag fields section of the Settings pane is selected, the first two fields in both sections (Block and Function) will not be active. In the fields provided, enter the following characters as required: Code
Description
A
Upper Case Alpha Character [A-Z]
a
Lower Case Alpha Character [a-z]
M
Mixed Case Alpha Character [A-Z, a-z]
F
Upper Case Free Character [A-Z, 0-9, white space]
f
Lower Case Free Character [a-z, 0-9, white space]
X
Mixed Case Free Character [A-Z, a-z, 0-9, white space]
N
Numeric Character [0-9]
For example, if AaN is entered for the Prefix Field field, when a user is completing this field in the Equipment labelling Properties dialog, the first character must be an uppercase letter, the second a lower case letter, and the third a number. The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to each field.
To test how the validation will work in practice, make an entry in the Test Data field of the Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating whether or not the test data would be a valid entry. To directly edit the regular expression that comprises the validation entry, select the Advanced tab. The expression is displayed in the Regular Expression field and may be amended as required. For help on editing Regular Expressions, click on the help link displayed on this tab.
Automatic Tag Format Sub-Set If equipment is to be tagged automatically, the format of equipment tags is defined using this sub-category.
If automatic tagging is to be used, check the Apply Project based Auto Tagging checkbox. Place the cursor in the Tag Expression field, and select the Insert Counter button. The counter is added like so: [Counter]. Enter the number that the counter is to be incremented by in the Increment By field. Select the length of the counter number from the list in the Format field. To clear the Tag Expression field, select the Clear button. The counter may be reset to 0 for the project by selecting the Reset Counter button.
The application pane is divided into five sections. -
Valve Settings Section This section contains the following settings: •
If the labels of valve tags are to automatically be placed in a fixed position when valves are labelled, check the Valve Tag in Fixed Location checkbox.
•
If valve tag labels are to be automatically rotated to match the orientation of the valves they are associated with, check the Rotate Valve Tag with Symbol checkbox.
•
If valve labels are to inherit data from owning pipes the Inherit Item Labels from Owner Pipes checkbox must be checked. Note the Inherit Item Labels from Owner Pipes checkbox on Miscellaneous - Settings Configuration Category pane must also be checked, as this activates the pipe label inheritance feature for the project as a whole.
•
The Valve Tag field is used to specify the pipe label fields to be inherited by the valve tag.
Note: If automatic valve tagging is to be used (see 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging), do not set up inheritance to the Tag field. •
The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the fields to be inherited from. On selection of the button, the following dialog box is displayed:
The fields required are selected using the drop down lists. Following selection, press OK. The selected field numbers will then be displayed in the Valve Tag field. -
Valve Tag Offset from Symbol Location Section This section contains the following settings to enable valve tag labels to be placed in a fixed position. This is undertaken by completing the X and Y Valve Tag offset from symbol location fields with the appropriate position coordinates.
The Use Valve code checkbox controls whether the valve Code field is present on the Valve Properties dialog. -
Values to Remember from Last Valve Edit Section This section contains nine checkboxes - Tag, Size, Closure, Code, Specification, SPP Prefix, SPP Type, SPP Number and SPP Suffix. A project can be configured so that a value entered in a field in a Properties dialog is "remembered" by the same field when that Properties dialog is accessed again when labelling another, previously unlabelled, item of that type. If, for example, the functionality is switched on for the valve Tag field, and a valve is labelled with a value of "V-0001". The next time a valve is labelled for the first time, when the Properties dialog for this item is opened, the Tag field will automatically be completed with the value "V-0001". This can be replaced by another value if required. This new value will then be the "remembered" value for the valve Tag field. This functionality is switched on and off for individual Properties dialog fields by checking and unchecking the checkboxes in this section.
-
Label Validation Across P&IDs Section The project may be set to check that all valve labels in all P&IDs in a project are unique. •
Select the Prevent button if users are to be prevented from entering project duplicate valve labels. If this is attempted, an error message is displayed and the duplicate label may not be placed on the P&ID.
•
Select the Warn button if users are to be warned if they enter project duplicate valve labels. The entry of duplicate labels is permitted in this case, but an error message will be displayed on the P&ID, and will accompany the valve label data when transferred to VPE Workbench.
•
If no uniqueness validation of valve labels across P&IDs is required, select Ignore button. Duplicate valve labels may be entered in different P&IDs in this case.
Separate sets of buttons are provided for normal valves and for valves which are special pipe items. Note that if the Prevent or Warn options are set, a connection to the VPE Workbench database must be established before labels can be edited. This is because in order to check the uniqueness of labels across a project, AVEVA P&ID refers to data that is extracted from the VPE Workbench database. -
Inheritance Section This section contains the following settings: •
If item labels are to be inherited from owner pipes, the fields to be inherited from for each label are specified in the Tag, Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix fields.
Note: If automatic valve tagging is to be used (see 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging), do not set up inheritance to the Tag field.
The Browse button adjacent to these fields is used to select the fields to be inherited from. On selection of the button, the following dialog box is displayed:
The fields required are selected using the drop down lists. Following selection, press OK. The selected fields will then be displayed in the Tag, Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix fields. •
The values of valve labels may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on the Advanced Drawing Properties sheet. The values entered for these sheet attributes may be values that are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design area. The inheritance facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The labels of items that do not share these common values may subsequently be edited manually using their properties sheets. The Fields from Sheet Attribute fields are used to select which valve label fields are to inherit values from which sheet attributes. As required, select for each valve label field the sheet attribute field from which values are to be inherited. Note that if a valve label field is already set to inherit from the owning pipe (see above), this Fields from Sheet Attribute field will not be accessible. Pipe label inheritance takes priority over sheet attribute inheritance. Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings SubSet.
The fields in this application pane are used to set up the label properties of valves. The application pane is divided into three sections: -
Valve Labels Section This section contains the following settings:
-
•
If the valve code is to be automatically positioned on P&IDs, uncheck the Manual Placement checkbox.
•
If port sizes for port valves are to be placed on the drawing by default, ensure that the Place Port Sizes checkbox is checked.
Code Offset from Symbol Origins Section To specify the position in which automatic placement of the valve code takes place, enter coordinates in the Code Offset from Symbol Origins X and Y fields. These coordinates represent the X and Y distances from the insert point of the valve.
-
Dialog Box Field Labels Section This section contains four fields, which are used to specify the boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Prefix, Tag, Number and Suffix in the Valve Properties dialog.
These fields are only completed if the valve is a Special Piping Item (SPP). The Miscellaneous - Validation Sub-Set is used to specify validation rules for entries into SPP properties fields of both valves and line fittings. -
Valve Label Symbol Section This section contains the following settings:
•
•
Valve Label Symbol. If this checkbox is checked a symbol will be placed with equipment labels. For example, a box may be placed around the labels.
•
Symbol Name. This field is used to select the name of the symbol that will be placed with the valve labels.
•
Symbol X Offset. The X offset to the equipment type letters label.
•
Symbol Y Offset. The Y offset to the equipment type letters label.
Validation Sub-Set
This section is used to specify the permitted format of entries into the Tag field of valve labels. In the fields provided, enter the following characters as required: Code
Description
A
Upper Case Alpha Character [A-Z]
a
Lower Case Alpha Character [a-z]
M
Mixed Case Alpha Character [A-Z, a-z]
F
Upper Case Free Character [A-Z, 0-9, white space]
f
Lower Case Free Character [a-z, 0-9, white space]
X
Mixed Case Free Character [A-Z, a-z, 0-9, white space]
N
Numeric Character [0-9]
For example, if AaN is entered, when a user is completing Tag field in the Valves labelling Properties dialog, the first character must be an uppercase letter, the second a lower case letter, and the third a number.
The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to the field.
To test how the validation will work in practice, make an entry in the Test Data field of the Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating whether or not the test data would be a valid entry. To directly edit the regular expression that comprises the validation entry, select the Advanced tab. The expression is displayed in the Regular Expression field and may be amended as required. For help on editing Regular Expressions, click on the help link displayed on this tab.
Automatic Tag Format Sub-Set If valves are to be tagged automatically (see 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging), the format of valve tags is defined using this sub-category. Note: Do not set up automatic valve tagging if inheritance to the valve tag field is to be used (see above).
If automatic tagging is to be used, check the Apply Project based Auto Tagging checkbox. The format of automatic valve tags is defined in the Tag Expression field. A preview of a tag using the current definition is displayed in the Sample Tag Valve field. 1. In the Tag Expression field, enter any fixed values such as prefixes and delimiters (e.g. V-). 2. If valve tags are to include valve properties, select the property from the list in the Available Data Properties field, then place the cursor where the property is to be located in the expression and select the Insert Property button. The list of properties is taken from the attributes of a DataSet defined for this purpose (see Defining Valve Tag Properties for Automatic Valve Tagging). The selected property is added to the expression like so: [name of property]. 3. If valve tags are to include owner pipe properties, select the property from the list in the Available Pipe Properties field, then place the cursor where the property is to be located in the expression and select the Insert Property button. The selected property is added to the expression like so: [name of property]. 4. If valve tags are to include an automatically incrementing number, place the cursor in the expression where this number is to be located, and select the Insert Counter button. The counter is added to the expression like so: [Counter]. 5. Enter the number that the counter is to be incremented by for each valve in the Increment By field. Select the length of the counter number from the list in the Format field. 6. To clear the Tag Expression field, select the Clear button. If a counter is in use, it may be reset to 0 for the project by selecting the Reset Counter button.
The Pattern application pane is used to edit the definitions of project valve patterns. The application pane consists of two sections. The first section of the application pane is used to add, amend and delete pattern definitions.
Existing Patterns Section The first section contains a list of existing patterns and three tools for managing patterns Add Pattern, Delete Pattern and Rename Pattern.
-
Adding a New Pattern If a new pattern is to be created, select the Add Pattern…. hyperlink. The following dialog box is then displayed:
Enter a unique value for the pattern name and press the OK button The dialog box will be closed and the new value is displayed in the Existing Patterns list box. -
Deleting a Pattern If a pattern is to be deleted, select the Deleted Pattern…. hyperlink. The following dialog box is then displayed:
To proceed with the deletion select Yes. If the value is not to be deleted select No.
If Yes is selected the dialog box will be closed and the pattern deleted from the Existing Patterns list box. All associated pattern property data is deleted. -
Renaming a Pattern If a pattern is to be renamed, select the Rename Pattern…. hyperlink. The following dialog box is then displayed:
Enter a unique value for the pattern name and press the OK button The dialog box will be closed and the amended name is displayed in the Existing Patterns list box. -
Patterns Components Section The second section contains a grid, which is used to manage the components of a pattern. Create a new row is created by selecting the displayed:
button. The following dialog box is then
Enter the sequence number of the new row. The new row then is created at the bottom of the grid. The first valve specified will be the substitute item. All other items will be component items. Only a single valve can be specified. All other items must be line fittings. •
Sequence No Field Normally the item handle forms the unique identifier for an item exported to VPE Workbench. However, component pattern items do not posses such a handle. To overcome this lack, the handle of the substitute item is used together with an asterisk and the sequence number of the component item, e.g., AB*1, where AB is the substitute valve handle, and 1 is the sequence number of the component item.
If there are no sequence numbers in the file, an error will occur on output. If pattern valve data has been loaded into VPE Workbench and the pattern is then changed on the P&ID, the existing sequence numbers should be maintained. For example, if the sequence was 1, 2, 3, and 2 was removed - the new sequence should be 1, 3, not 1, 2. This is to avoid inconsistencies which would occur if the pattern was reloaded into VPE Workbench. Sequence numbers cannot be edited in the grid. The sequence number row must be deleted and re-entered with a new name. •
Symbol Name Field Substitute Item: Enter the symbol name of the valve that is to be the substitute item. Only a single valve may be specified in a valve pattern. Component Item: Enter the symbols names here for component line fitting items. Symbol names can be identified using the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program or from the item Properties dialogs.
•
P&ID Substitute Item Field A pattern can consist of any number of component items, but only one substitute item is permitted. This is automatically the first valve defined. The substitute item is denoted by a "Yes" in this field.
•
Description Field Enter a description of each item as required.
Line Fittings Symbol Section This section contains the following settings:
•
•
Line Fittings Label Symbol. If this checkbox is checked a symbol will be placed with line fittings labels. For example, a box may be placed around the labels.
•
Symbol Name. This field is used to select the name of the symbol that will be placed with the line fitting labels.
•
Symbol X Offset. The X offset to the line fitting type letters label.
•
Symbol Y Offset. The Y offset to the line fitting type letters label.
Line Fittings Label Position Section The Prefix, Type Letter, Number, and Suffix Position fields in this section are used to set the X and Y coordinates of line fitting label components.
•
Inheritance Section This section contains the following settings: •
If item labels are to be inherited from owner pipes, the fields to be inherited from for each label are specified in the Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix fields.
•
The Browse button adjacent to these fields is used to select the fields to be inherited from. On selection of the button, the following dialog box is displayed:
The fields required are selected using the drop down lists. Following selection, press OK. The selected fields will then be displayed in the Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix fields. •
The values of line settings labels may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on the Advanced Drawing Properties sheet. The values entered for these sheet attributes may be values that are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design
area. The inheritance facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The labels of items that do not share these common values may subsequently be edited manually using their properties sheets. The Fields from Sheet Attribute fields are used to select which line settings label fields are to inherit values from which sheet attributes. As required, select for each line settings label field the sheet attribute field from which values are to be inherited. Note that if a line settings label field is already set to inherit from the owning pipe (see above), this Fields from Sheet Attribute field will not be accessible. Pipe label inheritance takes priority over sheet attribute inheritance. Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings SubSet. -
Label Validation Across P&IDs Section The project may be set to check that all special piping item line fitting labels in all P&IDs in a project are unique. •
Select the Prevent button if users are to be prevented from entering project duplicate line fitting labels. If this is attempted, an error message is displayed and the duplicate label may not be placed on the P&ID.
•
Select the Warn button if users are to be warned if they enter project duplicate line fittinglabels. The entry of duplicate labels is permitted in this case, but an error message will be displayed on the P&ID, and will accompany the valve label data when transferred to VPE Workbench.
•
If no uniqueness validation of line fitting labels across P&IDs is required, select Ignore button. Duplicate line fitting labels may be entered in different P&IDs in this case.
Note that if the Prevent or Warn options are set, a connection to the VPE Workbench database must be established before labels can be edited. This is because in order to check the uniqueness of labels across a project, AVEVA P&ID refers to data that is extracted from the VPE Workbench database.
The Nozzles Configuration Category is divided into two sub-categories:
•
•
Settings Sub-Set
•
Labels Sub-Set
Settings Sub-Set
If nozzle sizes are to cascaded onto connecting pipes, check the Cascade Nozzle to Pipe checkbox.
•
Labels Sub-Set
If nozzles are to be labelled using an automatically incrementing number, check the Increment Nozzle Sequence checkbox. If nozzles labels are to automatically include a prefix, enter this prefix in the Nozzle Prefix field. If no prefix is required, enter (the default entry). The Increment Nozzle Sequence checkbox is disabled if is entered in the Nozzle Prefix field, or if the field is blank.
Display Label Format The Display Label Format Fields field is used to select order in which pipe flag label field are displayed. Fields may appear in a different order from those of the "actual" label. The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the format. On selection of the button, the Display Label Format dialog box is displayed:
Using the drop-down lists, select the order in which the parts of pipe flag fields are to be displayed. If required, enter a delimiter to be displayed between the two label components in the other field. Click OK. The selected format is then displayed in the Display Label Format Fields field. If pipe flag fields are to be "fixed", i.e. the two parts are to displayed concatenated as single strings that cannot be split on a drawing, check the Fix Label Format checkbox.
•
Flags Section The Flags Positioned at field defines the default arrangement of pipe flags that are positioned on pipes as they are drawn. From the drop down list, select the value that corresponds to the required value (none -0, start only -1, end only -2, or at both ends -3).
•
Default Off-Sheet Connector for Pipe End Styles These fields set the default flag style (symbol type PFL) for flags positioned at the start and end of pipes. Select the symbol type from the drop down lists.
•
Connector Label Settings This grid is used to specify the default insertion points for the different label types that may be used to label pipe flags, relative to the pipe flag symbols they are labelling. If labels of a type are to be placed in a fixed position, enter Y in the Fix Position field. Enter the label type positions relative to pipe flag symbols in the X and Y fields.
The application pane is divided into seven sections. -
Miscellaneous Settings Section This section contains the following settings:
-
•
To turn on online validation (see 6.13.1: Label Validation against Lists of Valid Values), check the On-Line Data Validation checkbox.
•
The Dialog Boxes checkbox controls whether or not dialog boxes will be in use for the project. If checked, a project will have dialog boxes and Properties dialogs in use. If unchecked, they will not be available.
•
If VPE Workbench data placed on a drawing is to be automatically refreshed whenever a connection to VPE Workbench is made, the Auto Refresh VPE Workbench Data checkbox must be checked.
•
If item labels are to inherit data from owning pipes the Inherit Item Labels from Owner Pipes checkbox must be checked. Checking this checkbox enables this facility for the entire project. Inheritance details are specified using the appropriate AVEVA P&ID Administrator Configuration Category, i.e. Instruments, Equipment (for inline equipment), Valves or Line Fittings.
•
If an image of the symbol being labelled is to be displayed at the bottom of Properties dialogs, ensure the Use the Docviewer checkbox is checked.
•
Select the non-plotting layer from the Non-Plotting Layer Name field. The list will consist of the names of layers as set up using the Drawing - Layers Sub-Set.
•
From the Error Symbol Name field, select the name of the symbol which will indicate errors on project P&IDs.
Text Position from Origin Section In the Text position from origin fields, enter the X and Y coordinates that specify the position that error message text is placed in, relative to the error symbol.
-
Setting Colour for Display During Synchronize This section is used to specify the text colours of the error and warning messages that may be displayed on drawings when they are synchronized. The Browse buttons adjacent to the Colour for warning and Colour for errors fields are used to select the colour.
On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:
The Colour Code can be selected using the following methods: •
Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
•
By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Messages will automatically assume the colours of the item they are associated with
•
By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Messages will automatically assume the colours of the layers they are on.
•
By manually entering the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the Symbol Colour field. -
Values to Remember from Last Nozzle Edit Section This section contains two checkboxes - Tag and Size. A project can be configured so that a value entered in a field in a Properties dialog is "remembered" by the same field when that Properties dialog is accessed again when labelling another, previously unlabelled, item of that type. If, for example, the functionality is switched on for the nozzle Tag field, and a nozzle is labelled with a value of "N-0001". The next time a nozzle is labelled for the first time, when the Properties dialog for this item is opened, the Tag field will automatically be completed with the value "N-0001". This can be replaced by another value if required. This new value will then be the "remembered" value for the nozzle Tag field. This functionality is switched on and off for individual Properties dialog fields by checking and unchecking the checkboxes in this section.
-
Default OSnap Section If the default object snap setting of the project is that snapping should be to the nearest point, ensure that the Nearest button is pressed. If "smart" snapping is to be the default, ensure that the Smart button is pressed. Snapping will then default to End, Intersection, Perpendicular etc as appropriate. If snapping is to be off by default, ensure that the Osnap Off button is pressed.
Auto Save Section This section is used to control the AutoCAD Auto Save facility. To enable or disable this facility check or uncheck the AutoSave checkbox as required. In the Save Interval field enter the interval between the automatic saves. This may also be set for individual users in the user start up routine (see 2.9: Customisation Guide).
-
User Defined Directives Section This section is used to set up the names and values of directives to be used in user-defined VBA macros. Enter the names and values of each directive in the grid fields. If a directive is to be added, select the displayed:
button. The following dialog box is then
Enter a unique name and press the OK button. The dialog box will be closed and the entered new directive will be displayed in the grid. To edit a directive name, select the then displayed.
button and enter the new value in the dialog that is
2:148
12.1
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Project Configuration
-
Directives for Export to ISO15926 Files If data is to be exported from drawings to XML files in ISO15926 format, the following directives should be set up. These directives control the XML schema that is to be used, and the appearance of the SVG files used to view the exported drawings in P&ID Manager and PDMS. Name
Values
Notes
USER_BACKCOLOUR
BLACK or WHITE
Specifies the background colour of drawings in SVG files
USER_LINEWEIGHTFACTOR
Number
Specifies the relative line width of lines in the SVG files compared to lines in AVEVA P&ID. For example: If 1 is entered the widths will be the same. If 2 is entered, line widths will be multiplied by 2 in the SVG files compared to those in the AVEVA P&ID files. If 0.5 is entered, they will be half the size.
USER_SCHEMAVERSION
3_2 or 3_3
Specifies the ISO15926 XML schema to be used, 3.2.0 or 3.3.3. 3.3.3 should only be used if exporting to version 12.0 SP5 of PDMS or later.
The application pane is divided into four sections. -
Auto-Labelling Section If pipe labels and routes are to be validated automatically after they are drawn, ensure the Auto-Validate checkbox is checked. The rest of the auto-labelling checkboxes control whether the properties sheets used for labelling items are to be automatically displayed or not after an item in a particular category of items is drawn or placed on a P&ID. For example, if the Properties dialog for labelling pipes is to be automatically displayed after a pipe is drawn, check the Auto-Label Piping checkbox.
-
Revision Symbols Section The Label Offset from Symbol Origin fields on this pane define the X and Y coordinates which specify the position that revision triangles are placed in, relative to the insert point of the revised symbol.
If grid references of revised symbols are to be placed on P&IDs, ensure that the Place GridReference of each Symbol checkbox is checked. Note that these grid references are not updated if revised symbols are subsequently moved. -
Typical Labelling Section This section contains the following settings: •
The Typical Labelling checkbox is used to enable or disable the typical items function. If it is checked, Typicals options will be enabled on item shortcut menus.
•
If typical data is already on a P&ID and the checkbox is unchecked, then the data will remain on the P&ID, but the Typicals options will remain greyed out. The data will also be ignored when an output is performed from the P&ID with a warning message being displayed to indicate that typical data exists, but is not exported.
•
The colours of typical pipes, pipe flags, instruments, equipment, SPPs, valves and nozzles are set in the following fields provided. •
Pipe Typical Colour.
•
Pipe Flag Typical Colour.
•
Instrument Typical Colour.
•
Equipment Typical Colour.
•
SPP Typical Colour.
•
Valve Typical Colour.
•
Nozzle Typical Colour.
When labelled as typical, the item labels will change to these colours. If these colours are changed at a later date, after typical data has been entered onto the drawing, the colours will be updated when AVEVA P&ID is re-loaded. •
The Browse button adjacent to the typical colour fields is used to select the colour this field. On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:
The Colour Code can be selected using the following methods: •
Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Items will automatically assume the colours of the owning items, e.g., the colours of the lines they are inserted into. When there is no owning item, they will be set to the default colour.
•
By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Items will automatically assume the colours of the layers they are inserted into, as set on the Layers SubSet the Drawing Configuration Category.
•
By manually entering the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the grid. -
Dialog Box Field Labels Section The Dialog Box Field Labels section contains four fields, which are used to specify the boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Prefix, Tag, Number and Suffix on the Properties dialog for labelling Special Piping Items. In the Delimiter After Field 1, 2 and 3 fields, enter the delimiters used to separate the fields. Note that these delimiters are not displayed on P&IDs or in the Engineering Explorer. They are used to ensure tag format consistency when exporting to PDMS via the ISO15926/P&ID Manager interface.
•
Validation Sub-Set
-
Nozzle and Special Piping Items Label Field Validation Sections These sections are used to specify the permitted format of entries into selected nozzle and SPP label fields. In the fields provided, enter the following characters as required: Code
Mixed Case Free Character [A-Z, a-z, 0-9, white space]
N
Numeric Character [0-9]
For example, if AaN is entered for the Prefix Field field, when a user is completing this field in the SPP labelling Properties dialog, the first character must be an uppercase letter, the second a lower case letter, and the third a number. The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to each field.
To test how the validation will work in practice, make an entry in the Test Data field of the Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating whether or not the test data would be a valid entry. To directly edit the regular expression that comprises the validation entry, select the Advanced tab. The expression is displayed in the Regular Expression field and may be amended as required. For help on editing Regular Expressions, click on the help link displayed on this tab.
Export to Excel - excelout Section This section is used to select the format of Excel spreadsheets exported from AVEVA P&ID: Item Type or Item Group. If a spreadsheet is in the Item Type format, data for each item type that was exported is displayed on its own worksheet. If a spreadsheet is in the Item Group format, item type data is grouped into item categories: pipes, instruments, equipment, valves, line fittings, reducers, nozzles and off-sheet connectors. There is a worksheet for each category.
•
Import to P&ID - excelin Section This section is used to select the item types imported from Excel spreadsheets into AVEVA P&ID, e.g. drawing attributes, equipment, pipes etc, are to have data imported from the NEW columns on the spreadsheets.
•
Filter for Excel - excelfiler Section This section is used to select the default types of items to be exported to Excel spreadsheets from AVEVA P&ID, e.g. drawing attributes, equipment, pipes etc. If required, a different set of item types from these defaults can be selected for each individual export procedure.
The Spec Driven Configuration Category is used to control which symbols can be inserted into pipes based on the specification of those pipes. Note: When a project is upgraded, in order for Spec Driven data and functionality to be available, the database schema must be updated by selecting the Upgrade Specdriven Database Schema - Upgrade button in the Project Database Configuration Category. The Spec Driven Configuration Category is divided into three sub-categories: •
Symbols Sub-Set
•
Add/Edit Specs Sub-Set
•
Assign Specs Sub-Set
The Symbols sub-category is used to specify valid pipe specifications for individual symbols. The Add/Edit and Assign Specs sub-categories are used to specify valid pipe specifications to groups of symbols.
For example, it may be specified that Ball Valve symbols may only be inserted into pipes with a specification of AAA3, and an inlet bore size of 20 and an outlet bore size of 20. Multiple combinations of pipe specs and sizes may be specified as compatible with the insertion of a symbol. If no specs or sizes are specified for a symbol, insertion of this symbol is unrestricted. Spec/size insertion restrictions may be set up for Valves, Instrument Valves and Reducers. Currently, only restrictions for 2-way symbols may be specified, but not symbols inserted at pipe junctions such as 3-way and 4-way valves. Note: Changes to drawings resulting from changes to Spec Driven settings are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded. See 8.2.4: Updating Spec Driven Data.
Specifying the Valid Specs and Pipe Sizes for the Insertion of a Symbol Note: Valid specification and size data can be imported from an AVEVA PDMS project. See PDMS Cats and Specs Import below. To specify the specs and sizes of pipes that a symbol may be inserted into: 1. From the list of values at the top of the application pane, select the symbol.
2. From the list of values below this, select the symbol.
The selected symbol is displayed next to the list.
Note: Symbols are set up using the Symbols Configuration Category. 3. From the bore sizes grid, select the inlet and outlet size by clicking on the cell at the intersection of these values. The vertical axis displays the inlet size, the horizontal axis displays the outlet size. The selected cell is displayed with a blue background.
In the case of Valves and Instrument Valves, only those cells at the intersection of identical bore size values can be selected, as valves have the same inlet and outlet sizes. In the case of Reducers, only those cells at the intersection of different bore size values can be selected, as reducers must have different inlet and outlet sizes. Note: The list of sizes is set up using the List of Values Configuration Category. 4. From the list of pipe spec codes, select the code or codes. To select a code from the list, click on it. The spec code is then highlighted with a blue background. Multiple codes can be selected.
To de-select a spec code, click on it again. The code will no longer be highlighted in the list, and will be removed from the cell in the table.
Spec codes can be copied and pasted from one cell to another. To copy the contents of a cell, right-click and select the Copy option from the menu that is then displayed.
To paste into a cell, right-click on the cell and select the Paste option from the menu. Note: The list of pipe spec codes is set up using the List of Values Configuration Category. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each valid combination of spec and bore sizes for the symbol. 6. To populate all cells with every code from the list of spec codes, select the Set as Default button. Individual codes may then be de-selected if required for each cell, as described above. 7. To clear every cell in the grid of codes, select the Clear button. -
Insertion Options These settings control what happens when symbols are inserted into pipes with specs and/ or sizes that the symbols are not valid for. These settings are applicable to all symbols that are subject to this functionality, not just the one selected at the top of the application pane. •
Select the Prevent button if users are to be prevented from inserting a symbol into a pipe with a spec and/or size that the symbol is not valid for. If this is attempted, an error message is displayed and the symbol is not placed on the P&ID.
•
Select the Warn button if users are to be warned if they insert an invalid symbol. The insertion of the symbol is permitted in this case, but an error message will be displayed on the P&ID, and will accompany the symbol when transferred to VPE Workbench. Invalid symbols are displayed on the P&ID in a specific colour (see below)
•
If the specs and sizes of pipes are to be ignored when inserting symbols, select Ignore button.
The Out of Spec Symbol Warning Colour at P&ID field is used to specify the colour of symbols that are not valid for the spec and/or size of the pipe that they are inserted into (see the Warn option above).
To select a colour, press the green button next to the field. On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:
The Colour Code can be selected by selection of one of the colours shown in the palette, or by manually entering the Colour Code field. Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the grid. -
PDMS Cats and Specs Import Valid specs and sizes can be imported from a PDMS project. In the Paragon Module of PDMS, a report must be run on the specifications in question (see Spec Driven Data Import from PDMS - PML Function and Report). The contents of this report can then be imported into the project settings of an AVEVA P&ID project. 1. Press the green button next to the Spec Report Location field, and browse for the PDMS report. By default, the report will be called spco.report and will be located in the c:/temp folder. 2. Check the Use Report to Populate Specification List of Values checkbox. 3. Press the Import Spec Report to Database button. 4. The import then takes place. The grid in the Symbols pane is then automatically populated with valid symbol spec and size data from the PDMS project. Existing settings are replaced.
•
Spec Driven Data Import from PDMS - PML Function and Report A PML function can be adapted by a customer to filter the Specification data. The order in which the data is listed must as described below as the code to import the data into P&ID relies on this. The correct order is:
Specification Name, Symbol Name, Catalogue Reference, Bore 1, gtype, bore2 These must be delimited by a one space character. The PML for this is:
Where ‘!temp’ is a temporary string. AVEVA P&ID will display the report correctly only if the names from the report (from PDMS) correspond to the symbol names configured at the P&ID Project Administrator. Verify that the report is correctly imported by revising the P&ID project database at the Project Projmet folder, e.g.: C:\AVEVA\P&ID\Project\IPE\Autocad\Projmet\IPE.mdb Below is a sample PML function report: /A1A /A1A/RE500x400:500_400 /AARE2001Y 500 REDU 400 /A1A /A1A/XER:500_400 /XAARE2001Y 500 REDU 400 /A1A /A1A/RC500x450:500_450 /AARC2001Z 500 REDU 450 /A1A /A1A/RE500x450:500_450 /AARE2001Z 500 REDU 450 /A1A /A1A/XER:500_450 /XAARE2001Z 500 REDU 450 /A1A /A1A/RC600x400:600_400 /AARC2003Y 600 REDU 400 /A1A /A1A/RE600x400:600_400 /AARE2003Y 600 REDU 400 /A1A /A1A/XER:600_400 /XAARE2003Y 600 REDU 400 /A1A /A1A/RC600x450:600_450 /AARC2003Z 600 REDU 450 /A1A /A1A/RE600x450:600_450 /AARE2003Z 600 REDU 450 /A1A /A1A/XER:600_450 /XAARE2003Z 600 REDU 450 /A1A /A1A/RC600x500:600_500 /AARC20031 600 REDU 500 /A1A /A1A/RE600x500:600_500 /AARE20031 600 REDU 500 /A1A /A1A/XER:600_500 /XAARE20031 600 REDU 500 /A1A /A1A/RE600x550:600_550 /AARE20032 600 REDU 550 /A1A /A1A/XER:600_550 /XAARE20032 600 REDU 550 /A1A /A1A/KT15 /A0KD330D0 15 CAP 0 /A1A /A1A/KD15 /A0KD530D0 15 CAP 0 /A1A /A1A/KT20 /A0KD330E0 20 CAP 0 /A1A /A1A/KD20 /A0KD530E0 20 CAP 0 /A1A /A1A/KC65 /AAKC200K0 65 CAP 51 /A1A /A1A/KC80 /AAKC200L0 80 CAP 64 /A1A /A1A/KC100 /AAKC200N0 100 CAP 76 /A1A /A1A/KC150 /AAKC200R0 150 CAP 102 /A1A /A1A/KC200 /AAKC200T0 200 CAP 127 /A1A /A1A/KC250 /AAKC200V0 250 CAP 152 /A1A /A1A/KC300 /AAKC200W0 300 CAP 178 /A1A /A1A/KD25 /A0KD330F0 25 CAP 0 /A1A /A1A/KD40 /A0KD330H0 40 CAP 0 /A1A /A1A/KD50 /A0KD330J0 50 CAP 0
/A1A /A1A/KM15 /ABKM600D0 15 PCOM 0 /A1A /A1A/KM20 /ABKM600E0 20 PCOM 0 /A1A /A1A/VG15 /A0VG3X0DD 15 VALV 45 /A1A /A1A/VH15 /A0VH3X0DD 15 VALV 33 /A1A /A1A/VC15 /A0VC3X0DD 15 VALV 60 /A1A /A1A/GA-1117:15 /VGVG5XRDD 15 VALV 21 /A1A /A1A/GL-1132:15 /VGVH5XRDD 15 VALV 28 /A1A /A1A/CK-1429:15 /A0VJ5X0DD 15 VALV 26 /A1A /A1A/VG20 /A0VG3X0EE 20 VALV 56 /A1A /A1A/VH20 /A0VH3X0EE 20 VALV 38 /A1A /A1A/VC20 /A0VC3X0EE 20 VALV 64 In the generated report care must be taken to remove (if apply) the preceding “/” from the symbol names. The names must correspond to the P&ID Project Administrator symbol names. Please note these values can be also changed at project SQL database.
•
Add/Edit Specs Sub-Set
The Add/Edit Specs sub-category is used to create specifications which are groups of piping specification codes links to an item type or an item group (Instrument Valves, Reducers or Valves). Specific symbols within the item type or item group can then be assigned to the specification using the Assign Specs Sub-Set.
To create a specification: 1. Select the Create Specification Template button. The Add Specifications dialog is then displayed:
2. If the specification is to be for an item type, select the Item Type button. If it is to be for an item group, select the Item Group button. 3. Enter the name of the specification in the Spec Name field. 4. From the list in Item Type field, select the item type of item group that the specification is for. 5. Click OK to save the spec. 6. The dialog remains open so that further specs can be created if required, as described in steps 2 to 5. Click Done to close the dialog. 7. From the bore sizes grid, select the inlet and outlet size by clicking on the cell at the intersection of these values. Then, from list of pipe spec codes, select the code or codes. See the description of the Symbols Sub-Set for details. 8. Select the Save button to save the specification. Specific symbols can now be assigned to the specification using the Assign Specs Sub-Set. To edit an existing specification, select the specification from the list available from the Select Specifications field and then edit the bore sizes/pipe spec codes as required.
To delete a specification, open it as described above, then select the Delete button.
The Assign Specs sub-category is used to assign symbols to specifications created using the Add/Edit Specs sub-category. To edit an existing specification, select the specification from the list available from the Select Specification Template field and then edit the bore sizes/pipe spec codes as required. The grid beneath the Spec Name field then displays the valid bore size/pipe specification associations set using the Add/Edit Specs sub-category. They cannot be edited here. -
Assigning Symbols to Specifications The grid beneath the bore size/pipe specification associations grid displays all the symbols of the item type or item group of the specification. The name and description of each symbol is listed. To assign a symbol to the spec, check its Select checkbox. To assign all the listed symbols, check the Select All Symbols checkbox. The Select checkbox for every symbol is then checked. When all the required symbols have been selected, select the Assign button to complete the procedure.
-
Insertion Options The Spec Driven Symbols and Out of Spec Symbol Warning Colour at P&ID controls are used to control what happens when symbols are inserted into pipes with specs and/or sizes that the symbols is not valid for. These settings are applicable to all symbols that are subject to this functionality. See the description of the Symbols Sub-Set for details.
The User Defined Configuration Category is divided into two sub-categories: •
UDA List of Values Sub-Set
•
DataSet Sub-Set
Each sub-category is concerned with one of the two types of User Defined Attributes (UDAs) that may be used in AVEVA P&ID:
•
•
Attributes added to symbols and pipes using the standard AutoCAD Attribute Definition dialog, accessed from the Symbol Editor. Lists of valid values for these attributes can then be selected using the UDA List of Values sub-category.
•
DataSet UDAs are groups of attributes that are set up for types of items or symbols that meet user-defined criteria. They are defined using the DataSet sub-category.
UDA List of Values Sub-Set
The UDA List of Values application pane is divided into two sections. The upper section is used to scan the symbols in the projects for UDAs. These are then listed in the lower section, which is used to select which lists of values are to be used when entering values for these UDAs on project drawings. To scan for UDAs, check the Project Symbol Path and/or the Standard Symbol Path checkboxes to specify which project symbol directories are to be scanned. Select the Scan button.
All detected UDAs are then displayed in the lower section of the pane (all UDAs previously scanned by the Project Administrator will already be listed). To specify a list of values, select it from the list in the appropriate LOV Name field. The default selection is , i.e. no list of values is selected.
Lists of values are set up on the List of Values Configuration Category of the Administration program.
Creating a DataSet 1. To create a new DataSet, select the Create New DataSet button. The Add New DataSet dialog is then displayed.
2. Enter the name of the new DataSet in the DataSet Name field. 3. The Criteria section is used to define the criteria that will specify which item the DataSet will be applied to. For example, for a particular type of equipment, or for equipment in general. From the Item Type list, specify whether or not the criterion will be applied to an item class name, item group or symbol name.
4. From the Criteria list, select the required operator, e.g. equal to (=) etc,
5. From the Item Value list, select the required class name, item group or symbol name.
6. The Condition list is used if multiple criteria are to be used. Select AND to specify that the DataSet is to be applied to items that meet both criteria. 7. When the required settings for the first criterion have been defined, select the Add button. The details of the criterion are then displayed in the lower of the dialog.
8. If another criterion is to be defined, change the settings in the Criteria fields as required and select the Add button again. The second criterion is then added to the list of criteria.
In this example, the DataSet will be applied to all items that are in either the Equipment or Instrument item groups.
9. To delete a criterion, select it from the list and press the Delete button. 10. When all required criteria have been defined, select the Save button to save changes and close the dialog. The DataSet name and criterion are displayed in the DataSet List and Criterion fields on the DataSet Sub-Set pane. To close the dialog without saving any changes, select the Cancel button. -
Defining DataSet Attributes To define the attribute or attributes that comprise a DataSet, first select the DataSet from the DataSet List field. The item selection criteria of the DataSet (see above) are then displayed in the Criterion field. 1. Attributes are defined and displayed in the grid in the lower part of the DataSet Sub-Set pane. To add an attribute, select this button from the toolbar above the grid: Add New Attribute dialog is then displayed.
. The
2. In the Attribute Name field, enter the name of the attribute. This name will be the title of the field used to enter the value for the attribute on the Properties dialogs of items that meet the DataSet criteria. 3. From the Data Type list field, select String. 4. If the values for this attribute are to be selected from a list of values, select this list from the LOV field. Lists of values are set up on the List of Values Configuration Category of the Administration program.
5. If the Properties dialog field for the attribute is to be automatically completed with a default value from the select list of values, select it from the Default Value field list.
6. Select the Save button to save changes and close the dialog. The attribute details are then displayed in the grid. 7. To close the dialog without saving any changes, select the Cancel button. Repeat the above procedure for each attribute required for the DataSet. -
Editing and Deleting DataSets To edit or delete a DataSet, select the DataSet from the DataSet List field. The item selection criteria of the DataSet (see above) are then displayed in the Criterion field. To edit the DataSet, select the Edit Criterion button. The Edit DataSet Criterion dialog is then displayed with the existing properties of the DataSet displayed. Edit them as required as described above. Attribute names cannot be edited. The attribute row must be deleted and re-entered with a new name. To delete the DataSet, select the Delete DataSet button.
-
Defining Valve Tag Properties for Automatic Valve Tagging If valves are to be tagged automatically (see 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging), the format of valve tags is defined on the Automatic Tag Format Sub-Set of the Valves Configuration Category. The list of valve properties that are available for selection when defining this format are taken from a DataSet which must be set up for this purpose, as follows: •
Note that if the DataSet is not set up, or no attributes are defined for it, automatic valve tagging may still be used, but the valve tags cannot include any of the attributes of the valves. -
Defining the Pipe Groups DataSet If pipes are to be allocated to groups for reporting purposes, the names and optionally the default values associated with these groups must be specified in a DataSet. The DataSet must be defined as follows: •
The DataSet name must be "PIPE_GROUPS"
•
The DataSet criteria must be "Item_Group = Pipes"
Specify the name of each pipe group in the Attribute Name fields. If required, enter the default user-defined attribute to be assigned to each pipe group in the Default_Value fields.
The User Access Configuration Category consists of the User Access Settings subcategory:
The sub-category is used to change the password required to access the Administration program if the Login as Administrator with password (SQL Server Security) option is selected in the Project Database Configuration Category. In the Password field enter the current password. Note: The default password is "Admin". In the Enter New Password field enter the new password. In the Confirm New Password field enter the new password again. Select the Change button to implement the new password.
The PDMS Integration Configuration Category consists of the PDMS Settings sub-category:
If the AVEVA Schematic Database node is not to be displayed in the P&ID Data Grid, check the Hide PDMS Node in P&ID checkbox. The Project Name and Database Name field are used to specify the default entries for the Project and MDB fields in the PDMS Login dialog. Select the location of PDMS installation that the AVEVA P&ID project is to interface with in the PDMS Version (Installation Location) field. Note: The earliest version of PDMS that AVEVA P&ID can interface with is 12.0.SP5. Note: Configuration is also required in PDMS to set up the interface between AVEVA P&ID and PDMS. See 9.9: Setting up PDMS to Connect with P&ID for details.
The AI Integration Configuration Category is used to specify settings for the integration of AVEVA P&ID and AVEVA Instrumentation. It consists of the AI Settings sub-category:
If the AVEVA Instrumentation node is not to be displayed in the P&ID Data Grid, check the Hide AI Node in P&ID checkbox. In the Derive Instrument AREA from field, if required, select the AVEVA P&ID Instrument tag field which will be populated with the Area values of instruments imported from AVEVA Instrumentation (AI). In the Derive Loop AREA from field, if required, select the AVEVA P&ID Loop tag field which will be populated with the Area values of loops imported from AVEVA Instrumentation (AI).
The AVEVA NET Configuration Category is divided into four sub-categories:
•
•
Configurations Sub-Set
•
Mappings Sub-Set
•
Setting Sub-Set
•
Advanced Options Sub-Set
Configurations Sub-Set
The Settings sub-category is used to specify general settings for the AVEVA NET interface, relating to the format of the files generated by the export from AVEVA P&ID. For detailed information, refer to the AVEVA NET Schematic Gateway Configuration Guide.
The mappings between AVEVA P&ID format data and AVEVA NET Portal format data are stored in sets of three XML files, one for each of the following types of mapping: •
Presentation Mapping
•
Attribute Mapping
•
Class Mapping
This sub-category is used to select the mapping files to be used. For detailed information, refer to the AVEVA NET Schematic Gateway Configuration Guide.
•
Setting Sub-Set
The Settings sub-category is used to specify general settings for the AVEVA NET interface, relating to the format of the files generated by the export from AVEVA P&ID. For detailed information, refer to the AVEVA NET Schematic Gateway Configuration Guide.
The Advanced sub-category is used is to export data to a remote location, and to export data from multiple project drawings. -
AVEVA NET Service Section Drawing data already generated by an AVEVA NET export may be transferred to a remote location, for example a shared network folder, using a AVEVA NET server service. If this facility is to be used, check the Transfer files to Remote AVEVA NET Server checkbox.
In the AVEVA NET Service Path field, enter the location of the AVEVA NET server service. Select the Test button to test that the location of a functional service has been entered. If so, message is displayed to confirm this:
In the Remote Server Publishing Location field, enter the remote folder into which output files are to be copied. Select the Transfer button to copy all the files currently in the local staging area (as specified on the Configurations sub-category) to the remote location. A message is displayed once the transfer is complete. -
Batch Publish option to AVEVA NET Section The Project drawings available list displays all those project drawings from which data can exported. To select a drawing to export data from, select it and select the > button. To select multiple drawings to export data from, select them and select the >> button. To select all available drawings to export data from, select the button with the green arrow on it. Selected drawings are moved from the Project drawings available list to the Drawings selected for publish list. Use the < and << buttons to de-select single or multiple drawings and move them back to the Project drawings available list. Select the button with the red cross button on it to de-select all selected drawings. When all required drawings have been selected, select the Apply button. Carry out the export using facilities available in the Log Options section.
-
Log Options Section To generate export files from the drawings selected in the Batch publish option to AVEVA NET section, select the Start button. The export then takes place. The progress of the export is indicated by a progress bar.
Details of the export or displayed in the log window below it.
To stop the export, select the Stop button. To clear the log window, select the Clear button. To view the log in the log file generated as part of the export, select the View Log button.
The AE Integration Configuration Category is used to specify settings for the integration of AVEVA P&ID and AVEVA Electrical. It consists of the AE Settings sub-category:
If the AVEVA Electrical node is not to be displayed in the P&ID Data Grid, check the Hide AE Node in P&ID checkbox. In the Derive Equipment AREA from field, if required, select the AVEVA P&ID Equipment tag field which will be populated with the Area values of equipment imported from AVEVA Electrical (AE).
Changing Units on a Project If, in mid-project, it is decided that a units change must occur, either from metric to imperial or vice versa, a change must be made to the labelling units setting in the project configuration file using the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Note: Changing the project drawing units is not possible. Set labelling units to metric or imperial on the Project pane of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. AVEVA P&ID should not be loaded while this file is being edited. The units on existing drawings will only be converted on reload into AVEVA P&ID. Note: ONLY the labelling units will change and NOT the physical size of the graphical symbols. Note: Changes to drawings resulting from the label units being changed are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded. See 8.2.5: Convert Project Label Units. If an attempt is made to insert metric symbols into an imperial drawing, they will be inserted 25.4 times bigger than intended due to the 25.4 mm:1" ratio. To correct this it is necessary to edit the symbol lengths using the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. In order to carry out these conversions, AVEVA P&ID uses a file located in the validation directory, named CONV.UNI. An excerpt from this file is shown below:
3 = 1/8" 6 = 1/4" 10 = 3/8" 25.4 = 1" etc Comment lines to begin with a * character. Sizes shown are in =.
2.4.1
Associated Project Configuration Options •
Specify the size of the snap spacing using the Snap Spacing field on the Drawing - Grid Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
•
Specify the size of grid spacing using the Grid Spacing field.
•
The drawing and label units used on the project are set using the buttons on the Project Configuration Category pane. These should not be changed once the project has begun.
2.5
Defining Project Symbols
2.5.1
Creating a New Symbol Symbols can be drawn and edited using the Symbol Editor. See Symbol Editor for a description of this facility. To create a new symbol without using this facility, proceed as follows:
1. If running AVEVA P&ID on a networked setup, ensure that AVEVA P&ID is not in use anywhere on the network. Without initialising AVEVA P&ID, load an existing AVEVA P&ID drawing and locate an existing item of similar size and AVEVA P&ID type to the new symbol. Measure its length and width to get some idea of scale. 2. Using AutoCAD drawing commands, draw the new item at the required size on a new AVEVA P&ID drawing dialog, again without AVEVA P&ID being initialised. Make the item into a block, carefully picking an insertion point which is at the centre of a symmetrical object or at the left hand end of a non-symmetrical one. For angled, 3 way and 4 way valves, the insertion point should be at the centre, not at the bottom, or the pipes will not break correctly. 3. There are no restrictions on linestyles, colours or naming conventions during symbol creation. However, when AVEVA P&ID inserts a symbol, the colours may alter according to layer/level settings in the project configuration file. Symbols can be manipulated after insertion, for example, rotated, or mirrored. This reduces the required number of standard symbols in a library. 4. Ensure that the block is available to all users, i.e., by using WBLOCK in AutoCAD, and place in the \PMETSYM or \PIMPSYM project symbol directory or import using the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Enter the properties of the new symbol in the Symbols pane. 5. Attempt to insert the symbol in order to test the new item with AVEVA P&ID now initialised (see Inserting Symbols - General Information). Check the correct insertion point has been selected when creating the block and that the graphical creation angle is correct. If any errors occur, edit the symbol using the Administration program, re-load the drawing, initialise AVEVA P&ID again and retest. 6. If a metric symbol is inserted into an imperial drawing or an imperial symbol into a metric drawing, it will be inserted at the wrong scale. To correct this, edit the symbol length in the Symbols pane.
2.5.2
Upgrading Symbols from Old Projects For projects developed before AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3, an upgrade of the symbols on the project drawings is required. Refer to 2.1: Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects.
2.5.3
Avoiding Problems when using Client Symbology A client will often specify the symbols which are to be employed when drawing P&IDs for a project. In these instances, the standard symbol library may not be acceptable. The following points should be addressed situation:
2.5.4
•
Check to see if an AVEVA P&ID symbol library, together with its AVEVA P&ID file, exists for the client elsewhere. This library can then be used without having to set up a completely new set of symbols, and therefore can save time and effort.
•
If an AVEVA P&ID symbol library does not exist for the client, the client may still have their symbols in AutoCAD drawings as blocks. These can then converted to symbols using one of several utilities available for this purpose. These utilities are obtainable by calling AVEVA P&ID Technical Support. Their functionality is detailed in the Symbol Utility Programs section. AutoCAD block colours should be set to BYBLOCK prior to them becoming AVEVA P&ID symbols.
•
If the client symbols exist only on paper or in an untranslatable graphics format, they will have to be redrawn in AutoCAD.
Symbol Utility Programs The following AutoLISP programs described below:
However, they have not been issued as part of the AVEVA P&ID installation kit. To request installation contact AVEVA P&ID Technical Support.
•
CLEANATT.LSP Used to remove all existing attribute values from all blocks on an existing AutoCAD drawing. Attributes must be removed from blocks before they are converted to symbols. This utility may be needed from time to time to remove client attributes before relabelling using AVEVA P&ID. The blocks remain intact and a prompt is still received for new attribute values if new insertions are performed.
-
Syntax: Enter: CLEANATT This will remove all attribute values. The Command prompt will display:
Are you sure : Enter Y A regeneration is performed and the command ends.
•
CREATSYM.LSP Project symbol data is stored in the PID.SYM file. This utility is used to append information from existing AutoCAD blocks to an existing AVEVA P&ID PID.SYM file or to create a new correctly formatted PID.SYM.
-
Syntax: Enter: CS The first block highlights and is panned to the centre of the screen. The Command prompt will display:
Add symbol to sym file Y/N: If N is entered, the next symbol is highlighted and panned to the centre of the screen. If the symbol is already in the PID.SYM file, it will be missed out automatically. Enter Y for Yes.
AVEVA P&ID type e.g. VLV: Enter a valid item type. The Command prompt will then display:
Does symbol break pipe Y/N: Enter Y for Yes. The Command prompt will then display:
Symbol size - 1st point: Pick 2 points to show the width of the symbol. The Command prompt will then display:
2nd point: Offset point: The insertion point is found by AVEVA P&ID - pick one of the width points. The Command prompt will then display:
How many insert points 1/2: Enter 1 or 2. The Command prompt will then display: Creation angle <0.0>: Enter angle. The Command prompt will then display:
Defining a New Pipe Style Pipe styles can be created and edited by selecting the Pipe Styles option on the List of Values Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
2.7
Defining a New Signal Line Type Simple signal line styles can be created and edited using the Signal Styles Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. More complex line styles can be created using the following procedure. This procedure is based on the AutoCAD functionality for defining complex Line Styles. For more information please see the AutoDesk website: http://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/servlet/item?siteID=123112&id=2671814&linkID=9240615 1. The first step is to open a project drawing and draw the shape that is going to be used in the new line type (by using AutoCAD geometries: circles, lines, arcs, etc.). For instance:
2. Next, use the “MKSHAPE” command to convert the geometry into a Shape object. The application will ask for the location to save the file. Specify the Bin directory at: C:\...........\Aveva\P&ID\Install\AutoCad\Bin
Type the name of the file, in this example “Twocir”, and click Save:
At the command prompt, the application will ask for the name of the shape and other parameters: •
“Enter the name of the Shape: TCI” - (e.g. “TCI”).
•
“Enter resolution <128>:” - “Enter” to select the default option.
•
“Specify the insertion point:” - select at the screen the insertion point, for instance the west quadrant of the circle.
•
“Select Objects:” - select the circle and the line and press “Enter”. The command prompt will display “Shape "TCI" created. Use the SHAPE command to place shapes in your drawing".
3. The next step is to insert the previously defined shape in the drawing area by using the SHAPE command. After the command is entered the application will display: “Enter Shape name or [?]” - in this case enter TCI. Press “Enter”. “Insertion point” - select any point in the drawing area. ”Specify height <1.0000>” - press “Enter” to use the default value. “Specify rotation angle <0>:” - press “Enter” to use the default value. 4. Once the Shape is inserted into the drawing area, the next step is to use the command “MKLTYPE” to define the parameters of the line type in a “.lin file”. In this case save the .lin file at the “Projmet” folder at (in this example under the IPE project): C:\........\Aveva\P&ID\Project\IPE\Autocad\Projmet
"Select Objects:” -select the previously inserted shape and press Enter. The command prompt will the display “Linetype "LTN" created loaded".
and
5. Delete from the drawing area the previously inserted geometries and shape and save and close the P&ID application. 6. The Style Lines used by each project are defined in the “acad.lin” file at: C:\Aveva\P&ID\Project\IPE\Autocad\Projmet For example:
Next, open the next “.lin” files located at the “Projmet” folder by using Notepad: •
Save the “acad.lin” file and close it. 7. The next step is to configure the new Signal Style using the Project Administrator. In the Signal sub-category of the Item Types Configuration Category (see Signal SubSet), create a new Signal Type by selecting the “insert row” button.
Then define: •
The name of the new Signal Type, in this case “STS”
8. The next step is to define the Signal Style using the Signal Styles Configuration Category. Insert a new Signal Style by using the “Insert row" button and enter the signal name, for instance “CIRDEMO”:
9. The next step is to define the parameters of the new Signal Style: •
In the “P&ID type” field, select the previously configured STS Signal Type
•
In the “Line Type” field select the previously configured LTN Line Type
•
Finally, in the “Signal Type” field enter the name displayed in the “Signal Styles” dropdown menu in the P&ID application, for instance “DEMO”. See below:
10. Finally save the Project Administrator, open the P&ID application and test the new Signal Style in a drawing. It will be available for selection from the list of signal styles in the Signal Line Group of the Home Tab.
2.8
Defining a New Tracing Style Tracing styles can be created and edited using the Tracing Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
2.9
Customisation Guide
2.9.1
Introduction The graphical user interface in AVEVA P&ID is fully customisable. Users can alter the toolbars, right click menus, pull down menus and add start up routines to suit their project needs. •
Start-up Routines
•
Explorers
•
Right Click Menus
•
Toolbars
•
Menus
•
Adding Custom Lisp Routines to AVEVA P&ID
•
Adding new multi line styles in AVEVA P&ID
•
Running AVEVA P&ID in "Save To Model Mode"
•
Auto Save Settings
•
Project Profiles
•
Complex Linetypes
See also: •
2.9.2
2.10: Customising the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette
Start-up Routines Taking advantage of the AutoCAD VBA interface, AVEVA P&ID automatically loads a VBA routine called "UserStartUp" located in the Users module. By altering the start up routine users can easily modify toolbars and menus, and control whether the Engineering Explorer loads automatically or not. To access this routine, after AVEVA P&ID has been loaded, type VBAIDE at the command prompt. In the VBA editor go to the VBA project explorer and double click the module Users" and select "UserStartUp". Note that when a project is upgraded, by default, the users.dvb module is overwritten. However, the upgrade wizard includes an option to preserve it. Listed below is an example of the start up routine: Public Sub UserStartUp() '' This macro will start up automatically with the application. '' WARNING: Any routine placed here will be run every time a drawing loads...
Dim UsersClass As UserUtils Dim BatchFile As String Dim defdir As String Dim SaveToModelFlag As Boolean Dim UserPreferences As AcadPreferencesUser Dim USerName As String Dim Password As String Dim Connection As String Dim PlotfileName As String Dim ErrorMode As Boolean Dim FreezeNonPlotLayer As Boolean Dim PrinterName As String Dim f As Long Dim Utils As Object Dim AutoSave As String Dim AutoSaveFlag As String On Error Resume Next ' Get an instance of Public Class UserUtils Set UsersClass = New UserUtils ' Set User preferences for right click menu, disable AutoCAD short cut menus... Set UserPreferences = ThisDrawing.Application.Preferences.User UserPreferences.ShortCutMenuDisplay = False ' Get ruth of Project directory using Directive DATDIR defdir = UsersClass.GetDefaultDirectory ' Find out if there is a savetoModel bath file to run in batch mode... If Right(defdir, 1) = "\" Then BatchFile = defdir & "SaveToModel.Bat" PlotFile = defdir & "PidPlot.Bat" BatchConfig = defdir & "pidplot.txt" Else BatchFile = defdir & "\SaveToModel.Bat" PlotFile = defdir & "\PidPlot.Bat" BatchConfig = defdir & "\pidplot.txt" End If If UsersClass.FileExists(PlotFile) Then '' User must set default values here... PlotfileName = "" PrinterName = "" NumberOfCopies = 1
ErrorMode = False FreezeNonPlotLayer = True '' PlotConfig = defdir & "HP LaserJet 5Si.pc3" PlotConfig = "" BatchPlot.Show If Len(PlotConfig) > 3 And InStr(UCase(PlotConfig), "PC3") <> 0 Then UsersClass.PlotActiveDrawing PlotfileName, PlotConfig, NumberOfCopies, ErrorMode, FreezeNonPlotLayer, PlotPrinter Set UsersClass = Nothing Application.ActiveDocument.Close False Application.Quit Exit Sub End If End If '' If save To Model Batch File exist then '' Application will run in Save To Model Mode.... If UsersClass.FileExists(BatchFile) Then ' Save To Model -- SAVE TO DB SET TO: TRUE ' Create Output Files Only SET TO FALSE SaveToModelFlag = False '' USERNAME, PASSWORD AND CONNECTION STRING MUST BE SET HERE If SaveToModelFlag Then USerName = "SPROC" Password = "SPROC" Connection = "vpe53dev1" End If UsersClass.SaveToModelInBatchMode USerName, Password, Connection, SaveToModelFlag Else ''Enable Right Click menu -- Default UsersClass.EnableRightClickMenu '' Load Explorer Application.ActiveDocument.SendCommand "ASEXPLORER" & vbCr DoEvents '' Delete VPE P&ID 2nd Toolbar Row ''Application.ActiveDocument.SendCommand "ASDELTOOLBARS" & vbCr ''DoEvents '' LOADS VPE P&ID 2nd Toolbar Row ''Application.ActiveDocument.SendCommand "ASLOADTOOLBARS" & vbCr ''DoEvents
'' Modify Toolbars ans rearreange P&ID Menus '' UsersClass.ModStandardTBar '' Modify Standard menus ''UsersClass.ModStandardMenu ' Set Right Click Menu Status... '' Disable Rigth click Menu ''UsersClass.DisableRightClickMenu '' Set return Key to Right Click Menu ''UsersClass.SetRightClickToReturnKey '' Audit and fix errors in drawing as they are loaded... ''UsersClass.AuditActiveDrawing '' Validate all pipes mark as invalid (RED) in the explorer '' Could take a long time in "heavy" drawings... ''UsersClass.ValidateAllPipes '' Set Drawing LImits to match Project setting for Drawing Length and Height UsersClass.SetDrawingLimits '' Set AutoSaveIntervals from project settings UsersClass.SetProjectAutoSaveTimeSettings End If
2.9.3
Explorers The following options are available for the Project and Symbol Explorers: 1. Do not display Engineering Explorer on start up Remove or "comment out" (i.e. add a quotation mark at the start of the line) the following line from the "UserStartUp" routine. Application.ActiveDocument.SendCommand "ASEXPLORER" & vbCr Whether or not the Symbol Explorer is displayed on start up is controlled at project level. 2. Display Project and Symbol Explorers in Floating Mode on start up If the default display mode of the Explorers is to be floating, proceed as above, but then "comment in" (i.e. remove the quotation mark) from the following line: Application.ActiveDocument.SendCommand "ASEXPLORERFLOAT" & vbCr 3. Display Project and Symbol Explorers in Docking Mode on start up If the default display mode of the Explorers is to be docking, no changes are required. Note that the above only apply the first time a user starts a project session. Subsequently, the Explorers are automatically displayed in the position and mode they were in at the end of the user's previous session.
2.9.4
Right Click Menus The following options are available for right click menus:
1. Disable AVEVA P&ID default right click menus To disable AVEVA P&ID default right click menu, just "comment in" in the following line from the "UserStartUp" routine. "UsersClass.DisableRightClickMenu When the AVEVA P&ID right click menu is disabled the standard AutoCAD right click behaviour will be active instead. 2. Set Right click button to return key To the right click button press in AVEVA P&ID to act as the return key just comment in the following line from the "UserStartUp" routine. "UsersClass.SetRightClickToReturnKey 3. Enable right click menu (default) No changes required. To customise right click menus programmatically, use the "BeginRightClick" event of the "AcadDocument" object. Private Sub AcadDocument_BeginRightClick(ByVal PickPoint As Variant) ‘ Write your mouse right click event here…. End Sub
See the AutoCAD customisation guide for more details on customising right click menus.
2.9.5
Toolbars The "ModStandardTBar" method of the "UserUtils" class in the "UserStartUp" routine controls the display of the toolbars first loaded when AVEVA P&ID is opened. It is possible to modify standard behaviour of toolbars during the loading process by altering this method. Commenting out this method will allow users to control toolbars by editing the menu files (PID.MNU, ACAD.MNU). See the AutoCAD customisation guide for more details on customising MNU files. Note: The second toolbar is critical to the application and therefore can not be altered or disabled by users.
2.9.6
Menus The "ModStandardMenu" method of the "UserUtils" class controls the display of the pull down menus loaded by the application. It is possible to modify standard behaviour of pull down menus during the loading process by altering this method. Commenting out this method will allow users to control pull down menus from the menu files (PID.MNU, ACAD.MNU). See the AutoCAD customisation guide for more details on customising MNU files.
2.9.7
Adding Custom Lisp Routines to AVEVA P&ID Lisp routines can be added to "acaddoc.lsp" located at the Bin folder of the standard installation.
Below is an example of a lisp routine supplied with version 6.1.0.16 that creates the command "ai_selall" which selects every entity in the active drawing. ;;;---------------------------------------------------------------------------; New "Select All" function. Cannot be called transparently. (defun c:ai_selall ( / ss old_error a b old_cmd old_hlt) (setq a "CMDECHO" b "HIGHLIGHT" old_cmd (getvar a) old_hlt (getvar b) old_error *error* *error* ai_error) (if (ai_notrans) (progn (princ "Selecting objects...") (setvar a 0) (setvar b 0) (command "_.SELECT" "_ALL" "") ; Create Previous SS (setvar a old_cmd) (setvar b old_hlt) (setq ss (ssget "_P")) (sssetfirst ss ss) ; Non-gripped, but selected (someday!) (princ "done.\n") ) ) (setq *error* old_error old_error nil ss nil) (princ) )
Some sample lisp programs are supplied in the BIN folder of the standard installation. Warning:
2.9.8
Lisp routines that modify intelligent entities in AVEVA P&ID drawings could potentially corrupt entities and drawings as a consequence.
Adding new multi line styles in AVEVA P&ID Multi line styles are stored in a file called PID.MLN. A copy of this file is supplied with AVEVA P&ID which includes a number of default multi lines styles. This file loads automatically when AVEVA P&ID is loaded. To provide a set of specific multi-lines styles for a project you must add a new path to the Support File Search Path A copy of this file must be placed at this location. To achieve this, use command preferences and access the "Support File Search Path" node of the "Files" tab. The path priority is set from top to bottom. Below there is a sample of a multi-line style set in the PID.MLN supplied with version 6.1.0.16. MLSTYLE 2
See the AutoCAD customisation guide for more details on creating new multi line styles. See also AVEVA P&ID Files - PID.MLN.
2.9.9
Running AVEVA P&ID in "Save To Model Mode" In order to run Save to Model (see 8.8.5: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database) on multiple drawings in a project use the supplied "MakeSaveToModelBatch" routine. Before running the routine some editing may be required (see sections in bold below). To access the routine, type VBAIDE at the command prompt. In the VBA editor go to the VBA project explorer and double click the "Users" module node, and select "MakeSaveToModelBatch". Run or edit the routine as required. The routine can also be edited and run by selecting the Make Synch Batch File option from the .AVEVA Integration Group of the Data Management Tab. Below is an example of the routine supplied with version 6.1.0.16. Public Sub MakeSaveToModelBatch() '' Create Batch File to run SaveToModel in multiple drawings located at one folder.... '' After batch file is created, exit the application and run batch file from command prompt.
Dim AcadLocation As String Dim AcadProfile As String Dim AcadConfig As String '' Please Specify Location of ACAD.EXE in your system AcadLocation = "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad.exe" '' Specify Active Configuration file AcadConfig = "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad2002.cfg" '' P&ID Profile AcadProfile = "PID61" On Error Resume Next Dim Uclass As UserUtils Set Uclass = New UserUtils Uclass.CreateSaveToModelBatchFile AcadLocation, AcadConfig, AcadProfile, Application.ActiveDocument.FullName Set Uclass = Nothing End Sub
Below is an example of the batch file generated by this routine. CD "C:\Projects\RUYTER" "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad.exe" /c "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad2002.cfg" "C:\Projects\RUYTER\Flowsheets\SaveToModel\144-000-PR-PID0005.dwg" /p PID61 "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad.exe" /c "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad2002.cfg" "C:\Projects\RUYTER\Flowsheets\SaveToModel\144-000-PR-PID0011.dwg" /p PID61 "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad.exe" /c "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad2002.cfg" "C:\Projects\RUYTER\Flowsheets\SaveToModel\144-000-PR-PID0012.dwg" /p PID61 "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad.exe" /c "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad2002.cfg" "C:\Projects\RUYTER\Flowsheets\SaveToModel\144-000-PR-PID0013.dwg" /p PID61 "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad.exe" /c "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad2002.cfg" "C:\Projects\RUYTER\Flowsheets\SaveToModel\144-000-PR-PID0014.dwg" /p PID61 DEL "C:\Projects\RUYTER\SaveToModel.Bat"
The first line must point to the root of the project folder where the PID.PRJ (project catalogue) file is located. Additional changes must be made to the routine “UserStartUp” to match the project requirements. To Save the drawing data to a project database the flag “SaveToModelFlag” must be set to True. Also, the username, password and connection string must be set to match the user database. ' Save To Model -- SAVE TO DB SET TO: TRUE
' Create Output Files Only SET TO FALSE SaveToModelFlag = True '' USERNAME, PASSWORD AND CONNECTION STRING MUST BE SET HERE If SaveToModelFlag Then USerName = "SPROC" Password = "SPROC" Connection = "vpe53dev1" End If
Note: After the routine ends the file will be automatically deleted. To ensure AVEVA P&ID will run in editing mode ensure the file “SaveToModel.Bat” is deleted from the root of the project folders.
2.9.10
Auto Save Settings By default, the AutoCAD Auto Save interval for a user, and whether this facility is active, is derived from the project configuration settings. See the 2.3.21: Miscellaneous Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program for details. In order to override these project settings for an individual user, the following code in the “UserUtils” macro can be edited: The macro is accessible from Users” module of the VBA editor as described above. Public Function SetProjectAutoSaveTimeSettings() '' Set Autosave intervals according to value set in the project Dim Value As String Dim AutoSaveFlag As String Dim SaveIntervals As String Dim Pref As AcadPreferences On Error Resume Next Set Pref = Application.Preferences AutoSaveFlag = "AUTOSAVE" SaveIntervals = "SAVEINTERVAL" Value = UCase(GetProjectDirective(AutoSaveFlag)) If Trim(Value) = "YES" Then Value = UCase(GetProjectDirective(SaveIntervals)) Pref.OpenSave.AutoSaveInterval = CInt(Value) Else Pref.OpenSave.AutoSaveInterval = 0 End If
Edit the highlighted line as required, e.g. Pref.OpenSave.AutoSaveInterval = 40
2.9.11
Project Profiles When the project wizard is run it will create a profile, the name of which matches project name, which contains project specific information. In the unlikely event that the project name needs to be changed, the project wizard Upgrade an Existing Project, or the Install Project Shortcut Only option must be run in order to create new a project profile. An error will result if the project profile name does not match project name as displayed in the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Customisation of project profiles, such as the changing of background colours, will only affect the current project and not the software in general.
2.9.12
Complex Linetypes Customisation can be applied by creating complex linetypes for use by project pipes, signal lines etc. See: http://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/servlet/item?siteID=123112&id=2671814&linkID=9240615
2.10
2.10.1
Customising the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette •
Introduction
•
Grouping Palettes
•
Creating New Groups and Palettes
•
Adding Signal and Process Lines to the Tool Palette
•
Adding Symbols to the Tool Palette
Introduction The AutoCAD Tool Palette has been customised to give users another way of creating and inserting symbols and intelligent lines, and to execute various other AVEVA P&ID commands. The functionality is available with AVEVA VPE P&ID 6.2 patch 14. After this patch is installed, to make the AVEVA P&ID palette available, the Project Wizard upgrade routine must be run. Once the project is upgraded, the palette can be accessed from the drawing editor either by pressing CTRL+3, by entering TOOLPALETTES at the command line, or by selecting the option Tool Palettes Window from the AutoCAD Tools pull down menu.
Grouping Palettes When the project is first loaded after the upgrade, the sample palette that is distributed with the patch will be displayed in a single group called All Palettes:
The set of distributed palettes match AVEVA P&ID standard project configuration. To make the palettes easy to navigate through, it is advisable to group them. To group tool palettes, select the Customize… option from the Tool Palette right-click menu:
The AutoCAD Customize dialog box will then be displayed:
A sample group is provided, located in the folder: \\Aveva\P&ID\Install\AutoCad\Bin\palettes
The folder contains a group file called Standard.xpg, which can be loaded by right-clicking at the palette group list box and selecting the Import option:
Browse to the indicated location and select the standard.xpg file:
Close the Customize dialog box and access the Tool Palette right-click menu. The groups will now be accessible:
2.10.3
Creating New Groups and Palettes To add new groups, right-click and select the Customise… option, then and right-click in the Palette Groups pane and select the New Groups option. See the AutoCAD development guide documentation for more details. To add new palettes, navigate to the group in which the palette is to be created, right-click and select New Palette:
The new palette must then be given a valid name. See the AutoCAD development guide documentation for more details.
Right-click on the image and select Specify Image to browse for a 32x32 bitmap to represent the new tool (this step is optional).
In the case of signal lines, in the Command string field enter: ^C^C(c:asdrawsignal "Signal Description") Where: ^C^C cancels any ongoing operation in AutoCAD. ASDRAWSIGNAL is a command that is used to insert signal lines. "Signal Description" is the name of the signal line to be inserted. The signal line is then available for insertion from the Tool Palette. Note that the signal must exist in the project. The list of valid signal lines can be viewed in the Signal Line Group of the Home Tab:
In the case of process lines, in the Command string field enter:
^C^C(c:asdrawpipe "Pipe Style Description") Where: ^C^C cancels any ongoing operation in AutoCAD. ASDRAWPIPE is a command that is used to insert pipes. "Pipe Style Description" is the name of the pipe to be inserted. Pipes in the new style are then available for insertion from the Tool Palette (see 8.5.1: Drawing Pipes).
Adding Symbols to the Tool Palette It is recommended that new symbols be assigned new pictures. To add a picture to the Tool Palette, drag and drop an existing symbol from a drawing (for instance from a legend dialog) into the Picture Catalogue palette:
The symbol must have been present in the drawing prior to the last drawing save. To add a new symbol, copy and paste a tool icon from any of the existing symbol palettes (e.g. the Picture Catalogue palette) into the palette in which the new symbol tool icon is to be located.
Enter a name and a description, and optionally select a representative image:
In the Command string field enter either:
^C^C(c:ASMINSERT "Symbol Name") or
^C^C(c:ASINSERT "Symbol Name") Where: ^C^C cancels any ongoing operation in AutoCAD. ASMINSERT and ASINSERT are commands used to insert symbols. ASMINSERT is used to insert multiple instances of the same symbol. ASINSERT is used to perform a single symbol insert. "Symbol Name" is the name of the symbol to be inserted. The symbol is then available for insertion from the Tool Palette (see 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General Information). The symbol name must exist in the project symbol catalogue. Refer to the Project Administrator symbol catalogue or the AVEVA P&ID Symbol Explorer to view the project symbol names and description.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Principles and Concepts
3
Principles and Concepts
3.1
Good Drawing Practice The following points should be observed when drawing P&IDs: •
Label all instruments, equipment, pipes, bypasses, spec breaks as fully as possible.
•
All Pipe On/Off flags should be labelled.
•
Do not forget to label reducers in labelled pipes.
•
Always ensure when editing a P&ID that the AS_NONPLOT layer is On. Stretching, moving or editing the drawing with this layer Off will compromise drawing integrity and may inadvertently leave Start or End nodes online labels in the wrong position. Do not stretch pipes with the NON PLOTTING layer turned Off.
•
Always use the correct symbol. Incorrect symbols will be seen as a different item to the one intended in the validation. If the correct symbol is not available, a new one should be made.
•
Some LISP files contain AutoCAD commands and therefore should not be used. Consult AVEVA P&ID technical support for guidance on this subject. Ensure that all nozzles are associated with equipment items.
•
Equipment items should be used for the purpose intended, or pipe source and destination information will be lost during the AVEVA P&ID load.
•
Where appropriate Process Links should be used instead of pipes for the case where a branch does not need to be labelled, or a connection to an off-line instrument is required.
•
Colours: (these comments are subject to whatever project configuration has been setup) •
If the project has configured in-line items to be the same colour as the pipe then items which are not the same colour as the pipe they are associated with have been incorrectly inserted.
•
Line fittings should be the same colour as the pipe they were inserted into. If they are not, the symbol has not been inserted correctly the first time or was created on that P&ID.
•
Do not place symbols between start and end nodes, or they will not appear in a pipe for any subsequent export of data.
•
Process links can be created in any available pipe style defined for the project. Take care to ensure that only branches that are not being labelled are created using the Process Link command or toolbar button.
•
Avoid cross associated labels between pipes, i.e. place the label on the pipe which possesses the associated start and end nodes. Use the Show Associations between Items procedure to determine the association.
•
Always use destination text if a pipe does not end at a symbol, e.g. if it is expelling steam to the atmosphere or connected to a package item.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Principles and Concepts
3.2
•
Prepare drawing borders at the start of a project in the required drawing sizes and initialize AVEVA P&ID on them, so that when new drawing are created the application will start-up automatically.
•
Always be aware of the sequencing in the pipe labels, especially when adding reducers.
•
Drawing numbers and pipe flag labels should not have spaces in them.
Templates AutoCAD templates are basic drawings that provide project standard layouts and styles of drawings, for example drawing sizes, layers, title blocks, borders etc, on which project drawings can be based. Create the required templates and load the AVEVA P&ID menu into each one. Other users can then copy and open these templates, and start AVEVA P&ID from the attached AVEVA menu. Any changes to network file locking or running untested applications (normally written in C) or LISP routines is not advised. Subsequent problems are unlikely to be supported by the AVEVA P&ID support hotline.
3.3
Automatic Drawing Configuration When AVEVA P&ID is opened for a drawing, AVEVA P&ID compares the current project configuration with the drawing configuration. If differences are found, the drawing is automatically revised to suit. For details see Project Configuration - 2.2: Project Options Overview.
3.4
Pipes and Symbols
3.4.1
Categories
•
Pipes AVEVA P&ID supports an unlimited number of project defined pipe styles. The product ships with defaults of Main, Subsidiary and Process Link defined. On the Pipe toolbar the pipe style can be selected independent of the create pipe or link option buttons. This means that both pipes and links can be created using any of the pipe styles. Users must ensure that any branches that need labelling are created with the Create Pipe option.
•
Symbols All symbols consist of AutoCAD blocks, and the available categories are: •
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Principles and Concepts
3.4.2
•
Miscellaneous
•
Assemblies Non-AVEVA P&ID blocks
Pipe Creation Note: For projects developed using versions of AVEVA P&ID older than AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3, an upgrade of the pipes on the project drawings is required. See 2.1: Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects. The main points governing the creation of pipes using the Drawing Pipes procedure are as follows: •
A pipe run can be defined freely as a network with many starts and ends and can be drawn in any pipe style. These multiple origins and destinations are included in the connectivity data transferred to the VPE Workbench and are then available for the line list. A pipe can also be created with off-sheet connectors by selecting the required end style on the pipe toolbar before creating the pipe.
•
Branches may be drawn in any pipe style. When a branch is connected to another pipe section a tee point is automatically created. If a branch is deleted, the parent connected pipe automatically remakes itself into one line.
•
Trim pipes are usually supplied by a vessel vendor and when labelled, are associated with the vessel. Adding trim is achieved by selecting the vessel and clicking the right mouse button, when a menu is displayed showing the trim options.
•
Tracing can be added only to pipes and process links but not to signal lines. By means of appropriate commands, tracing can be added to existing pipes, or automatically included when new pipes are drawn. If tracing is required when a pipe is created a check box exists on the pipe toolbar to enable it.
•
Pipelines do not show a two-way flow, but, in such cases, the VPE Workbench line list contains destinations read from connected graphical elements, with an appropriate comment, for example 'bi-directional'.
•
To manually break pipelines i.e.: when they cross vessels, use of the AVEVA P&ID symbol insert facility is required to insert break symbols. The break symbols, for example small crosses, are placed by default on the non-plotting layer, but are visible on the screen.
•
Where the flow line does not receive a line number, for example, a pressure indicator connected to a pipe or equipment item, process links are used to establish connections between instruments and process items. Where the connecting line is not a signal line, process links are also used for instrument-to-instrument connections. Process links can be drawn in any project defined line style. When data is transferred to VPE Workbench, AVEVA P&ID determines pipe, equipment or instrument owners for connected instruments.
•
Pipes when created can be automatically labelled by selecting the auto label pipes checkbox on the label toolbar. When a pipe's graphical route is completed, and the prompt for a new or branch pipe is answered pipe start and end nodes are placed automatically and the label Properties dialog is displayed to define the label.
•
Branches can be added to an existing labelled pipe by selecting the pipe label and clicking the right mouse button to display a menu that shows the Add Branch option.
•
A default set of signal lines is provided. The set is to ISA standards and consists of signal lines for electrical, pneumatic, hydraulic, electromagnetic, sonic, unidentified signals, and for capillary tubes.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Principles and Concepts
3.4.3
Inserting Symbols Note: For projects developed using versions of AVEVA P&ID older than AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3, an upgrade of the symbols on the project drawings is required. See 2.1: Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects. Items can be placed on a AVEVA P&ID drawing either by selecting and inserting the required item from Symbol Explorer or from the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette. See the 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General Information procedure for further details. Every graphical item on a P&ID or flow diagram is classified by a AVEVA P&ID TYPE reference. For example, VLV - Pipe valve. See the 9.3: AVEVA P&ID Item Types and Label Types topic for details. The type reference is assigned automatically on insertion, provided that the symbol is listed in the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. The type reference is vital because it allows all AVEVA P&ID commands to recognize each symbol, and to react accordingly. Alternatively symbols can be inserted by using Copy and Paste by selecting the required symbol in the drawing, and clicking the right mouse button, where the options will be seen on the menu. This can also be achieved by the use of shortcut keys CTRL-C for copy, and CTRL-V for paste. In-line fittings when pasted into a drawing must be pasted over a flow line where they will insert into the line. The Insert key on the keyboard opens the Symbol Explorer.
3.5
Validation When drawing a P&ID, two forms of validation must be considered: •
Online (label data) validation, which takes place when P&ID graphics are labelled. See Drawing P&IDs - 6.13: Label Validation.
•
Drawing integrity validation, which takes place when the synchronising procedure is carried out (see 8.8.5: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database or 8.8.2: Exporting Data to a P&ID Reports Database). This procedure can be used either to validate the data or to both validate and transfer the data to another application such as VPE Workbench.. See also 7.5: Exporting Data to a VPE Workbench Database.
The List Item Details procedure is another validation tool. It can be used to identify the item type of an object and confirm the sequence ID of labels in a pipe.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4
The Graphical User Interface
4.1
Explorer Display Options The AVEVA P&ID graphical user interface includes two Explorers - the Engineering Explorer and the Symbol Explorer. Each is displayed on a tab in the AVEVA P&ID Explorer pane. The Explorer pane may be displayed in two modes: docking and floating. The docking version may be dragged and "docked" to any edge of the drawing window or may be positioned anywhere within the drawing window. The floating version is designed to be used primarily on dual screen monitors, as it can be dragged to any position on the screen (or screens), not just within the drawing window, so that is does not obscure any part of a drawing. Docked - Engineering Explorer displayed:
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Floating - Symbol Explorer displayed:
The default starting position and mode of the Explorer pane is docked on the left-hand edge of the drawing page, although this may be changed by editing the user's start-up routine (see 2.9: Customisation Guide). When a user initializes a session, it is displayed in the position and mode it was in when the user’s previous session ended. Continue at: 4.2: Engineering Explorer 4.3: Symbol Explorer
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4.2
4.2.1
Engineering Explorer •
Introduction
•
Equipment, Instrument and Pipes
•
Unassigned Items
•
Context Sensitive Menus
•
Searching for Items
Introduction The Engineering Explorer provides a hierarchical view of items within the currently open drawings. Details of all open drawings within the current project can be displayed simultaneously. Deleting, adding or modifying an item on a drawing will cause the Engineering Explorer to update accordingly.
You can control the amount of information displayed in the explorer by expanding and contracting the levels using the +/- boxes at the left of each list item. If an item is selected on the drawings, it is automatically selected in the Engineering Explorer as well. The Engineering Explorer may be displayed in two modes: docking and floating. For further details, refer to 4.1: Explorer Display Options.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4.2.2
Equipment, Instrument and Pipes For each drawing, items are grouped under one of three headings: Equipment, Instrument Loop and Pipes. •
The Equipment heading groups together all equipment items. Equipment items can in turn be collections of items, and this is represented in the Engineering Explorer that displays the hierarchy of items within an equipment collection. The nozzles, trim, trim branches, electrical equipment associated with a top-level equipment item are displayed.
•
Under the Instrument Loops heading is a list of the instrument loops on the drawing. Instruments are listed under the appropriate loop node. Instruments that are not in a loop are grouped under a node called "UNNAMED". Instruments can be assigned to loops by dragging and dropping between loop nodes.
•
The Pipes heading groups together all the pipes on the drawing, plus the hierarchy of all the branches of each pipe. Inline piping components are not currently represented. Note that pipes will not be displayed in the Engineering Explorer until they have been labelled.
•
The part of the pipe that has been labelled as the "main" pipe label is displayed at the top of the hierarchy of a pipe and its branches (see 4.7: The Drawing Page for details). If no main pipe label has been set, the pipe start node properties assume this position by default.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
•
Under the Pipes heading, beneath the list if pipes, pipe groups may be specified for reporting purposes (see 8.6.16: Creating Pipe Groups). Pipes may be assigned to these groups by dragging them from the list of pipes dropping them into the appropriate group.
•
Where the label or tag of an item is displayed in red, this indicates that the item is invalid in some way. This occurs when the label of the item has not been sufficiently completed, or in the case of nozzles, not labelled at all.
•
The labels of typical items may also be displayed in distinct colours, as specified in the project settings. For example, typical instrument labels may be set to be green in colour. This colour is used for the label both on the drawing, and in the Explorer.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4.2.3
Unassigned Items Beneath the drawing nodes, an Unassigned node may be displayed:
4.2.4
•
Whether or not this node is displayed is controlled by an option on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
•
Beneath this node are listed items in the VPE Workbench database that have not yet been placed on a project P&ID.
•
The list is divided into Equipment and Instruments. Items in the Equipment list are subdivided by discipline (Electrical, Mechanical and Process), then by item type. Items in the Instruments list are sub-divided by item type only (as they are all of the Instruments discipline).
•
The list of unassigned items is extracted from the VPE Workbench database when a connection to the database is established (see 8.8.7: Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database). After this has taken place, the connection may be discontinued, and the list derived from a snapshot of the database stored in an XML file.
•
Once an item is placed on a project drawing, it is automatically removed from the Unassigned list, and moved to the appropriate position on the drawing item hierarchy as described above.
Context Sensitive Menus When selected, items and folders in the Engineering Explorer have shortcut (right-button) menus.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
•
Drawing Menus •
Every menu includes a Sort option that sorts all the engineering items displayed in the Engineering Explorer according to their labels.
•
All menus except the top-level Equipment, Instrument and Pipes menus include a Refresh option which regenerates the Explorer hierarchy.
•
The Project menu includes options to open new and existing project drawings, and to connect and disconnect to and from a VPE Workbench project database.
•
The VPE Login and Logout options are also available on the Drawing menu (see 8.8.7: Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database and 8.8.8: Disconnecting from a VPE Workbench Database). In addition, this menu includes options to close the drawing, to save it (this options opens a Save Drawing As dialog), to print it, and to synchronise drawing data with data in an external database (VPE Workbench or SQL), assuming that a connection has been established (see 8.8.5: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database).
•
The Drawing menu also includes Close, Save, Synchronise, Print, VPE Logon, VPE Logoff and Insert Symbol options.
•
The Synchronise option is used to validate and export data on the drawing to VPE Workbench (see 8.8.5: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database). The VPE Logon and VPE Logoff options are used to connect and disconnect from the VPE Workbench database (see 8.8.7: Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database and 8.8.8: Disconnecting from a VPE Workbench Database).
•
The Insert Symbol option opens the Symbol Explorer, from which the required symbol can then be inserted (see 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General Information).
•
The Drawing menu and all the menus for engineering items include a Properties option. This option opens the Properties dialog for the selected item, which can be used to enter the labels and other details of the drawing or item. See 4.8: Properties Dialogs.
•
Every engineering item menu has four common options: Find, Move, Copy and Delete. When the Find option is selected, the selected item will be zoomed to on the drawing. If the drawing display does not currently show the item (i.e. if the item is not within the current drawing view window, the drawing view window will change accordingly.
•
The Move, Copy and Delete options can be used to perform these actions on individual items, or on collections of items. For example, these options can be used to move,
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
copy or delete a single branch, or an entire pipe collection including of the branches of the pipe.
•
4.2.5
•
The Instrument Loop node menu includes a New Loop options, used to create new instrument loops. See 8.6.11: Creating Instrument Loops.
•
The Pipes node menu includes a New Group option, used to create new pipe groups. See 8.6.16: Creating Pipe Groups.
Unassigned Menus •
Every menu includes a Refresh option that is used to refresh the list of unassigned items with any changes that have been made to the database (if a connection is present) and to update the list with any drawing changes that it is not yet reflecting.
•
The item menus also include Insert and Properties options. The Insert option is used to add items to the current drawing (see 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General Information).
•
The Properties option opens the Properties dialog for the selected item, on which the details of the item can be viewed. See 4.8: Properties Dialogs. While an item is unassigned, no changes may be made to these details except to assign a Symbol Name, if that has not yet been recorded for the item in the database.
Searching for Items •
To search for items, select this button:
•
The Search pane is then displayed:
•
Enter all or part of the item tag in the Find What field. Press Enter and select the Find button. The first item that matches the search criteria is then highlighted in the Engineering Explorer and on the drawing. Select the button again to find additional matches.
•
As the search criteria are being typed in, items with tags that start with characters entered so far are automatically listed below the field.
•
Note that when search for a nozzle, a concatenation of tag of the owning equipment followed by the nozzle number must be entered in the Find What field.
•
To select an item from the list, scroll to it using the up and down keyboard buttons and press Enter.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4.3
Symbol Explorer
4.3.1
Introduction The Symbol Explorer is used to select symbols and place them on a drawing. It is also used to access the Symbol Editor, used to create and edit symbols, and to upgrade existing symbols by adding ports to them.
The Symbol Explorer may be displayed in two modes: docking and floating. For further details, refer to 4.1: Explorer Display Options
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4.3.2
Using the Symbol Explorer •
The top section of the pane displays lists of both Project and Standard groups of symbols, for example valves or nozzles. If a group of symbols is selected, the content of the group is displayed in the section below.
•
The content of a group may be displayed either as icons (below top) or as details (below bottom).
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
•
Select the required format from this drop-down menu:
•
When the pane is in Icons view mode, details of the currently selected symbol are displayed below the symbol icons. When the pane is in Details view mode, a preview image of the selected symbol is displayed below the symbol details.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
•
To refresh the images of symbols, for example if a symbol has been edited or a new symbol has been created using the Symbol Editor (see below), right-click and select the Refresh option.
•
To search for a symbol, select this button: The Symbol Search pane is then displayed:
Enter all or part of the symbol name in the Find What field, and select either Symbol Name or Symbol Description from the Find In field. Press Enter. The first symbol that matches the search criteria is then highlighted in the Symbol Explorer. Select the button again to find additional matches. As the search criteria are being typed in, symbols descriptions that start with characters entered so far are automatically listed below the field. For example, if "GAT" is typed, "Gate Valve" will be listed, plus any other symbol descriptions that start with "GAT". To select a symbol description from the list, scroll to it using the up and down keyboard buttons and press Enter. The mouse cannot be used for this due to an AutoCAD limitation. Select the
button again to close the Symbol Search pane.
•
Once the required symbol has been selected it may be inserted by right-clicking on it, and selecting the Insert option, by double-clicking on it, or by dragging and dropping it from the Symbol Explorer onto the drawing page. See 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols General Information.
•
Symbols may also be inserted as "unintelligent" AutoCAD blocks, instead of as intelligent VPE symbols, by right-clicking on the symbol in question and selecting Insert Block.
•
When assemblies are created (see 8.9.1: Creating Assemblies), they are automatically placed in the Assemblies sub-folder of the Project folder.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
•
•
When symbols are exported from a drawing (see 8.8.19: Exporting Symbols), they are automatically placed in the ExportSymbols sub-folder of the Project folder.
Creating and Editing Symbols Symbols are created and edited using the Symbol Editor, which is accessed from the Create Symbol and Edit Symbol right-click menu options. Before the Symbol Editor is accessed, the user must login as a Project Administrator (using the same password used to access the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program), by selecting the Admin Login menu option (the Admin Login option is replaced by Admin Logout if the user has already logged in). Click here for details of the Symbol Editor.
•
Upgrading Symbols The Symbol Explorer includes a facility to upgrade existing symbols by adding ports to them. Note: This procedure must be carried out to upgrade all symbols on project drawings to AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3 or AVEVA P&ID 12.0 or later standard. To upgrade symbols, right-click on the Symbol Explorer and select the Upgrade Ports option from the menu that is then displayed. Each project symbol is then upgraded in turn. Note: Only the symbol files located in the \PMETSYM (Metric projects) or \PIMPSYM (Imperial projects) symbol folders, or in sub-folders in these folders, are included in the upgrade. A log file is created in the project symbol folder that contains lists the symbols that were correctly upgraded, any errors that occurred, and warnings that single connection symbols were upgraded (and therefore should be checked). For example:
[C:\Aveva\P&ID\PROJECT\IPE\Autocad\Pmetsym\NV.DWG] successfully upgraded Error: Symbol not found in project area [WEVA] Warning: Symbol with single insertion [C:\Aveva\P&ID\PROJECT\IPE\Autocad\Pmetsym\Line Fittings\FLAG2.DWG] [PFL]
[VLV]
point
The log files are best viewed in WordPad. Note: If single connection symbols are included in the upgrade, it is recommended that they are checked afterwards to ensure that ports have been placed on the correct sides of the symbols. It is not always possible for the upgrade routine to detect which this is. Note: After the upgrade process is complete it is recommended that before using the upgrade symbols they are inspected using the Symbol Editor, to check that the ports have been added correctly. Ports can also be added to symbols manually, using the Symbol Editor.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4.4
Symbol Editor New project symbols can be created, and existing symbol edited using the Symbol Editor. New symbols can be created using the Symbol Editor by:
4.4.1
•
Drawing an entirely new symbol
•
Selecting an existing symbol from a symbol library and editing it
•
Selecting entities on a drawing, either "dumb" AutoCAD blocks or "intelligent" AVEVA P&ID symbols, and editing them
Logging On Before the Symbol Editor can be accessed, the user must login to the Administrator. Rightclick on a symbol in the Symbol Explorer and select Admin Login from the menu that is then displayed. The Login dialog is then displayed. Enter the required login details (see the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program).
To logout, right-click and select the Admin Logout option instead (the Login option is replaced by this when the user has logged in).
4.4.2
Accessing the Symbol Editor The Symbol Editor can then be accessed by: •
right-clicking on a symbol in the Symbol Explorer and selecting either the Create Symbol or Edit Symbol option from the menu that is then displayed, or
•
selecting the Create Symbol option from The Drawing Page shortcut menus or the Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The Symbol Editor then opens within the AVEVA P&ID window.
Note that only one symbol can be created or edited at a time. If the Edit Symbol option was selected, the symbol right-clicked on in the Symbol Explorer is opened for editing in the Symbol Editor.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4.4.3
New Symbol Options If the Create Symbol option was selected, the following file dialog box is then displayed:
•
If a new symbol definition is to be created and added to the project, select the New option. Enter the name of the new symbol in the Symbol Name field. Select a P&ID type and enter a description in the PID Type and Symbol Description fields. Browse for the location for the new symbol file via the button adjacent to the File/Directory path field.
Note: In the case of pipe flags (off-sheet connectors), the symbol name must end with either -IN or -OUT depending on whether the flag symbol is intended to represent a connector into drawings or out of drawings. •
If an existing symbol definition is to be added to the project, one that has already been drawn, perhaps in another project, press the Existing button. Then browse for the appropriate symbol drawing file using the button adjacent to the File/Directory path field. Select a P&ID type and enter a description in the PID Type and Symbol Description fields.
•
If a symbol is being created from entities on the drawing, select the From Drawing option.
Note: If the dialog was accessed from the drawing page menu option, only this option is available. Enter the name of the new symbol in the Symbol Name field. Select a P&ID type and enter a description in the PID Type and Symbol Description fields. Browse for the location for the new symbol file via the button adjacent to the File/Directory path field. •
If the dialog was opened from the Symbol Explorer, or was accessed from drawing page shortcut menu with nothing selecting on the drawing, the entities on the drawing that are to form the basis of the new symbol must be selected on the drawing.
•
If the dialog was opened from drawing page shortcut menu with an entity selected, this is not required. The selected entity or entities will form the basis of the new symbol.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Note: When a symbol is created by selecting entities from a drawing, make sure that AutoCAD limits are checked, to ensure that the graphical components of the symbol are within the drawing limits before the base point is set. The command to check and change drawing limits is “Limits”. •
4.4.4
When all details of the symbol have been entered, press OK. The dialog box will be closed and the Symbol Editor will open. New symbols can now be drawn using the Symbol Editor, and Existing symbols or drawing entities edited to create the new symbol.
Using the Symbol Editor The Symbol Editor is an AutoCAD based application. Symbols are drawn and edited using standard AutoCAD and AVEVA P&ID drawing facilities. Additional controls are provided to enable the user to create valid AVEVA P&ID symbols, such as port valves (see below).
•
Adding Insertion Points Every AVEVA P&ID symbol must have an insertion point. This is specified in the Symbol Editor by right-clicking and selecting the Set Base Point option from the menu that is then displayed.
Select the insertion point by clicking on the required point on the symbol. The insertion point is marked with a yellow circle.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
•
Adding Ports to Symbols To add ports to a symbol, right-click on it and select the Insert Port option from the menu that is then displayed, and then place the ports at the required positions. Once all the ports have been placed, they may be named. Select the Edit Port Identities option from the right-click menu. The following dialog is then displayed:
As required, in the Port ID fields enter the identifiers of each port. Port identifiers can be alpha or numeric, or any combination, but must be unique on the valve. These IDs will be displayed for these ports on the Properties dialogs used to label port valves of the current type, and will be exported to VPE Workbench as the port identifiers, and appear on datasheets as appropriate.
•
Adding User Defined Attributes To add user defined attributes to symbols: 1. Select the symbol in question and open the Symbol Editor as described above.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
2. Enter the ATTDEF command at the command line. The Attribute Definition dialog is then displayed.
3. Check the Preset checkbox. Check the other checkboxes, e.g. the Invisible checkbox as required. Refer to AutoCAD documentation for guidance. 4. Enter the name of the attribute in the Tag field. 5. Enter the default value of the attribute in the Default field. 6. Press the OK button. The dialog then closes. 7. Unless the insertion point of the new attribute was specified in the dialog, the following prompt will then be displayed: "Specify start point:”. Specify the insertion point of the attribute in the main Symbol Editor window, i.e. where the attribute value is to be displayed relative to the symbol when the symbol is labelled. Once defined for a symbol type, user-defined attribute values can be entered using the AVEVA P&ID Properties dialogs (see 4.8: Properties Dialogs). They will be grouped under a node called User Defined Attributes.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Note: If a new attribute has been defined for a symbol of a type which already has labelled instances on a drawing, to add the new attribute to the labels of these symbols, enter UDAS at the command line, and select one of the symbols on the drawing. All the symbols of that type will then labelled with default value of the new attribute. To update all project drawings or selected project drawings with new or changed attributes, use the Refresh UDAs utility (see below). To remove all such UDAs from selected symbols on a drawing, see 8.6.34: Removing UDAs from Symbols.
•
Accessing the Dynamic Block Editor Symbols may be made into dynamic blocks by using the AutoCAD Block Editor. This is accessed from the Symbol Editor by selecting the Dynamic Block Editor option from the right-click menu.
See AutoCAD documentation for details of the Block Editor.
4.4.5
Closing the Symbol Editor and Updating the Drawing Symbol Library To close the Symbol Editor and save any changes made to the symbol being edited, select the Done option from the right-click menu. To load a new symbol into the drawing symbol library, select the Refresh Settings option in the AVEVA P&ID Group of the Home Tab.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4.5
P&ID Data Grid
4.5.1
Overview The P&ID Data Grid is used to display details of project equipment, pipes, instruments nozzles, valves, line fittings and unassigned sheet connectors in tabular form. It can also be used to: •
Assign unassigned items (created in P&ID Reports) to drawings
•
Assign source/destination drawing sheets to off-page connectors
•
Transfer instruments from AVEVA Instrumentation and add them to drawings.
•
Transfer electrical equipment from AVEVA Electrical and add them to drawings.
•
Transfer data to and view PDMS Schematic databases.
•
Label drawings with any of the data displayed in the tables.
Note that the P&ID Data Grid only displays details of drawing data that has been Synchronised (see 8.8.5: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database). To open the P&ID Data Grid, select the Load P&ID Grid option in the P&ID Reports Group of the Data Management Tab.. The P&ID Data Grid opens by default below the drawing window.
To close the P&ID Data Grid, click the x button in the top-left corner. The P&ID Data Grid consists of two main windows. The left-hand window of the P&ID Data Grid includes hierarchical tree-view of project items, similar to that of the Engineering Explorer. It includes Unassigned and Assigned nodes under the AVEVA P&ID Database node. The Assigned node lists items in the database that are on a project drawing. The Unassigned node lists items, created in P&ID Reports, which have not been added to a project drawing, and sheet connectors on project drawings which have no source or destination drawing sheet defined for them. The tree-view also lists of assigned and unassigned instruments from AVEVA Instrumentation and of assigned and unassigned electrical equipment from AVEVA Electrical, and lists of items in the connected PDMS Schematic database.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
The tree view is used to select an item or category of item, the details of which are in displayed in a grid in the right-hand window.
This is used to select an item or category of item, the details of which are in displayed in a grid in the right-hand window.
Note that the layout of the data as displayed in the right-hand section may be configured. Columns may be added, removed, re-ordered, filtered and pinned, and data may be grouped the values in selected columns. See below for details. Above the windows, a number of buttons are displayed. These are used to configure the display of data in the right-hand window, zoom into a selected item on the drawing, refresh labels on the drawing inserted from the P&ID Data Grid, and to export the data displayed in the right-hand windows to an Excel spreadsheet. Continue at: •
4.5.2: Viewing P&ID Drawing Data
•
4.5.3: Assigning Unassigned Items to a Drawing
•
4.5.4: Assigning Sources/Destinations to Page Connectors
•
4.5.5: Viewing and Assigning AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical Data
•
4.5.6: Viewing and Exporting to a PDMS Schematic Database
•
4.5.7: Zooming into an item on the Drawing
•
4.5.8: Labelling the Drawing with Data from the P&ID Data Grid
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4.5.2
•
4.5.9: Configuring the Grid Layout
•
4.5.10: Exporting the Grid to an Excel Spreadsheet
•
4.5.11: Viewing Item Datasheets
Viewing P&ID Drawing Data The P&ID Data Grid can display data either from the current drawing only, or from all project drawings. To view details of assigned items, i.e. items on a project drawing, select the Assigned node. If only data from the current drawings is to be displayed, select the Current Drawing Data option from the Drawing Selection field list. If data from all project drawings is to be displayed, select the Project Data option. To view details of unassigned items, i.e. items which were created in P&ID Reports and on not yet assigned to a project drawing, select the Unassigned node. To view details of all items in a category of item, for example all instruments, select the appropriate node under the AVEVA P&ID Database node in the left-hand window. To view details of a single item, expand the item category node and select the item in question from the list of items under that node. Details of the selected item or items are then displayed in the grid in the right-hand window. Facilities are provided to assign a selected unassigned item to the current drawing. See 4.5.3: Assigning Unassigned Items to a Drawing. Located under the Unassigned node, the Unassigned Page Connectors node is used to view lists of sheet connectors which have no source or destination drawing sheet defined for them. These nodes can be used to assign source or destination sheets to unassigned connectors (see 4.5.4: Assigning Sources/Destinations to Page Connectors).
4.5.3
Assigning Unassigned Items to a Drawing The Equipment, Instruments and Pipes nodes under the Unassigned node of the AVEVA P&ID Database node is used to view items in the project database that have not been added to a project drawing. Such items are created in P&ID Reports (refer to AVEVA P&ID Reports documentation for details). They may be added to a drawing by the facilities provided by the P&ID Data Grid.
For details of the procedure for adding unassigned items to a drawing, see 8.4.12: Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Symbols and 8.5.2: Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Pipes.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4.5.4
Assigning Sources/Destinations to Page Connectors The Unassigned Page Connectors node under the Unassigned node of the AVEVA P&ID Database node is used to view lists of all the sheet connectors on project drawings which have no source or destination drawing sheet defined for them. There are separate lists for off-sheet and on-sheet connectors. .
These nodes can be used to create connection between these unassigned connectors, and a new or existing connector on the current drawing. See 8.6.18: Labelling and Connecting Pipe Flags for details.
4.5.5
Viewing and Assigning AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical Data Before AVEVA Instrumentation or AVEVA Electrical data can be viewed, the appropriate AVEVA Instrumentation or AVEVA Electrical project must first be logged onto to. Right-click on the AVEVA Instrumentation or AVEVA Electrical node and select the Login option from the menu that is then displayed.
Note: Whether or not these nodes are displayed is controlled on the AI Integration Configuration Category and the AE Integration Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. From the dialog that is then displayed, click on the required project, and press the Select button.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
If an AVEVA Instrumentation project is selected, details of the instruments in the AVEVA Instrumentation project are then listed under the Unassigned Instruments and Assigned Instruments nodes. The Assigned Instruments node lists those instruments that have been added to a P&ID project drawing. The Unassigned Instruments node lists those that have not.
If an AVEVA Electrical project is selected, details of the electrical equipment in the AVEVA Electrical project are then listed under the Unassigned Electrical Equipment and Assigned Electrical Equipment nodes. The Assigned Electrical Equipment node lists the equipment that has been added to a P&ID project drawing. The Unassigned Electrical Equipment node lists those that have not. Beneath each of these nodes is a node for each type of item. If one these nodes is selected, details of the item of the selected type are displayed in the grid in the right-hand window. For the procedure for assigning AVEVA Instrumentation instruments and AVEVA Electrical equipment, see 8.8.12: Transferring Data from AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical. To view additional properties of an instrument or the loop it is assigned to, right-click and select the Show Instrument Detail or the Shop Loop Detail option.
To view additional properties of electrical equipment, right-click and select the Show Equipment Detail.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
A dialog will then be opened that will display all details of the instrument, loop or electrical equipment.
Refer to AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical documentation for details of these dialogs.
4.5.6
Viewing and Exporting to a PDMS Schematic Database Before PDMS Schematic data can be viewed, the appropriate PDMS Schematic database must first be logged onto to. Right-click on the AVEVA Schematic Database node and select the Login option from the menu that is then displayed. Note: Whether or not this node is displayed is controlled on the PDMS Integration Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. The PDMS Login dialog is then displayed.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Enter the appropriate login details for the Schematic database project and database, and press the OK button. Note: Default entries for the Project and MDB fields are set in the PDMS Integration Configuration Category. Right-click on the AVEVA Schematic Database node and select the Get Work option from the menu that is then displayed.
Details of the offline instruments, inline instruments, equipment and pipes in the selected database are then listed under the AVEVA Schematic Database node.
If the Current Drawing Option is selected, only items exported to the database from the current drawing are displayed. If the Project Data option is selected, items exported from all project drawings are displayed.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
To view details of all items in a category of item, for example all offline instruments, select the appropriate node under the AVEVA Schematic Database node in the left-hand window. To view details of a single item, expand the item category node and select the item in question from the list of items under that node. To connect to a different database, right-click on the AVEVA Schematic Database node and select the Login option again. To export data to the Schematic database, right-click on the AVEVA Schematic Database node and select the Save Work option. Refer to 8.8.13: Transferring Data to PDMS Schematic Databases for details.
4.5.7
Zooming into an item on the Drawing To select an item on the drawing and zoom into it, select the item in the grid and either rightclick and select the Zoom-In option from the menu that is then displayed, or select this button from the area above the grid:
4.5.8
.
Labelling the Drawing with Data from the P&ID Data Grid All of the data displayed in the tables in the right-hand window of the P&ID Data Grid may be used to label the drawing. In this way, the drawing may be labelled with data not available using the normal labelling procedures, i.e. with properties of items that are not included in the standard labels. For details of this procedure see 8.6.22: Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid. See also 8.6.23: Refreshing P&ID Data Grid Labels.
4.5.9
•
Configuring the Grid Layout •
Adding, Removing and Re-Ordering Columns
•
Grouping Data
•
Filtering Data
•
Fixing Column Headings
Adding, Removing and Re-Ordering Columns The order in which columns are displayed from left to right can be changed. To change the position of a column, drag and drop the column heading to the required position. The width of columns may also be changed. Place the cursor at the edge of a column heading, hold down the left-mouse button and drag it out or in to the required width.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
To add or remove columns, and to change the default order that columns are displayed in from left to right, open the grid to be configured, and select this button from the area above the grid:
.
The Grid Column Settings dialog is then displayed:
The Select Type field lists each of the grids, for example the grid displaying instrument details (INSTLIST). By default, the grid displayed when the dialog was accessed is displayed. Select another grid type if required. The Column Name fields list all the data columns that may be displayed in the selected grid. To include a column in the display, check the adjacent Visibility checkbox. To remove it, uncheck the checkbox. To change the default order in which columns are displayed, select a column from the list and press the up or down arrow button as appropriate. Multiple columns can be selected and moved. Select the Apply button to save the changes without closing the dialog. Select the OK button to save the changes and close the dialog.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Select the Cancel button to close the dialog without saving the changes.
•
Grouping Data The format of the display of items can be changed so that records with attribute values in common are grouped together. For example, item records can be grouped according to their Description or Tag. To group data, first activate this facility by selecting this button from the area above the grid: . The grouping bar is then displayed above the column headings:
To group data, drag and drop the column heading of the attribute in question into the space above the column headings.
The form then changes to display the name of each group in the following format: : <(Number of records in the group)>. The name of the column that records are grouped by is displayed in the grouping bar.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
To view the items within a group, click on the “+” button next to the group name. The items are then listed under the name. Press the “-“ button to close the list.
Note that the fields within a group can be fixed, moved and filtered in the normal way. -
Grouping by Multiple Attributes Records can be grouped by more than one attribute. For example, by Description and then by Tag. To group by a second attribute, for example Tag, drag and drop the heading of this attribute into the grouping bar. If the heading of the second attribute (e.g. Tag) is dropped to the right of the first attribute (Description), items will be grouped first by (Description), then by (Tag). For example, each group of item records with the same Description will be sub-divided into groups of items with the same Tag.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
If the second heading is dropped to the left of the first heading, records will be grouped the other way round. -
Ungrouping Data To "ungroup" data, drag and drop the column heading or heading from the grouping bar back to the column bar. To remove the grouping bar, select the button above the grid again.
•
Filtering Data The data displayed in a grid can be filtered so that only items that meet the criteria set in the filter conditions are displayed. To filter data, first activate this facility by selecting this button from the area above the grid: . The filter symbol then appears in the column headings. To apply a filter, click on the filter symbol in the appropriate column heading. A list of filtering options is then displayed.
If (All) is selected, all records will be displayed (i.e. there is no filtering) If (Blanks) is selected the filter will restrict the data displayed to those records that do not have a value in the selected column. If (NonBlanks) is selected the filter will restrict the data displayed to those records that do have a value in the selected column. If (Custom) is selected, the Enter Filter Criteria dialog will be displayed. This is used to set up more advanced filters (see below). If a column value is selected from the list, only records that contain that value in the column are displayed. -
Applying a Custom Filter More complicated filters can be set up using the Enter filter criteria dialog. To access, select the (Custom) option in the list. The Enter filter criteria for [name of field] dialog is then displayed. Two types of filter conditions can be set up using this dialog, “And” and “Or”. For data to be displayed on a tab, it must either match all of the “And” conditions and at least one of the “Or” conditions.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
To set up a custom filter: 1. In the Operator field, select an operator. In the Operand field, select a value. 2. To add a second condition, select the Add a condition button. Another row of fields is then added to the form in which a filter condition can be entered as described above. Repeat for each required filter condition. 3. Specify whether the conditions are "And" conditions or "Or" conditions by selecting either the And condition or Or condition button. 4. To delete a condition, select it by pressing the button at the beginning of the filter condition row, then press the Delete Condition button. 5. When all the required filter conditions have been set up, press the OK button. The filter will then be applied to the grid.
-
Removing Filtering To remove all filtering from a column, select the (All) option from each of the list of filtering options. To deactivate filtering, select the button above the grid again.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
•
Fixing Column Headings Columns can be fixed. When a column is fixed, it is moved to the left-hand edge of the display, and remains fixed in that position and visible when the grid is scrolled to the right. To fix columns, first activate this facility by selecting this button from the area above the grid: . Pin buttons are then displayed in the column headings. To fix a column, click on the pin button in the column heading.
The pin button changes to indicate that the column is pinned. The column is moved so that it is the first column on the left. Multiple columns can be pinned at the same time.
To un-pin a column, press the button again. The column is no longer pinned, but will remain in the far-left position. To remove the pin buttons, select the menu option or the toolbar button again.
4.5.10
Exporting the Grid to an Excel Spreadsheet To export a grid to an Excel spreadsheet, select this button from the area above the grid: . A Save As dialog is then displayed. Specify the name and location of the spreadsheet to be generated. Press the Save button. The report spreadsheet is then generated. The data in the spreadsheet will be displayed in the same layout as the grid in currentlyin.
4.5.11
Viewing Item Datasheets To view a datasheet for an AVEVA Instrumentation instrument or AVEVA Electrical equipment, right-click on the item in the grid and select the View DataSheet option from the menu that is then displayed.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4.7
The Drawing Page
4.7.1
Viewing Pipe and Inline Item Properties The properties of pipes and items can be viewed on the drawing page by hovering the cursor over the pipe segment or symbol in question. The properties are then displayed as illustrated below.
4.7.2
Drawing Page Menus Items on a drawing page have shortcut menus accessed by right-clicking on the them. The options displayed depend on the item selected. Shortcut menus are also available for the drawing page itself.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
All items on a drawing page have a number of common options: •
The Enter and Cancel options are used to complete or abort commands on the selected item(s).
•
The Repeat Last Command option is used to repeat the last selected command.
•
The Copy, Paste, Delete, Rotate and Move options can be used to perform these actions on individual items, or on collections of items (using these options on the drawing page menu – see below). For example, these options can be used to copy (see 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels), paste, delete (see 8.7.6: Deleting Drawing Objects), rotate (see 8.7.5: Rotating Drawing Objects) or move (see 8.7.2: Moving Drawing Objects) a single item, or a group of items selected using the mouse.
•
The Properties option opens the Properties dialog for the selected item, which can be used to enter the labels and other details of the drawing or item. See 4.8: Properties Dialogs.
•
The Typicals option is available if the Typical Items facility is enabled at project level, and if the item has been labelled with the minimum mandatory data for the item type. The option provides access to a dialog box for the entry, deletion and modification of the typical data. See 8.6.25: Labelling Typical Items.
•
The Create Symbol option is used to access the Symbol Editor.
The menus for pipes, pipe start nodes, trim pipes and so on include the following additional options:
•
The Segments... option opens a sub-menu which consists of options for adding, merging, deleting and adding elbows to pipe segments. See 8.5.13: Adding Pipe and Signal Line Segments, 8.5.14: Merging Pipe Segments, 8.5.15: Deleting Pipe and Signal Line Segments) and 8.5.17: Adding Elbows to a Line.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
•
The Pipes... option opens a sub menu which consists of options for merging pipes, splitting a pipe into two new pipes, splitting a branch off a pipe, and reversing the flow of a pipe. See 8.5.9: Merging Pipes, Branches and Signal Lines, 8.5.10: Splitting Pipes and Signal Lines, 8.5.11: Splitting off Branches and 8.5.12: Reversing Pipe and Signal Line Flows)
•
The Extend option is used to change the length of a line (i.e. a pipe, process link or signal line). See 8.5.16: Changing the Length of Lines.
•
The Break option is used to manually insert a break in a pipe. See 8.5.8: Breaking Lines.
•
The Refresh Pipe Arrows option is used to redraw the pipe arrows (flow direction indicators) of a pipe. This may be required in case the flow direction is changed and the arrows do not immediately re-orientate themselves automatically.
•
The Set As Main on - off option is used, in the case of pipes that have multiple labels, to set one of these labels as the “main pipe label”. See 8.6.27: Setting a Pipe Label as the Main Label.
•
The Add Label... option is used to place additional labels on a labelled pipe (use the Properties option to enter properties for an unlabelled pipe or to edit an existing pipe label). See Adding Extra Labels to a Labelled Pipe.
The instruments menu also includes the Segments... option and sub-menu. In the case of instruments, only the Add option is used, for use if a pipe segment is to be added to an inline instrument at the end of a pipe. See 8.5.13: Adding Pipe and Signal Line Segments. The equipment menu include the following additional options:
•
The Add Trim Label... option is used to label the trim of a vessel. See Adding a Trim Label.
•
The Add Header option is used to add and edit equipment headers. See 8.6.5: Adding Equipment Headers.
The Pipe Flag menu includes the following additional options:
•
The Open Target Drawing... option is used to open the drawing on which the linked pipe flag is located, assuming the connection between the two flags has been hyperlinked.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
•
The Propagate... option is used to propagate the properties of a pipe to another pipe via connected pipe flags. See Propagating Changes to Pipe Properties.
•
The Disconnect... option is used to disconnect linked pipe flags. See Disconnecting Pipe Flags.
The instrument label balloon menu includes the following additional options:
•
The Associate Text Option is used as part of the AutoCAD drawing upgrade routine to upgrade AutoCAD text to labels for instruments. See Upgrading Instrument Text.
•
The Associate as Label Balloon option is used as part of the AutoCAD drawing upgrade routine to associate an upgraded label balloon to an inline instrument. See Associating Instrument Label Balloons with Inline Instruments.
The pipe label menu includes a Set as Default Label option, used to specify that a specific pipe label is the default label by which a pipe will be identified in the database. See Setting a Pipe Label as the Default Pipe Label. If multiple items are selected, or if no item is selected on the drawing page, right clicking opens the drawing page menu, which includes the following additional options:
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
•
The various Zoom options and the Aerial View... option are used to change the viewing magnification and area.
•
The Regen option refreshes the drawing display.
•
The Delete Error Blocks option is used to delete error blocks from the drawing after the errors they highlight have been resolved.
•
The Ports Display -on and Ports Display -off options are used to turn the display of valve ports on and off. See 8.3.4: Turning the Display of Ports On and Off.
•
The Insert Symbol... option opens the Symbol Explorer, from which the required symbol can be selected for insertion. See 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General Information.
•
This menu also includes the Copy, Paste, Delete, Rotate and Move options, so that these actions can be carried out on the multiple items selected.
•
The Properties option on this menu is used to open the Properties Dialogs for the drawing, in which the title and other general drawing details can be added or edited.
•
The Upgrade Utility Commands options are used to upgrade non-intelligent "dumb" AutoCAD pipes, symbols and text to intelligent AVEVA P&ID items and labels. See 5.4: Upgrade Procedures in AVEVA P&ID.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4.8
Properties Dialogs Properties dialogs are used to add and modify the “intelligence” associated with engineering items, such as the label (tag) and other details. Properties dialogs are also available for entering general details of drawings, and to select default settings relating to drawing and labelling. There are two types of Properties dialog, modal and non-modal. There is a modal dialog for each type of item for which properties can be viewed and entered. Only one modal dialog can be opened at a time. There is a single non-modal dialog which displays the details of whichever item is currently selected. Unlike the modal dialog, other dialog can be opened and interacted with while this dialog is open.
4.8.1
Modal Properties Dialogs •
Modal Properties dialogs can be accessed in various ways. They can be opened by selecting an item on the drawing page or the Engineering Explorer, and then selecting the "Properties" options on the shortcut menu for the item. Alternately, activate the labelling command first and then select an item to be labelled. See 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General Information.
•
The modal Properties dialog for an item may also be displayed automatically when an item is placed on the drawing if "auto-labelling" is on for the category of item. For example, if auto-labelling is on for equipment, immediately after an equipment item is placed, the modal Properties dialog for the equipment opens automatically. Autolabelling can be switched on and off facilties in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
•
The All Properties tab includes fields for entering all data relating to the item, for example additional engineering data and the appearance of the item label, as well as the fields on the Properties tab.
•
Fields are grouped under headings into logical categories. The fields within a category can be hidden or revealed by using the +/- boxes at the left of each category heading.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
•
Beneath the fields, tips on how to complete each individual field are displayed as each field is selected. A preview of how the item tag will appear on the P&ID is also displayed, as configured in the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
•
Many of the fields on a modal Properties dialog can be completed by selecting from a drop-down list. These lists contain the values that are "allowed" for the particular field. List of values can be accessed by clicking the button at the right-hand side of the field. The lists of values display descriptions of each value. When typing into a field that has a list of values, this list is displayed automatically after the first character is entered. You may then select the rest of the entry from the list, or continue to type it in. The permissible values comprising such lists are held in the validation files for the project (see 3.5: Validation). If an invalid entry is made, the field will replace the invalid value with a default value from the list.
•
The project can be set-up so the last value entered in a Properties dialog field automatically populates that field that next time that Properties dialog is accessed for an unlabelled item of that item type. This is set up using the Pipes - Settings Sub-Set, Instruments - Settings Sub-Set, Equipment - Settings Sub-Set, Valves - Settings SubSet and Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
•
User Defined Attributes (UDAs) may be defined for project items (see 6.12: Adding User-Defined Attributes). The Properties dialogs for these items will include the fields required to enter values for these attributes.
Note: In the rest of this document, modal Properties dialogs are simply referred to as "Properties dialogs".
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
•
Note that tags, pipe sizes, instrument types and other validated data cannot be entered or changed using this dialog. A button in each tag field opens the relevant modal Properties dialog, in which the required values must be entered:
The modal dialog will include a field for all the data of the item that cannot be modified in the non-modal dialog. •
Drawings can be labelled from the non-modal dialog by hovering the mouse over the value in the Properties dialog that the drawing is to be labelled with, then moving the cursor over the drawing. The user will then be prompted to pick a point place the label.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4.9
AVEVA P&ID Tabs The first three tabs of the AVEVA P&ID ribbon menu consist of AVEVA P&ID specific commands. See:
4.9.1
•
•
Home Tab
•
Data Management Tab
•
Utilities Tab
Home Tab
AVEVA P&ID Group The AVEVA P&ID group consists of a single menu:
Project Administrator Used to open the AVEVA P&ID Project Administrator program. See 2.3: AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program. Refresh Settings Used to update the drawing with the current project settings (see 2.2: Project Options Overview).
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
•
Modify Group The Modify group consists of the following menus:
Move Used to move items to different locations in the drawing. See 8.7.2: Moving Drawing Objects. Copy Used to copy items to different locations in the drawing. See 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels. Rotate Used to rotate items through 90o. See 8.7.5: Rotating Drawing Objects. Mirror Used to mirror AVEVA P&ID entities or groups. Operates almost identically to the AutoCAD command except the mirrored object(s) are always retained. See 8.7.3: Mirroring Drawing Objects. Stretch Operates as for the moving command (see above) but retains connections enabling stretching to take place. See 8.7.4: Stretching Drawing Objects. Delete Used to delete both AVEVA P&ID and non-AVEVA P&ID entities. See 8.7.6: Deleting Drawing Objects.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Change to Non-Plot Layer Use to move items to the non-plot layer. See 8.7.9: Moving Items to the Non-Plot Layer. Find and Replace Used for performing global editing on labels other than pipe labels. See 8.6.30: Globally Editing Labels.
Add Segment Used to add a new segment to the end of a pipe or signal line. See 8.5.13: Adding Pipe and Signal Line Segments. Delete Segment Used to delete a pipe segment. See 8.5.15: Deleting Pipe and Signal Line Segments. Merge Segment Used to merge two pipe segments into one. See 8.5.14: Merging Pipe Segments. Extend Segment Used to change the length of a pipe. See 8.5.16: Changing the Length of Lines. Elbow Stretch Used to add an elbow to a line. See 8.5.17: Adding Elbows to a Line.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Split To Main Pipe Used to split a single main pipe or signal line into two separate pipes or signal lines. See 8.5.10: Splitting Pipes and Signal Lines. Split Branch Pipe Used to split a section of a pipe off as a branch. See 8.5.11: Splitting off Branches. Main to Branch Pipe Used to change pipes into branches. See 8.5.18: Changing Pipes to Branches and Branches to Pipes. Branch to Main Pipe Used to change branches into pipes. See 8.5.18: Changing Pipes to Branches and Branches to Pipes. AVEVA Connect Used to connect nozzles to pipes. See 8.5.20: Connecting Pipes to Nozzles and Equipment. AVEVA Disconnect Used to disconnect nozzles from pipes. See 8.5.21: Disconnecting Pipes from Nozzles and Equipment.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Break Used for manually breaking pipes, process links and signal lines where they cross other lines. See 8.5.8: Breaking Lines. Merge Branch/Pipe Used for merging two separate pipes, branches or signal lines into a single pipe, branch or signal line. See 8.5.9: Merging Pipes, Branches and Signal Lines. Reverse Flow Used to reverse the flow of a pipe. See 8.5.12: Reversing Pipe and Signal Line Flows.
•
Pipeline Group The Pipeline Group consists of the following menus and drop-down lists:
Draw Pipeline Used to draw pipes. The pipe will be drawn with the tracing type, pipe style and end styles selected from the above list boxes. See 8.5.1: Drawing Pipes. Process Link Used to draw process links between process and instrument items where the flow line has no line number. Also between two instruments where the connecting line is not a signal line. See 8.5.3: Drawing Process Links. Instrument Link Used to draw process links (see above) of the instrument (or "legacy") process link type. See 8.5.3: Drawing Process Links.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Add Label Used to add additional labels to labelled pipes. See Adding Extra Labels to a Labelled Pipe. Change Style Used to change the pipe style of an existing pipe. Select the new pipe style from list box described above. Then select this button followed by the pipe the style of which is to be changed. See 8.5.4: Changing Pipe Styles. Add Trace Used to add tracing of a project definable style to an existing pipe. Inline fittings are automatically traced around. See 8.5.5: Applying Tracing to Pipes.
BREAK Used to switch automatic pipe breaks on or off. ARROWS Used to switch automatic directional flow arrows on or off. TRACE Used to switch automatic tracing on or off.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
The PIPE, EQUIP, VALVE, NOZZLE and INSTR checkboxes are used to set whether or not the Properties Dialogs of items in these categories will open automatically when an item placed on a drawing, so that the item may be labelled straight away. For example, if the Equip checkbox is checked, immediately after an equipment item is placed, the Properties dialog for the equipment opens automatically.
•
Signal Line Group Draw Signal Line Used to draw signal lines. The style, thickness and colour are all project definable. See 8.5.6: Drawing Signal Lines.
Used to select a signal line style. Change Style Used to change the signal line style of existing signal lines. See 8.5.7: Changing Signal Line Styles.
•
Symbol Group The Symbol group consists of the following menus:
Note Notes may be added to any item except clouds. They may be up to 132 characters long and appear in the output files when an export is carried out. See 8.6.29: Adding Notes to Items. Revision Cloud Clouds are normally used to highlight changes from the previous revision of a drawing. This command draws revision clouds to any size. See 8.7.10: Drawing Revision Clouds.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Insert UDAs Used to label items on a drawing with their User-Defined Attribute (UDA) values, including DataSet UDAs. See 8.6.33: Labelling Items with UDAs.
Assembly Groups a collection of VPE Workbench designators and values into assemblies, also called Design Data Templates. An assembly may be repeatedly used on the same flow diagram or on other flow diagrams. See 8.9.1: Creating Assemblies. Exchange Symbol Used to exchange one type of symbol for another. See 8.7.7: Exchanging Individual Symbols. Global Symbol Exhange Used for performing all symbol exchanges other than exchanges of individual symbols. Used in conjunction with the entries in the Symbol Exchange List in the List of Values Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Client symbols may be converted using this procedure. See 8.7.8: Exchanging Symbols Globally. Inherit Owner Pipe Data Used to set individual valves and instruments to inherit their label data from a selected pipe. See 8.6.31: Setting Symbols to Inherit Label Data from a Manually Selected Pipe. Remove Inherit Data Used to turn off the inheritance of pipe label data for instruments, inline equipment, valves and line fittings. See 8.6.32: Switching off Label Data Inheritance from Pipes.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Assign Tags Equipment Used to replace equipment tags with tags in the automatic tag format. Assign Tags Instruments Used to replace Instrument tags with tags in the automatic tag format. Assign Tags Pipes Used to replace pipe tags with tags in the automatic tag format. Assign Tags Valves Used to replace valve tags with tags in the automatic valve tag format. See 8.6.26: Replacing Tags with Tags in the Automatic Tag Format.
•
Properties Group The Properties group consists of the following commands: Properties Used to place labels or 'intelligence' on the flow diagram. Also used to edit non-AVEVA P&ID text. See 8.6.1: Labelling - General Information. P&ID Properties Used to open the Non-Modal Properties Dialog. Show Object Associations Used to show the associations between items vessel and its nozzles. Associated items are highlighted. See 8.9.4: Show Associations between Items. List AVEVA P&ID attributes Lists the item handle, registered application name, code and ASCII string (item type) of a selected item. The sequence id is also shown if you choose a label. See 8.9.5: List Item Details.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
4.9.2
•
Data Management Tab
P&ID Reports Group P&ID Reports Launch Used to open an AVEVA P&ID Reports database. See 8.8.4: Opening a P&ID Reports Database. Login Used to login to an AVEVA P&ID Reports database. See 8.8.3: Connecting to a P&ID Reports Database. Load P&ID Grid Used to open the P&ID Data Grid. Refresh Grid Used to refresh labels added to the drawing from the P&ID Data Grid. See 8.6.23: Refreshing P&ID Data Grid Labels.
•
AVEVA Integration Group The AVEVA Integration group consists of the following commands and menus: Synchronise Used to validate and export data on a drawing. See 8.8.5: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database. Login Used to connect to a VPE Workbench database. See 8.8.7: Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database. Logout Used to disconnect from a VPE Workbench database. See 8.8.8: Disconnecting from a VPE Workbench Database.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Properties Used to select VPE Workbench data to associate with items on the drawing. See 8.8.9: Labelling with VPE Workbench Data. Refresh Used to refresh VPE Workbench data displayed on a drawing. See 8.8.15: Exporting Data to ISO 15926 Files. Insert Tables Used to place tables of VPE Workbench data on a drawing. See 8.8.10: Inserting Tables of VPE Workbench Data. Make Synch Batch File Used to transfer data to VPE Workbench from a batch of drawings. See 8.8.6: Synchronising Multiple Drawing Data with VPE Workbench. Publish to AVEVA NET Used to export drawing data in a format that can be imported into AVEVA NET Portal. See 8.8.14: Publishing Data to AVEVA NET. Save Work Used to save data to a PDMS Schematic database. See 8.8.13: Transferring Data to PDMS Schematic Databases. Piping Sequence Used to view and edit the sequence of entities in pipes. See 8.9.7: Viewing and Editing Pipe Entity Sequences. Delete Error Blocks Used to delete error blocks from the drawing, for example those issued during the Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database process. Deleting Error Blocks.
ISO 15926 Used to export data from a drawing to an XML file in ISO 15926 format. See 8.8.15: Exporting Data to ISO 15926 Files. ISO 15926 Batch Used to export data from multiple drawings to XML files in ISO 15926 format. See 8.8.15: Exporting Data to ISO 15926 Files.
•
Import/Export Group The Import/Export group consists of the following menus and commands:
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Excel Open Used to open an exported Excel spreadsheet for editing. See 8.8.17: Editing P&ID Data in an Excel Spreadsheet.
Excel Import Used to import data from an Excel spreadsheet. See 8.8.18: Importing Data from Excel. Make Excel Import Batch File Used to create a batch file for importing data from multiple Excel spreadsheets into multiple drawings. See 8.8.16: Exporting Data to Excel.
Excel Export Used to export data to an Excel spreadsheet. See 8.8.16: Exporting Data to Excel. Make Excel Export Batch File Used to create a batch file for exporting data from multiple drawings into multiple Excel spreadsheets. See 8.8.18: Importing Data from Excel.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Excel Filter Used to specify the types of data to be exported to Excel spreadsheets, e.g. drawing attributes, equipment, pipes etc. See 8.8.16: Exporting Data to Excel.
4.9.3
•
Utilities Tab
Project Configuration Group The Project Configuration group consists of the following menus and commands:
Update Equipment Tag Used to implement changes to equipment tags on a drawing resulting from changes to project configuration settings. See 8.2.2: Updating Equipment Tags. Update Pipe Tag Used to implement changes to pipe tags on a drawing resulting from changes to project configuration settings. See 8.2.3: Updating PipeTags. Update Spec Driven Data Used to implement changes to drawings resulting from changes to Spec Driven project configuration settings. See 8.2.4: Updating Spec Driven Data.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Recover Project Configuration Data Used to resolve configuration conflicts in a drawing caused by changes to the project configuration, and to reload a fresh set of project configuration data so that the drawing may load correctly. See 8.9.9: Recovering Project Configuration Settings. Audit Checks the drawing for corrupted items and places an error balloon at each corrupted item insertion point. See 8.8.1: Checking for Corrupted Items.
The options on this menu are not used. Set Aspect Ratio Used to set the thumbnail images of symbols that may be displayed in the Symbol Explorer. Opens a dialog into which the X and Y values can be entered. Convert Units Used to implement changes to drawings resulting from changes to the project label units. 8.2.5: Convert Project Label Units. Find Start Node using Branch Id Used when the Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database procedure reports that pipes have duplicated Branch Id's, this option assigns new, unique, Id's to selected pipes. See 8.9.6: Assigning a New Branch Id to a Pipe.
•
Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group The Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade group consists of the following menus and commands: Create Pipe Used when upgrading AutoCAD lines to AVEVA P&ID pipes to create a pipe from selected line segments and symbols. See Creating a Pipe from Line Segments and Symbols.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Create Tee Used when upgrading AutoCAD lines to AVEVA P&ID pipes to add tees to upgraded lines. See Adding Tees to Upgraded Pipe Junctions. Reverse Pipe Segment Used to reverse the flow direction of pipe segments. See Reversing Pipe Segments. Add Flow Arrows to Pipe/Pipes Used to add flow arrows to upgraded pipes. See Adding Flow Arrows to Upgraded Lines.
Remove Pipe Used to reverse the upgrade of a pipe. See Undoing the Upgrade of a Line. Remove Entity From Pipe Used to remove a symbol or segment from a pipe. See Removing Entities from a Pipe. Map Block Attributes to Pipe Field Used to map the AutoCAD attributes of a block to AVEVA P&ID pipe fields, so that the attribute values will populate those pipe fields. See Mapping AutoCAD Attributes to AVEVA P&ID Pipe Fields. View Upgraded Entities Used to identify which drawing entities have been upgraded and which have not. See 5.4.4: Viewing Upgraded Entities. Create Symbol Used to access the Symbol Editor.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide The Graphical User Interface
Upgrade Entities Used to upgrade lines and blocks to the pipe types, signal line types and symbols mapped to them using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility. See Assigning Mapped Pipe Types and Signal Types to Lines. Export Symbols Used to export the symbols on a drawing. It copies all the symbols on a drawing to the ExportSymbols folder of the project. From there they may be edited, or manually copied elsewhere, e.g. to another project. See 8.8.19: Exporting Symbols.
•
P&ID Help Group The P&ID Help group consists of the following menus and commands: AVEVA P&ID Help Opens the AVEVA P&ID Online Guide. AutoCAD Help Opens the AutoCAD help system.
AVEVA P&ID Support Opens the AVEVA Helpdesk website, which provides online support. What's New Opens the “What’s New” screen, which lists and briefly describes the main changes to functionality in the current version AVEVA P&ID. Selecting a link on this screen will open the help topic relevant to the improvement, where more details can be found. About AVEVA P&ID Opens the AVEVA P&ID "About" screen, on which general product information is displayed.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
5
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
5.1
Introduction Existing "dumb" AutoCAD drawings can be upgraded to "intelligent" AVEVA P&ID drawings by using a combination of the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility and commands within AVEVA P&ID.
5.1.1
AutoCAD Drafting Guidelines In order for the upgrade procedure to run as smoothly as possible, it is recommenced that a number of guidelines be followed when drafting the AutoCAD drawings to be upgraded. See 5.2: AutoCAD Drafting Guidelines for details.
5.1.2
Upgrading AutoCAD Lines to AVEVA P&ID Pipes, Process Links and Signal Lines AutoCAD lines may optionally be mapped to AVEVA P&ID Pipe Types and Signal Line Types using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility. See 5.3.4: Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types and 5.3.5: Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Line Types. If inline items are to be upgraded as part of the line upgrade procedure, they must be mapped to an AVEVA P&ID Symbol in the project using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility. See 5.3.3: Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Blocks. A procedure may then be carried out in AVEVA P&ID to convert AutoCAD lines to the Pipe and Signal Line Types they have been mapped to. See Assigning Mapped Pipe Types and Signal Types to Lines. No further procedures are required to upgrade AutoCAD lines to Signal Lines and Process Links. To complete the conversion of lines to Pipes: 1. The start and end points of the line, and the entities of the line that are to be upgraded must be specified. An AVEVA P&ID pipe is then created from the selected segments and symbols. See Creating a Pipe from Line Segments and Symbols. Note that lines will be upgraded to an AVEVA P&ID Pipe of the current default Pipe Type unless a Pipe Type has already been assigned to it as described above. 2. Any entities accidentally selected for inclusion in the upgraded line can be removed from it. See Removing Entities from a Pipe. 3. Tees must then be added to the junctions of upgraded line segments. See Adding Tees to Upgraded Pipe Junctions. 4. Flow arrows can then be added to the upgraded line. See Adding Flow Arrows to Upgraded Lines.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
5. When flow arrows are added they automatically point in the direction that the pipe was drawn in. As this may not be the flow direction, pipe segments may be reversed so that flow arrows point in the correct direction. See Reversing Pipe Segments. 6. The label balloons and connecting leader lines of inline instruments must then be associated with the instruments. See Associating Instrument Label Balloons with Inline Instruments.
5.1.3
Upgrading AutoCAD Blocks to AVEVA P&ID Symbols There are four ways of converting AutoCAD blocks to AVEVA P&ID symbols:
5.1.4
•
In the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility assign AVEVA P&ID Item Types and symbol property data to an AutoCAD blocks and then add those blocks as a new AVEVA P&ID Symbols to the project (see 5.3.2: Assigning P&ID Item Types and Symbol Data to AutoCAD Blocks). Like any other project symbols, they can then be added to a drawing, or selected to convert AutoCAD blocks to as described below.
•
Map blocks to AVEVA P&ID Symbols using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility (see 5.3.3: Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Blocks), and then upgrading them as part of the procedure for converting AutoCAD lines into AVEVA P&ID pipes (see Creating a Pipe from Line Segments and Symbols).
•
Map blocks to AVEVA P&ID Symbols using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility and then upgrading all mapped blocks on a drawing using a procedure in AVEVA P&ID (see Upgrading Multiple Blocks to Symbols).
•
Individually upgrading blocks in a drawing by specifying a project Symbol for them to be converted to (see Upgrading Individual Blocks to Symbols).
Upgrading AutoCAD Text to AVEVA P&ID Labels No mapping procedures in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility. A number of commands are provided in AVEVA P&ID to convert AutoCAD text to labels for different types of AVEVA P&ID items. See 5.4.3: Upgrading Text to Labels.
5.1.5
Viewing Upgraded and Un-upgraded Entities A utility is provided which can be used to easily visually identify those items on drawing which have and have not been upgraded. See 5.4.4: Viewing Upgraded Entities.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
5.2
AutoCAD Drafting Guidelines In order for the upgrade procedure to run as smoothly as possible, it is recommenced that the following guidelines be followed when drafting the AutoCAD drawings to be upgraded: •
Use different layers for primary pipeline and secondary pipelines, e.g. draft all primary pipelines on the “MAJOR” layer and all secondary pipelines on the "MINOR” layer.
•
All blocks should be placed with their respective names, not only on the drawing but also in the project. Avoid different names for a single block, as will commonly happen if CTRL+C and CTRL+V are used for copying block information. A block should be unique for a project: avoid duplicate block definitions.
•
Use a block scale of “1”. Symmetrical blocks with their widths in whole numbers are ideal as this makes the automatic port upgrade procedure (the adding ports to symbol) more efficient, and thus less effort is required subsequently, adding ports to symbols manually.
•
Information for components such as Pipes, Instruments, and Valves etc can either come from attributed text or from plain text in the right format. For example, dumb text such as "10-A-250" can be used to create a pipe tag in P&ID using the associate text facility. This information can also come from attribute definitions in AutoCAD attached to the block. In this case, the Attribute Mapping facility can be used to create tags.
•
Equipment should be placed on the “EQUIP” layer.
•
Equipment components should be placed on the “EQPT” layer.
•
Piping components and inline instruments should be placed on the “PID” layer.
•
Offline instruments should be placed on the “INST” layer.
•
Connections to process lines should be placed on the “LINK” layer.
•
Electrical and pneumatic lines should be placed on the “ELEC” layer.
•
Capillary lines should be placed on the “CAPILLARY” layer.
•
Software lines should be placed on the “SOFT” layer.
•
Attributed text information shall be placed on the “ATT-TEXT” layer.
•
Use a different layer for each type of component.
•
Snap should be set to “On”.
•
The lines or polylines that represent a single pipe should be drawn in the same direction (e.g. left to right).
•
The drawing of leader lines for instrument label balloons is recommended.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
5.3
AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility
5.3.1
Starting the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility To open the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility, select AVEVA > P&ID > P&ID Drawing Upgrade from the Programs menu. The utility is then displayed.
To select the drawings which are to be updated, select the Project Settings option from the menu on the File tab:
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
In the Select Project Folder field, enter the location of the configuration file (.PRJ) of the P&ID project, or press the Browse button and browse for the file.
In the Select Drawing Folder field, enter the folder in which the drawings are located, or press the Browse button and browse for it. The Drawing List pane then lists all the .DWG files in the selected folder. To select a drawings to for upgrade, check its checkbox. To check all the checkboxes, check the Select all Files checkbox. When the required drawings have been selected, select the OK button. The utility grids are then populated with lists of the block, line, symbol etc data from the selected drawings ready for mapping to AVEVA P&ID item types, pipe types etc. Continue at: •
5.3.2: Assigning P&ID Item Types and Symbol Data to AutoCAD Blocks
•
5.3.3: Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Blocks
•
5.3.4: Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types
•
5.3.5: Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Line Types
Data in the grids can be grouped and filtered, and grid rows can be pinned. These facilities work in the same way as those in the P&ID Data Grid. Refer to P&ID Data Grid - Configuring the Grid Layout for more information.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
5.3.2
Assigning P&ID Item Types and Symbol Data to AutoCAD Blocks AutoCAD blocks can be converted to AVEVA P&ID symbols in two ways: •
Using the Blocks setup grid, they can be mapped to an AVEVA P&ID Item Type, and have AVEVA P&ID symbol data such as Size Type, Insertion, PDMS Type etc assigned to them. When the Process button above the grid is pressed, they are converted into intelligent AVEVA P&ID symbols as new types of Symbols. This process is described below.
•
Alternatively, in the Symbol Mapping grid (see 5.3.3: Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Blocks), they can be mapped to an existing AVEVA P&ID Symbol in the project. Such blocks can then be converted to the selected AVEVA P&ID Symbols using procedures within the main AVEVA P&ID application (see Upgrade Procedures in AVEVA P&ID - 5.4.1: Upgrading Lines to Pipes and Signal Lines and 5.4.2: Upgrading Blocks to Symbols).
Open the Blocks setup grid by clicking this button:
The grid is then displayed.
The Symbol Name column lists the blocks from the selected drawings.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
To view a symbol, click on its entry. It is then displayed in a separate window.
In the P&ID Type column, select the P&ID Item Types to be mapped to the blocks. If a block is to be defined as a new symbol in the P&ID project., edit the Size Type, Insertion etc columns to define the symbol data for that block. See AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program - Symbols Configuration Category - Entering Symbol Data for guidance. The next step is to process the blocks to add intelligence to them. If a block is to be included from this process, check its Include checkbox. Press the UnSelect All button to uncheck all Include checkboxes. The name of the button then changes to Select All. Press it to check all Include checkboxes. Whether or not the symbol definitions are to be added to the catalogue of project symbols (as displayed in the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program) is controlled by the Add symbol to catalogue / Do not add Symbol to catalogue toggle button. If the button is set to Do not add Symbol to catalogue, blocks are not added to the symbol catalogue. If the button is set to Add Symbol to catalogue, they are. Whether or not symbols with the same file names are to be overwritten in the project symbol folder is controlled by the Export all symbols / Do not export existing Symbols toggle button. If the button is set to Do not export existing Symbols, existing symbols are not overwritten. If the button is set to Export all symbols, they are. Press the Process button. The blocks are then opened in AVEVA P&ID and intelligence is added to them to convert them into AVEVA P&ID symbols. They are processed one at a time.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
A dialog is opened which displays each block as it is processed:
Once the process is converted, a message displays the number of symbols successfully export.
The selected symbols are copied to ExportSymbols folder of the project, as displayed in the message. They can be viewed by clicking on this folder in the Symbol Explorer. Note: Ports must now be added to the new symbols. Refer 4.4: Symbol Editor for details. To view the log file of messages generated during the process press the View Log button. The file then opens in Notepad.
5.3.3
Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Blocks AutoCAD blocks may be added to the project as new Symbols (see 5.3.2: Assigning P&ID Item Types and Symbol Data to AutoCAD Blocks for details). Alternatively they may be mapped to existing project Symbols and converted to symbols of these types using a procedure in the main AVEVA P&ID application (see 5.4.2: Upgrading Blocks to Symbols).
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
The mapping procedure is carried out using the Symbol mapping grid. Open the Symbol mapping grid by clicking this button:
The grid is then displayed.
The Symbol Name column lists the names of the AutoCAD blocks. From the Mapped Symbol column, select the AVEVA P&ID project Symbol to map to each AutoCAD block. By default, if there is project Symbol with the same name as a block, this will be automatically selected. However a different Symbol can be selected if required. To delete a mapping row, select it and press the Delete button. AutoCAD block attributes can be mapped to AVEVA P&ID properties. Click on a symbol name. The Properties dialog is then displayed, listing all the AutoCAD attribute names of the selected block.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
In the MappedName fields, select AVEVA P&ID properties to map the attributes to.
The following P&ID Item Types support attribute mapping: Instruments (INS) All Valves types (V*) Nozzles (NOZ) Reducers (RDC) Spec Breaks (LSP) Pipe Connector Flags (PFL) When the block is upgraded to an AVEVA P&ID symbol, the mapped AVEVA P&ID properties will automatically be populated with the values of the AutoCAD attributes they are mapped to. Once all Symbol names and attributes have been mapped, press the Save button.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
5.3.4
Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types The Pipe Line mapping grid is used to map AutoCAD lines to AVEVA P&ID Pipes Types, including process links. AutoCAD lines are mapped to AVEVA P&ID signal lines using the Signal Line mapping grid (see 5.3.5: Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Line Types). To open the Pipe Line mapping grid, press this button:
The grid is then displayed.
1. Select the Add button to add a row to the grid. 2. In the Pipe Type field, select the AVEVA P&ID Pipe Type that each line is to be mapped to. 3. In the Line, Layer, Line Type and Colour columns enter the properties of the AutoCAD line in the selected drawings that is to be mapped to the selected AVEVA P&ID Pipe Type. 4. If a line type represents a process link, check its IsProcessLink checkbox. 5. Repeat the above procedure for each type of AutoCAD line to be mapped. 6. To delete a mapping row, select it and press the Delete button. 7. Once the pipe types have been mapped, press the Save button to save the mappings. A procedure can then be carried out in AVEVA P&ID to apply the mapped types to AutoCAD lines. Further procedures can then be carried out to convert these lines into AVEVA P&ID pipes. For details, see 5.4.1: Upgrading Lines to Pipes and Signal Lines.
5.3.5
Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Line Types The Line-Signal Mapping grid is used to map AutoCAD lines to AVEVA P&ID Signal Line Types. AutoCAD lines are linked to pipe types and process links using the Pipe Line mapping grid (see 5.3.4: Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types).
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
To open the Signal Line mapping grid, press this button:
The grid is then displayed.
1. Select the Add button to add a row to the grid. 2. In the Signal Type field, select the AVEVA P&ID Signal Type that each line is to be mapped to. 3. In the Line, Layer, Line Type and Colour columns enter the properties of the AutoCAD line in the selected drawings that is to be mapped to the selected AVEVA P&ID Signal Type. 4. Repeat the above procedure for each type of AutoCAD line to be mapped. 5. To delete a mapping row, select it and press the Delete button. 6. Once the Signal Types have been mapped, press the Save button to save the mappings. A procedure can then be carried out in AVEVA P&ID to apply the mapped types to AutoCAD lines, converting them to AVEVA P&ID Signal Lines. For details, see 5.4.1: Upgrading Lines to Pipes and Signal Lines.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
5.4
Upgrade Procedures in AVEVA P&ID
5.4.1
Upgrading Lines to Pipes and Signal Lines This procedure is used to upgrade AutoCAD lines into AVEVA P&ID pipes, process links and signal lines, including, if required, all the inline fittings, valves etc. Note: If it is required to generate a simple line list from AVEVA P&ID using the Synchronize facility (see 8.8.5: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database), it is not necessary to upgrade inline symbols. Line lists can be generated from "semiintelligent" drawings in which only the lines themselves have been upgraded to pipes. The procedure is as follows: 1. Assign AVEVA P&ID Pipe Types and Signal Types to AutoCAD lines, as specified by mappings setup in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility. The upgraded lines will adopt the appearance of the specified pipe types and signal types. See Assigning Mapped Pipe Types and Signal Types to Lines. 2. The start and end points of the line, and the entities of the line to be upgraded must be specified. An AVEVA P&ID pipe is then created from the selected segments and symbols. See Creating a Pipe from Line Segments and Symbols. 3. Any entities accidentally selected for inclusion in the upgraded line can be removed from it. See Removing Entities from a Pipe. 4. Tees must then be added to the junctions of upgraded line segments. See Adding Tees to Upgraded Pipe Junctions. 5. Flow arrows can then be added to the upgraded line. See Adding Flow Arrows to Upgraded Lines. 6. When flow arrows are added they automatically point in the direction that the pipe was drawn in. As this may not be the flow direction, pipe segments may be reversed so that flow arrows point in the correct direction. See Reversing Pipe Segments. 7. The label balloons and connecting leader lines of inline instruments must then be associated with the instruments. See Associating Instrument Label Balloons with Inline Instruments. 8. The upgraded line should now be labelled, either by using standard labelling facilities (see 8.6.1: Labelling - General Information), or by upgrading AutoCAD text and associating it with the line (see Upgrading Pipe Text). Optionally, the AutoCAD attributes of a block can be mapped to AVEVA P&ID pipe fields. The upgraded line can then be selected, and the values of the attributes will then automatically populate the pipe property fields they were mapped to. See Mapping AutoCAD Attributes to AVEVA P&ID Pipe Fields. If required, an upgraded line may be changed back into a dumb AutoCAD line. See Undoing the Upgrade of a Line.
•
Assigning Mapped Pipe Types and Signal Types to Lines The Pipe Types and Signal Types mapped to AutoCAD lines in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility (see 5.3.4: Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types and 5.3.5: Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Line Types) are applied to all the AutoCAD lines in a drawing by: 1. Selecting the Upgrade Utility Commands > Upgrade Entities option from the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Upgrade Entities option in the NonIntelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab..
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
2. All AutoCAD lines in the drawing with sets of properties mapped to AVEVA P&ID Pipe or Signal Types are then converted to lines in the mapped types and will adopt the appearance of these types. Note: When lines that have not had AVEVA P&ID Pipe or Signal Types assigned to them using this procedure are upgraded to pipes using the procedure below, they will automatically adopt the current default Pipe Type. Note: This procedure will also convert all AutoCAD blocks that have had AVEVA P&ID Symbol Types mapped to them in the in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility (see 5.3.3: Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Blocks) to AVEVA P&ID symbols of the mapped types. No further upgrade procedures are required to convert AutoCAD lines to AVEVA P&ID Signal Lines and Process Links. To complete the conversion of AutoCAD lines to AVEVA P&ID Pipes (and Process Links), proceed as described below.
•
Creating a Pipe from Line Segments and Symbols 1. Select the Upgrade Utility Commands > Pipe Upgrade > Create Pipe option from the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Create Pipe option in the NonIntelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The Command prompt will display:
Pick start point of the line: Pick the start of point of the line to be upgraded. 2. The Command prompt will display:
Pick second point to determine angle: Pick a point a little further along the line from the start point. 3. The Command prompt will display:
Pick start point of the line: Pick the end point of the line. 4. The Command prompt will display:
Pick second point to determine angle: Pick a point a little way back along the line from the end point.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
5. The Command prompt will display:
Please select entities in the correct sequence, upstream to downstream: Select all the segments, and if they are to upgraded, the symbols that the pipe is to consist of from upstream to downstream. The command prompt will display a count of the number of entities selected. 6. Press Enter. The line and all selected entities will then be upgraded. The line will then be upgraded to an AVEVA P&ID pipe of the default Pipe Type (unless a Pipe or Signal Type has already been assigned to it as described above). The line will be upgraded to the type of pipe, process link or signal line specified for the AutoCAD line type in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility (see 5.3.4: Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types and 5.3.5: Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Line Types). Select symbols will be upgraded to the types of items and symbols specified for the AutoCAD block in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility (see 5.3.2: Assigning P&ID Item Types and Symbol Data to AutoCAD Blocks and 5.3.3: Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Blocks). If no mapping has been set up for a line type or block in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility, it will not be upgraded. Note: The sequence of entities in a pipe can be checked and if necessary edited using the Viewing and Editing Pipe Entity Sequences procedure. This procedure can also be used to add and remove entities to and from a pipe.
•
Removing Entities from a Pipe 1. To remove entities from an upgraded pipe, that for example may have been selected for inclusion in a pipe by mistake in the above upgrade procedure, select the Upgrade Utility Commands > Pipe Upgrade > Remove Entity option from the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Remove Entity From Pipe option in the Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The Command prompt will display:
Select entity: 2. Select the entity to be removed from the pipe. Press Enter. The selected entity is then removed from the pipe.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
•
Adding Tees to Upgraded Pipe Junctions 1. Select the Upgrade Utility Commands > Pipe Upgrade > Create Tee option from the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Create Tee option in the Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The Command prompt will display:
Select objects: 2. Select all the objects of the pipe that is to have a tee added to end of it, and all the objects of the pipe that it forms a junction with. Press Enter. The tee will then be added.
•
Adding Flow Arrows to Upgraded Lines 1. Select the Upgrade Utility Commands > Pipe Upgrade > Add Flow Arrows to Pipe/ Pipes option from the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Add Flow Arrows To Pipe option in the Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The Command prompt will display:
Select Pipe/Pipes to add flow arrows: 2. Select the pipes to which flow arrows are to be added. Press Enter. The flow arrows will then be added to selected pipes.
•
Reversing Pipe Segments 1. Select the Upgrade Utility Commands > Pipe Upgrade > Reverse Pipe Segment option from the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Reverse Pipe Segment option in the Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The Command prompt will display:
Select Segments to reverse flow: Select the segments the flow of which is to be reversed. 2. Press Enter. The flow direction of the selected segments is then reverse, as indicated by the flow arrows.
•
Associating Instrument Label Balloons with Inline Instruments 1. Select the Associate as Label Balloon option fromThe Drawing Page shortcut menu of the label balloon. Note that the balloon symbol must have been upgraded. The Command prompt will display:
Select Symbol to Associate Balloon: Select the appropriate instrument symbol.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
2. The Command prompt will display:
Select Leader Line for the Balloon: Select the leader line connecting the balloon symbol to the instrument symbol. The selected balloon and leader line are then associated with the instrument.
•
Mapping AutoCAD Attributes to AVEVA P&ID Pipe Fields 1. Select the Upgrade Utility Commands > Pipe Upgrade > Map Block Attributes to Pipe Fields option from the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Map UDAs To Pipe Field option in the Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The Command prompt will display:
Select Block for Pipe Attributes: Pick the block that attributes will be mapped from. 2. The Properties dialog will then be displayed:
The dialog displays the names and values of the block's attributes. Select the pipe fields to map the attributes to in the Pipe Field fields. Click OK.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
The following P&ID Item Types support attribute mapping: Instruments (INS) All Valves types (V*) Nozzles (NOZ) Reducers (RDC) Spec Breaks (LSP) Pipe Connector Flags (PFL) 3. The Command prompt will display:
Select Pipe/Pipes for Attribute Mapping: Select the pipe or pipes to which the block attributes will be mapped. 4. Press Enter. The property fields of the selected pipes will then be populated with the values of the attributes mapped to them.
•
Undoing the Upgrade of a Line 1. To reverse the upgrade of a pipe, reverting the pipe and it's entities to dumb AutoCAD lines and blocks, elect the Upgrade Utility Commands > Pipe Upgrade > Remove Pipe option from the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Remove Pipe option in the Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The Command prompt will display:
Select Pipe: Select the pipe. 2. Press Enter. The pipe will then be converted back into an AutoCAD line and its symbols into AutoCAD blocks. Note that the formatting of the pipe, for example its colour and line style does not revert. It maintains its upgraded appearance but is not longer and "intelligent" AVEVA P&ID pipe.
5.4.2
Upgrading Blocks to Symbols "Dumb" AutoCAD blocks may be upgraded to "intelligent" AVEVA P&ID symbols as part of the procedure for upgrading lines to pipes. See 5.4.1: Upgrading Lines to Pipes and Signal Lines. Other symbols, such as offline instruments and equipment should be upgraded using the following procedures. All AutoCAD blocks on that drawing have been mapped to AVEVA P&ID project Symbols using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility (see 5.3.3: Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Blocks) can be upgraded to the mapped Symbols in one go. AutoCAD blocks that have not been mapped must be upgraded individually.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
•
Upgrading Multiple Blocks to Symbols To upgrade all the blocks on a drawing to the project Symbols they have been mapped to in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility: 1. Select the Upgrade Utility Commands > Upgrade Entities option from the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Upgrade Entities option in the Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. 2. All AutoCAD blocks in the drawing with Symbol mapping set up for them in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility are then converted to the mapped AVEVA P&ID Symbols. Note: This procedure will also upgrade all AutoCAD lines with properties that have been mapped to an AVEVA P&ID Pipe Type or Signal Type to Pipes/Signal Lines of those types (see 5.3.4: Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types and A5.3.5: Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Line Types).
•
Upgrading Individual Blocks to Symbols If a block has not been mapped to an AVEVA P&ID Symbol, or it is not required to be converted to the Symbol it is mapped to, upgrade it as follows: 1. Right-click on the block to be upgraded and select the Upgrade Symbol option from the drawing page shortcut menu. The Command prompt will display:
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
2. The Symbol List dialog is then displayed, from which the type of symbol that the block is to be upgraded to is selected:
3. Select the category of symbol from the left-hand window, and then the name of the symbol from the left-hand window. If the name of the symbol is known, but not its category, enter the name of the symbol in the Find field, and click on the Find button. To select a symbol, click on it in the right-hand window. An image of it is displayed in the lower half of the dialog box, along with the symbol name and description. Press the OK button. 4. The block is then converted to an AVEVA P&ID symbol of the selected type.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
5.4.3
Upgrading Text to Labels AutoCAD text can be upgraded to an AVEVA P&ID label by associating it with the pipe or item that it is to label. The text then changes, if required, to reflect the properties of the selected pipe or item, and becomes a P&ID label. This facility is available for pipes, nozzles, valves and instruments. Continue at:
•
•
Upgrading Pipe Text
•
Upgrading Nozzle and Valve Text
•
Upgrading Instrument Text
Upgrading Pipe Text AutoCAD text can be upgraded either to a full pipe label, which will consist of all the properties included in the project pipe label format, or a partial pipe label which will consist of a single pipe property. Multiple label formats can be configured using the Select a Tag Format For Pipe dialog (see below). The user can then select from these when upgrading text to pipe labels, or set up a different format. To upgrade AutoCAD text using the pipe label format currently selected in the Select a Tag Format For Pipe dialog, select the AutoCAD text on The Drawing Page, then select Drawing Upgrade Associate > Associate Text > To Pipe from the shortcut menu. The Tag Attributes List dialog is then displayed:
The dialog lists the attributes and values of the selected text. As required, in the Association column, match values to either the Tag, Start Node or End Node of the pipe to be labelled with the text. The selected text will form the labels of these parts of the pipe. Select OK.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
The following will then be displayed if the tag format does not match the format of the selected text:
If Yes is selected, the Select a Tag Format For Pipe dialog is then displayed. Select or create a tag format as described below. If No is selected, the commands then ends. After a tag format has been selected, or if the tag format does match the format of the selected text, the Command prompt will then display:
Select pipe to associate label: Select the pipe that the selected text is to become a label of. The text will then be changed to an AVEVA P&ID label of the selected pipe, and if required will change to reflect the properties of the pipe. Note: Alternately, existing pipe labels can be changed to a selected AutoCAD text value. In this case, the AutoCAD text will remain as it is, and the labels of the selected pipe will change to it, i.e. the pipe properties will be updated with the AutoCAD text value. Whether or not this option is applied is dependent on the setting of the Upgrade Label checkbox on the Select a Tag Format For Pipe dialog (see below). If attribute values were mapped to the pipe start and/or end nodes in the Tag Attributes List dialog, the user will be prompted to position these values as pipe destination text. For example:
Select start node to associate label:
-
Setting Up Pipe Label Format or Selecting a Different Pipe Label Format To configure label formats for upgrading pipe text, or to select a different existing format to apply to AutoCAD text, select AutoCAD text on The Drawing Page, then select Drawing Upgrade Associate > Associate Text > Configure... from the shortcut menu.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
The Select a Tag Format For Pipe dialog is then displayed.
Those formats previously set up are listed in this dialog. To configure a new format: 1. Click the New button. The Tag Format Editor dialog is then displayed.
2. Enter a description, plus any remarks if required.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
3. The drop-down lists in the lower part of the dialog are used to select the label format, i.e. the properties of the pipe that are to displayed, the order that they are to be displayed in, and the delimiters that are to separate them. Select the properties and delimiters from the list as required. Note: If a format with more that one property is to be configured, i.e. a full pipe label, it must be in exactly the same format as the Display Label Format, as set up on the Pipes Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. The selected format is displayed in the field at the top of the dialog. 4. Once the required format has been set up, click Save. The dialog is then closed and the new format added to the list in the Select a Tag Format For Pipe dialog. To edit an existing format, select it from the list and click the Edit button. The Tag Format Editor dialog is then displayed. Edit the format as described above. To delete a format, select it from the list and click the Delete button. To select a format to apply to AutoCAD text, click on it in the list of formats, and click the Select button on the toolbar (top-right corner of the dialog). Until a different format is selected from this dialog, all text upgraded to a pipe label will adopt this format. If, instead of AutoCAD text being upgraded to AVEVA P&ID labels, the existing labels of pipes are to be changed to the values of the AutoCAD text, ensure that the Upgrade Label checkbox is not checked.
•
Upgrading Nozzle and Valve Text The procedures for upgrading AutoCAD text to a nozzle label and a valve label are the same. AutoCAD text can be upgraded to either the tag value or the size value of a nozzle or valve. Select AutoCAD text on The Drawing Page, then select Drawing Upgrade Associate > Associate Text > To Nozzle > or To Valve >, then either Tag or Size as required from the shortcut menu. The Command prompt will then display, for example:
Select nozzle: Select the nozzle or valve that the selected text is to become a label of. The text will then be changed to an AVEVA P&ID label of the selected item, and if required will change to reflect the tag or size of that item.
•
Upgrading Instrument Text AutoCAD text is upgraded to instrument labels by selecting, for each piece of text, which instrument property that text is to become. To upgrade AutoCAD text to an instrument label, select the instrument label balloon on The Drawing Page, then select Associate Text from the shortcut menu.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
The Associate Text to Instrument Label dialog is then displayed.
In the dialog, click the ... button for the instrument component, for example Alarm 1, that the AutoCAD text is to be upgraded to. The dialog then closes and the Command prompt will display, for example:
Select text to associate with InstrumentAlarm1: Select the text that is to be upgraded to the selected instrument property. The dialog is then displayed again. Repeat the above procedure for each piece of AutoCAD text to be upgraded by association with the selected instrument. When each piece of AutoCAD text has been associated with an instrument property, click OK. The AutoCAD text will then be changed to AVEVA P&ID labels displaying the selected properties, and if required will change to reflect the values of those properties.
5.4.4
Viewing Upgraded Entities AVEVA P&ID includes a utility which can be used to quickly identify which drawing entities have been upgraded and which have not, using colour. From The Drawing Page shortcut menu of a drawing, select View Upgraded Entities or select View Upgraded Entities option in the Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
The AVEVA Dwg Viewer dialog is then displayed.
The dialog displays the selected drawing. Standard toolbar buttons are provided to pan, zoom in, zoom out etc. Initially, all drawing entities are displayed in grey. To apply different colours to different types and states (upgraded or not upgraded) of entities, select the Set Colours button.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
The following dialog is then displayed.
To specify a colour for a type of upgraded item, for labels, errors, warning and for entities that have not been upgraded ("Undefined Entities"), click on the colour field next to the type of entity. Select the required colour from the dialog that is then displayed. When the required colours have been selected, click OK.
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
To apply the colours, select the Apply Colours Settings button. The selected colours are then applied to the drawing view.
Entities that have errors or warnings associated with them can be displayed in specific colours, as described above. To view an error or warning, hover the mouse cursor over the entity in question:
Quick Guide to Drawing P&IDs The table below lists the procedures that are undertaken in order to draw a P&ID. Alongside the procedures are references to the most efficient way a user can make use of the AVEVA P&ID graphical user interface in order to carry out each procedure. To learn more about each procedure, click on 'Details'. To learn more about a part of the graphical user interface, click on the appropriate link text. There are links from all the pictures of the toolbar buttons. See also 8: AVEVA P&ID Procedures. Procedure
Best use of the Graphical User Interface
Create a new drawing Create a new AVEVA P&ID drawing, plus any required See 6.2: Creating a New templates. Drawing. Start to draw the P&ID in AVEVA P&ID. Add a title and other Complete the Properties Dialogs for the drawing. general data to the drawing See 6.4: Titling a Drawing. Insert equipment, valves, line fittings, instruments and so on See 6.5: Inserting Symbols.
Select and insert the symbols using the Symbol Explorer.
Insert items in project database not yet placed on a P&ID 6.7: Inserting Unassigned VPE Workbench Items.
Select and insert items from the Unassigned node of the Engineering Explorer.
Label the symbols with tag and other engineering data. See 6.10: Labelling Symbols.
Will activate automatically after symbol is placed if “Autolabelling” has been turned on in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab.
6:1
12.1
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Drawing P&IDs
Procedure
Best use of the Graphical User Interface
Draw the required pipes, branches and process links See 6.8: Drawing Pipes and Connections.
Use the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab to choose the required type, style, tracing style and end styles, and whether flow arrows, breaks and tracing are placed automatically. Select the Draw Pipeline option in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab to start drawing pipes. Select the Process Link option in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab to draw process links. To edit lines and segments use the options in the Modify Group of the Home Tab. Select the Add Trace option in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab to add pipe tracing manually To add flow arrows manually insert an arrow symbol.
Label the pipes See 6.11: Labelling Pipes.
Complete the Properties Dialogs for the pipes, plus reducers and spec breaks Will activate automatically after pipe is drawn if "Autolabelling" has been turned on in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab. If required, set pipe labels as the "main" pipe labels using The Drawing Page shortcut menus.
Set valves and instruments Select the Inherit Owner Pipe Data option in the Symbol to inherit label data from Group of the Home Tab. pipes See 6.10.4: Label Inheritance from Owning Pipes. Draw the required signal Use the Signal Line Group of the Home Tab to choose the required signal line style. lines See 6.8.2: Drawing Signal Select the Draw Signal option in the Signal Line Group of Lines. the Home Tab. Modify the style of existing Select the Change Style option in the Pipeline Group of the pipes and signal lines Home Tab to modify pipe styles. Select the Change Style option in the Signal Line Group of the Home Tab to modify signal line styles. Group together items to Select the Assembly option in the Symbol Group of the form assemblies Home Tab. See 6.14: Assemblies.
Add "Dynamic Labels" as Connect to VPE Workbench database by selecting the Login option in the AVEVA Integration Group of the Data required See 6.16: Dynamic Management Tab. Labelling. Choose VPE Workbench data to label drawing by selecting the Properties option in the AVEVA Integration Group of the Data Management Tab. If the selected data is subsequently changed in VPE Workbench, select the Refresh option in the AVEVA Integration Group of the Data Management Tab. Disconnect from VPE Workbench by selecting the Logout option in the AVEVA Integration Group of the Data Management Tab. Add notes and revision clouds See 6.17: General Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds.
Select the Note option in the Symbol Group of the Home Tab. Select the Revision Cloud option in the Symbol Group of the Home Tab.
Moving objects to and from Select the Change to Non-Plot Layer option in the Modify Group of the Home Tab. the non-plot layer. See 6.17: General Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds. Edit labels and properties Access the relevant Properties Dialogs and change the or symbols and pipes entered data as required. To bulk edit large numbers of labels, use the Find and Replace facility (non-pipe labels only) or the Excel Interface. See 8.6.30: Globally Editing Labels or 7.8: Transferring Data to and from Excel. Perform any required symbol exchange, i.e. swapping one symbol for another See 6.17: General Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds. General Editing - Copying and Moving See 6.17: General Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds.
To change symbols individually, select the Exchange Symbol option in the Symbol Group of the Home Tab. To change multiple symbols at once, select the Global Symbol Exchange option in the Symbol Group of the Home Tab.
Copy or move items by selecting them on The Drawing Page and selecting the Copy and Cut options from the drawing page short cut menus. Indicate the required location(s) that the items are to be moved or copied to. The Copy and Move options on the Engineering Explorer shortcut menus can also be used to copy and move items or collections of items.
6:3
12.1
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Drawing P&IDs
Procedure
Best use of the Graphical User Interface
General Editing - Mirroring, Stretching and Rotating See 6.17: General Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds.
Mirroring: select the Mirror option in the Symbol Group of the Home Tab. Stretching: select the Stretch option in the Symbol Group of the Home Tab. Rotating: Select the relevant items on the drawing and select Rotate from the drawing page shortcut menu.
General Editing - Deleting See 6.18: Deleting Items.
Select the relevant items on the drawing and select Delete from the drawing page shortcut menu. The Delete option on the Engineering Explorer shortcut menus can also be used to delete items or collections of items.
General Editing - Undoing Select Undo from the The Drawing Page shortcut menus. changes to the drawing See 6.17: General Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds. Validate and export P&ID data See 7.5: Exporting Data to a VPE Workbench Database.
If exporting direct to VPE Workbench, connect to VPE Workbench database by selecting the Login option on the Engineering Explorer shortcut menu for the drawing. To start export, select the Synchronize with VPE Workbench option drawing shortcut menu of the Engineering Explorer. Disconnect from VPE Workbench by selecting the Logout option on the Engineering Explorer shortcut menu.
6.2
Creating a New Drawing AVEVA P&ID drawings can be created by using one of the following methods: •
Creating and saving a new drawing in AVEVA P&ID.
•
Opening an AutoCAD drawing in AVEVA P&ID, adding "intelligence", and saving.
•
Upgrading an existing "dumb" AutoCAD drawing to an "intelligent" AVEVA P&ID drawing. See Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings.
When an AVEVA P&ID drawing is opened, AVEVA P&ID will start automatically. Before actual drawings are created, it is recommended that an administrator should create a set of AutoCAD template drawings on which a user can base a new drawing (see 3.2: Templates). If an appropriate template drawing has not been generated, create a drawing in AVEVA P&ID with the desired drawing size, and load line types and layers into it as required. Assign colours and line types to the layers. Use Ortho/Axis Lock and Snap On to prevent pipe start/ end nodes being rotated. Starting and Exiting AVEVA P&ID
Starting and Exiting AVEVA P&ID Whenever a AVEVA P&ID drawing is opened in AutoCAD, AVEVA P&ID is initialised automatically. AVEVA P&ID can also be opened from the Programs menu e.g. AVEVA Plant > Engineer > P&ID 12.1 > Projects > [Project Name] > AVEVA P&ID 12.1 [Project Name]) or a desktop shortcut:
When AVEVA P&ID is initialised, a "What's New" screen is displayed, which lists and briefly describes the main changes to functionality in the current version AVEVA P&ID. Selecting a link on this screen will open the help topic relevant to the improvement, where more details can be found. If you do not want this screen to appear every time you start AVEVA P&ID, check the Don't Show Me This Screen Again checkbox. Note that drawings can only be opened from the folder specified in the Drawing Location field in the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, and from sub-folders in that folder. AVEVA P&ID can be closed using the standard AutoCAD methods e.g. File > Close which leaves AutoCAD running, or File > Exit that closes both the drawing and AutoCAD, or by selecting the drawing in the explorer, clicking the right mouse button and selecting the Close menu command. Multiple drawings can be opened in a single AutoCAD session. Each one will display in the explorer. Selecting the drawing in the explorer makes it the active drawing in AutoCAD.
6.4
Titling a Drawing Typically the first action taken when producing a drawing is to add a title and other general drawing information. This is carried out by completing the drawing Properties dialog (see 4.8: Properties Dialogs), which can be initialised by pressing the right mouse button over the drawing sheet, with no objects selected, and selecting the Properties option on the menu. On completion of the Properties dialog, a title block is added to the drawing, which can be completed as required with the drawing number, sheet number, revision, clients drawing number and five lines of a drawing title. The drawing number is the only mandatory addition. An advanced button exists on this Properties dialog which also adds additional sheet level data i.e.: Last line number used. Completion of this data is optional. It is good practice to state the AVEVA P&ID release number, somewhere on the drawing in normal text (that is, in AutoCAD text). It should be noted that the validation and transfer of the engineering data to VPE Workbench cannot proceed without a drawing number.
Inserting Symbols Note: For projects developed using versions of AVEVA P&ID older than AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3, an upgrade of the symbols on the project drawings is required. See 2.1: Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects. Symbols can be inserted using the Symbol Explorer. Alternatively, symbols can be inserted using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette. Unassigned P&ID Database items can be inserted from the P&ID Data Grid. See 6.6: Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Items for details. Unassigned VPE Workbench items can be inserted from the Engineering Explorer. See 6.7: Inserting Unassigned VPE Workbench Items for details. For further details, see: •
8.4.3: Inserting Electrical Equipment (for example: electric motor, agitator)
•
8.4.7: Inserting Inline Fittings (for example; concentric reducer, blind spade, duct fitting, flame trap, end cap, expansion bellows. Note that the category includes spec break and destination flag)
•
8.4.6: Inserting Instrument Valves (Control Valves) (for example; diaphragm-actuated, piston actuated, pressure relief, also includes vacuum/relief devices)
•
8.4.8: Inserting Instruments (Balloons) (for example: indicator, controller, I/P converter, PLC, logic box. Note that the category includes interlocks and I/O Rockets)
•
8.4.9: Inserting Flow Elements (for example: venturi, orifice plate, turbine)
•
8.4.4: Inserting Nozzles
•
8.4.10: Inserting Miscellaneous Symbols (items that do not fit into other categories, for example vessel jackets, revision triangles, pigtail, hexagon. Note that the category also includes symbols representing equipment of EDL (Equipment Data Location) item type)
•
8.4.11: Inserting Assemblies (Collections of flow diagram elements or dynamic labels that are stored in a library)
Notes •
For a new drawing, the first symbols to be positioned are usually major equipment items, e.g. vessels, pumps, electrical equipment etc.
•
To check the association between items, where this is not apparent in the Engineering Explorer, there is a facility provided to find out which nozzles, electrical equipment etc are associated to a vessel, finding out which I/O Rockets are associated to which instrument. See 8.9.4: Show Associations between Items.
•
After equipment items are placed on the drawing, they can be re-positioned using the Move options on the item's shortcut menus (on the drawing page and the Engineering Explorer). Items can also be copied using the Copy option on the item's shortcut menus. See 8.7.2: Moving Drawing Objects and 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels.
•
Unwanted items can be removed by using the Delete option on the item shortcut menus. See 8.7.6: Deleting Drawing Objects.
Where an instrument valve is placed between the end node of one pipe, and the start node of another, this valve may serve as the source and destination of these pipes, as opposed to the pipe nodes, depending on the type of valve that it is.
•
Handwheels may be inserted onto instrument valves.
•
Port valves are inserted in the same way as standard general and instrument valves.
•
The display of ports on port valves and other symbols can be switched on an off. See 8.3.4: Turning the Display of Ports On and Off.
•
Project configuration may restrict the insertion of a valve or reducer symbol to pipes of specified specifications and sizes. See the Symbols pane of the Spec Driven Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
•
Shortcut keys - the INSERT key opens the Symbol List dialog box, the DELETE key deletes the selected objects in the drawing.
Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Items Unassigned P&ID database items are items (equipment, instruments and pipes) which were created in P&ID Reports and on not yet assigned to a project drawing (refer to AVEVA P&ID Reports documentation for details). Details of unassigned items can be viewed by selecting the Unassigned node under the AVEVA P&ID Database node of the P&ID Data Grid. Under this node, three further nodes are displayed: Equipment, Instruments and Pipes, beneath all unassigned items are listed. The P&ID Data Grid provided facilities to place such items on a project drawing, changing them from unassigned to assigned. The inserted items are automatically labelled with the properties set for them in AVEVA P&ID Reports. The symbol used to represent an equipment item or instrument inserted in this manner is also set in AVEVA P&ID. See:
Inserting Unassigned VPE Workbench Items Unassigned VPE Workbench items are equipment and instrument items in the associated VPE Workbench database that have not yet been placed on a project P&ID. If this facility is in use for a project, the items are listed under the Unassigned node in the Engineering Explorer, from where they can be selected and inserted into drawings - see 8.4: Inserting Symbols. Whether or not the Unassigned node is displayed is controlled by an option on the 2.3.3: VPE Workbench Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. The list of unassigned items is extracted from the VPE Workbench database when a connection to the database is established (see 8.8.7: Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database). After this has taken place, the connection may be discontinued, and the list derived from a snapshot of the database stored in an XML file. The connection should be reestablished regularly in order to refresh this list. Note that since not every item in the database is appropriate for placement on a P&ID, facilities are provided in VPE Workbench to restrict the unassigned items list to consist only
of appropriate item types. An additional filter may be imposed on item types in AVEVA P&ID, using a dialog accessed from the Engineering Explorer. The details of unassigned items can be viewed on 4.8: Properties Dialogs While an item is unassigned, no changes may be made to these details. The only exception is that a Symbol Name may be selected for an item that had no Symbol Name assigned to it in the database. This must be done when an unassigned item is inserted if it was not done beforehand. Once an unassigned item is inserted, it is no longer unassigned and is removed from the list of unassigned items. The properties of such an item may subsequently be edited as required. However, if the tag of such an item is changed, the link between the item on the drawing and the item in the database is broken. The item in the database is therefore regarded as being unassigned again, and the item on the drawing is regarded as a new engineering item. Note that unassigned items, on insertion, do not inherit drawing sheet attributes (see 6.10.23: Setting Labels to Inherit Values from Drawing Sheet Attributes).
Drawing Pipes and Connections Note: For projects developed using versions of AVEVA P&ID older than AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3, an upgrade of the pipes on the project drawings is required. See 2.1: Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects.
6.8.1
Drawing Pipes and Process Links Vessels and pumps etc. can be connected with pipes (branches). There are a number of default settings associated with drawing a pipe. The default pipe style, tracing style and end styles can be set, along with whether or not flow arrows, pipe breaks and tracing are to be included automatically. All these defaults can be set using the Pipeline Group and Signal Line Group of the Home Tab. Pipes can then be placed on the drawing using a button on the same toolbar (see 8.5.1: Drawing Pipes). These defaults can be changed while in the pipe creation process, and the next segment created responds to the new settings. When a pipe is drawn, the user will be prompted to identify the new pipe as a main pipe, a branch pipe or a trim pipe. If the pipe is a branch or trim pipe, the user must indicate the owning pipe or equipment.
•
Process Links Process links are branches that will not be labelled with a pipeline tag, for example connections to off-line instruments, and in some cases by-passes. These can be created in any pipe style by using the Process Links button on the pipes toolbar (see 8.5.3: Drawing Process Links). The settings on the Pipe toolbar also affect process links. A number of factors should be considered when drawing process links if data is to be exported to an XML file in the ISO 15926 schema format. For details, see Guidelines for Drawing Process Links. When pipes or process links cross, one of the pipes or process links is automatically broken. When a pipe crosses a process link, the process link is broken. If two pipes cross or two process links cross, the break priority (whether the horizontal or the vertical line is broken) is set on the Pipes Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. If automatic pipe breaking is off, a warning will be received each time a pipe or link is drawn over another. Instrument Process Links, also known as "Legacy" Process Links, are Process Links without the functionality introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3 (the PLK item type) and may be used if required. A specific style for this type of process link can be selected. Non-"Legacy" Process Links are drawn using the pipe item type (PMA) in the process link pipe style. In other words they will technically be branches between main pipes and offline items. They will therefore have all the functionality of pipes and may be labelled and edited in the same way.
•
Pipe Drawing Facilities The following facilities are also provided to help in drawing pipes and process links: •
The pipe style of an existing pipe can also be changed using facilities on the Pipe toolbar (see 8.5.4: Changing Pipe Styles).
•
Tracing can also be applied to existing pipes using a button on this toolbar. See 6.8.3: Tracing Lines for more details.
Pipes, and process links can be manually broken, i.e. if they cross vessels (see 8.5.8: Breaking Lines).
•
Pipes and branches may be merged into a single pipe/branch (see 8.5.9: Merging Pipes, Branches and Signal Lines).
•
Main pipes may be split into two separate main pipes (see 8.5.10: Splitting Pipes and Signal Lines).
•
A parts of a main pipe may be split off as a branch of that pipe (see 8.5.11: Splitting off Branches).
•
The flow of a pipe may be reversed (see 8.5.12: Reversing Pipe and Signal Line Flows).
•
Pipe segments may be added, merged and deleted (see 8.5.13: Adding Pipe and Signal Line Segments, 8.5.14: Merging Pipe Segments and 8.5.15: Deleting Pipe and Signal Line Segments).
•
The length of a pipe or process link may be changed (see 8.5.16: Changing the Length of Lines).
•
Elbows may be added to a pipe or process link (see 8.5.17: Adding Elbows to a Line).
•
Pipes can be converted into branches and branches converted into pipes (see 8.5.18: Changing Pipes to Branches and Branches to Pipes).
•
A different pipe can be selected as the owner of a branch (see 8.5.19: Changing the Owning Pipes of Branches).
Drawing Signal Lines The facilities of the Signal Line Group of the Home Tab. is used to draw signal lines. A basic set of signal lines is provided which complies with Instrument Society of America (I.S.A.) standards. The style, thickness and colour of signal lines are project definable. To add or edit signal line styles, use the Signal Styles Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. The default set consists of the following signal lines: •
Electrical Signal
•
Pneumatic Signal
•
Hydraulic Signal
•
Undefined Signal
•
Capillary Tube
•
Electromagnetic or Sonic Signal
•
Internal System Link (Software or Data Link)
The procedure for drawing signal lines is very similar to that for drawing pipes or process links. The signal line is drawn in the currently selected signal line style. Each section of line, from turning point to the next, is one entity. All signal lines refresh their blocks when an item is inserted, or the signal line is stretched. The 'current' signal line style can be set using the Signal Lines toolbar. The Signal Lines toolbar also includes a button which can be used to change the style of existing signal lines. See 8.5.7: Changing Signal Line Styles. The following facilities are also provided to help in drawing pipes and process links: •
Signal lines can be manually broken (see 8.5.8: Breaking Lines).
•
Sinal lines may be merged into a single pipe/branch (see 8.5.9: Merging Pipes, Branches and Signal Lines).
Signal lines may be split into two separate signal lines (see 8.5.10: Splitting Pipes and Signal Lines).
•
The flow of a signal line may be reversed (see 8.5.12: Reversing Pipe and Signal Line Flows).
•
Signal line segments may be added and deleted (see 8.5.13: Adding Pipe and Signal Line Segments and 8.5.15: Deleting Pipe and Signal Line Segments).
•
The length of a signal line may be changed (see 8.5.16: Changing the Length of Lines).
•
Elbows may be added to a signal line (see 8.5.17: Adding Elbows to a Line)
Tracing Lines Tracing may be added to a pipe as it is being drawn, depending on whether or not automatic pipe tracing is on. This is set in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab. Changing this setting affects pipes drawn subsequently and a pipe that is being drawn when the setting is changed. When switched On, tracing in the selected style will appear when a new pipe is drawn. The style of tracing is selected by using the Pipe Toolbar. Lines previously drawn with no tracing can have tracing applied using a button on the Pipe toolbar. See 8.5.5: Applying Tracing to Pipes. Inline fittings are automatically traced around. When a traced pipe is broken, the tracing is broken also. AVEVA P&ID is supplied with two tracing styles, STEAM and ELEC. To add or edit tracing styles, use the Tracing Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
6.8.4
Indicating Pipe Flow Flow direction is indicated graphically by flow arrows. These may be placed as a pipe is being drawn, depending on whether or not automatic flow arrows are on. This is set in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab. Changing this setting affects pipes drawn subsequently and a pipe that is being drawn when the setting is changed. If arrows need to be added to pipes that have already been drawn, they must be manually inserted (block name ARROWZ - see 8.4: Inserting Symbols). At present there is no built-in facility for rotating flow arrows so they must be rotated manually with a Rotate command. See 8.7.5: Rotating Drawing Objects. The actual direction of flow is only established when pipe labelling is carried out.
6.9
Selecting Multiple Drawing Objects The method used to select multiple drawing objects depends on whether or not the Entity selected is added to the current selection set checkbox on the Drawing Information – Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is checked. If the checkbox is unchecked (the default setting), to select multiple drawing objects, press the Shift key while selecting each of the objects. If the Shift key is not pressed when an object or objects are selected, any previously selected objects are de-selected. If the checkbox is checked, it is not necessary to press Shift in order to select multiple objects. Each object is added to the set of selected objects as it is selected. To remove objects from the set of selected objects, press Shift and select them.
General Information At any time during the drawing production cycle, AVEVA P&ID graphical items may have intelligent flow diagram data assigned to them by means of a label. See 8.6: Labelling Symbols and Pipes. Each label consists of a text string with an AVEVA P&ID item type that identifies the type of label it is. Labels are entered using Properties Dialogs, which can be initialised in many ways: •
Selecting the object, clicking the right mouse button and selecting Properties from the menu
•
Selecting the Label button from the AVEVA P&ID Properties toolbar, either with an object selected, or subsequently selecting an object.
•
Selecting an item in the Explorer, clicking the right mouse button and selecting Properties. This zooms to the item, selects it and displays the Properties dialog.
Note: The current properties of items can be viewed on the drawing page by hovering the cursor over the symbol in question. The labelling operation has many modes of behaviour depending on the entity/element or group of entities/elements being labelled. It also used to edit standard CAD software text. The command may operate automatically when a symbol is inserted. This is known as 'auto-labelling'. Auto-labelling for categories of items is switched on and off using the facilities in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab. Whether or not auto-labelling is on by default is set on the Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Labels are added on top of the graphics, thus allowing for maximum flexibility in graphical layout and revision of the drawing. This method allows movement, rotation etc. of AVEVA P&ID items to be unrestricted even after labelling has taken place. Labelling must exist for the engineering data to be validated and transferred to VPE Workbench. Every label has an Item Type which dictates its behaviour in a given situation. A full list of Item Types can be found in the section 9.3: AVEVA P&ID Item Types and Label Types. Label text is handled intelligently during rotation or reflection to ensure it retains its correct orientation. Any revisions to labels are immediately reflected in the displayed text. Quick rotation of labels is provided, by selecting the label, clicking the right mouse button and selecting rotate from the menu. The text of labels may either be in the default font select for the project, or in the text style assigned to the label type. Text styles are defined on the Text Styles Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, and assigned to label types using the Label Types Configuration Category. If the On-Line Data Validation checkbox on the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is checked, labels are validated as they are entered against project defined lists of allowable values. Labels of a given type must be unique on the drawing. For example two Instrument items cannot have the same label. For further information on validation, see 3.5: Validation. A facility is provided to bulk edit label fields. See 8.6.30: Globally Editing Labels.
Dynamic Labels Symbols can also be labelled with dynamic labels which consist of selected data from a VPE Workbench project database. See 6.16: Dynamic Labelling.
•
Labelling with Data from the P&ID Grid All of the data displayed in the tables in the right-hand window of the P&ID Data Grid may be used to label the drawing. In this way, the drawing may be labelled with data not available using the normal labelling procedures, i.e. with properties of items that are not included in the standard labels. For details of this procedure see 8.6.22: Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid. See also 8.6.23: Refreshing P&ID Data Grid Labels.
6.10.2
Setting Text Options The text of labels may either be in the default font select for the project, or in the text style assigned to the label type. Text styles are defined on the Text Styles Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, and assigned to label types using the Label Types Configuration Category. In addition, the height, justification and rotation settings of the text of a label are project configuration options, also set using the Label Types Configuration Category. These values can be overridden for individual labels using their Properties Dialogs.
6.10.3
Labelling/Editing Non-AVEVA P&ID Text In order to edit text that was inserted into a drawing before it became an AVEVA P&ID drawing, use the Labelling procedure. See 8.6.24: Editing Non-AVEVA P&ID Text.
6.10.4
Label Inheritance from Owning Pipes Instrument, inline equipment, valve and line fitting label data may be inherited from the label of the owning pipe. This functionality is configured using the Instruments - Settings Sub-Set, Equipment - Settings Sub-Set, Valves - Settings Sub-Set and Line Fittings Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
If it is not clear which pipe is the owning pipe, the List Item Details should be used to identify it. For details of setting items to inherit pipe data, and to switch this inheritance off if required, see 8.6.31: Setting Symbols to Inherit Label Data from a Manually Selected Pipe and 8.6.32: Switching off Label Data Inheritance from Pipes.
6.10.5
Labelling Equipment Equipment labels must be unique for each drawing produced, i.e., unique per sheet. An equipment label consists of up to either four or six parts, depending on project configuration: Block Function Prefix Type Number Suffix The names of the parts of the Equipment label can be changed but the order cannot. Block and Function are only used if the project is set to use 6 tag fields for equipment on the Equipment - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
If the Type or Number are left blank, the project defined null character will replace that field, e.g., V-?-2 or ?-100-2. If any null characters are present in equipment labels, the label is not checked for uniqueness against the other equipment labels on that drawing. Depending on the setup of the associated project configuration options, delimiters will appear automatically when the equipment label is placed, e.g., V, 1000, A will become V1000-A. Trailing delimiters will be automatically prevented if parts of the equipment label are not used. In addition to the requirement that each equipment label must be unique on the drawing, the project may be set to require that selected a field or a combination of fields in equipment labels also be unique.
•
Equipment With Trim Sometimes additional piping and attached items are supplied by the vendor as being associated with a vessel. These are known as vessel trim. They are attached directly to the vessel at both ends, or to the vessel and a process line. AVEVA P&ID associates trim to a vessel at the labelling stage. The default "Trim:" prefix, which signifies that trim labelling is present, may be altered on the Pipes - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. See 8.6.3: Labelling Equipment (with or without Trim).
•
Electrical Equipment Electrical equipment must be associated with an existing item of ordinary equipment. The procedure for labelling electrical equipment is identical to that for labelling ordinary equipment. See 8.6.4: Labelling Electrical Equipment.
•
Equipment Headers Equipment may be labelled with a separate equipment header. The header includes the equipment label plus any other required text as entered by the user. If an equipment label is changed, the equipment label in an equipment header is automatically updated. Whether or not equipment headers are to be underlined on P&IDs is specified on the Equipment - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. See 8.6.5 - Adding Equipment Headers..
6.10.6
Labelling General Valves The labelling of general valves, e.g., ball valves, gate valves, etc., involves the placement of a tag, and optionally, closure, valve code and size date. This tag data may be inherited from the label of the owning pipe, as set-up on the Pipes - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. If it is not clear which pipe is the owning pipe, the List Item Details procedure should be used to identify it. Valve codes can be applied to piping valves; but not to instrument valves. The valve code can be automatically placed according to the entries for the associated project configuration options set in the Valves - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. The code will automatically place itself in alignment with valve. A general valve can be labelled as a Special Piping Item (SPP) by the addition of four configurable SPP labels to the valve label.
Valve tags and SPP labels do not have to be unique; it is possible for the valve and special piping item to have the same tag number. When a valve is inserted into a pipe, the valve will inherit the size of the pipe into which it is inserted. The size of a valve in a process link may be manually increased, but not the size of a valve in a pipe. If general valves are unlabelled, no warnings or errors are issued on output. See 8.6.7: Labelling General Valves. See also 8.6.8: Labelling Port Valves.
•
Using Valve Pattern Labels The “patterns” facility is used to nominate a valve record, displayed on a drawing, to act as a representative for one or more line fitting item records, which are not displayed, but will be exported on output along with the displayed item. The AVEVA P&ID Item Type for a pattern label is XPR. It is a good idea to configure all pattern labels to be a set colour, in the Item Types – Standard Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. All users will then instantly recognize pattern labels on drawings that other users have worked on. Details of valve patterns are edited using the Valve - Patterns Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. The valve which has been physically drawn on the drawing is known as the substitute item in the pattern; it is expanded on output into all its components which are detailed in this pattern. An extra field is present in the output files. It is called Pattern Item and has an * (asterisk) in it if the item has been defined as a pattern item. To use the pattern facility, the pattern reference number is allocated when labelling any valve using the Valve Properties Dialogs. See 8.6.7: Labelling General Valves. All data is validated on output for the pattern items as if they had been drawn on the drawing.
6.10.7
Labelling Inline Fittings (Special Piping Items) When labelling inline fittings and SPPs (Special Piping Items) such as flame traps, duct fittings, expansion bellows, insulation, hoses and strainers, each part of the inline fitting or SPP label can be added or deleted independently of the other parts of the label. See 8.6.9: Labelling Inline Fittings. Other line labelling is covered elsewhere. See: 6.10.8: Labelling Pipe Destination Fittings 6.10.20: Labelling Pipe Flags 6.11.6: Adding Pipe Destination Text 6.11.5: Labelling Pipes with Breaks and Inline Breaks 6.11.4: Labelling Pipes with Reducers and Reducing Valves
6.10.8
Labelling Pipe Destination Fittings Pipe destination fittings (e.g. end caps) are only labelled with a size and a specification.
Labelling Port Valves Port valves are general (piping) and instrument valves that include distinct ports to which pipes and other symbols may be attached. Unlike the connectors on standard valves, these ports may be labelled, and an identifier and a size allocated to them. The size may be specified by the user, or derived automatically from connected items. Port data is included in exports from P&IDs. The List Item Details procedure can be used to quickly view the port id's and sizes of a port valve. Port valves are labelled in the same way as general and instrument valves (the main body of the valve in the case of instrument valves), except that additional fields are provided related to specifying the port sizes. See 8.6.8: Labelling Port Valves. For more information on "normal" valve labelling, see: 6.10.6: Labelling General Valves. 6.10.10: Labelling Instrument Valves (Control Valves).
6.10.10 Labelling Instrument Valves (Control Valves) The main body of the valve and/or the balloon can be labelled. An error will be received on output if the balloon label is not present. Instrument valve label data may be inherited from the label of the owning pipe, as set-up on the Pipes - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. If it is not clear which pipe is the owning pipe, the List Item Details procedure should be used to identify it. When labelling the main body of the valve, use the same labelling procedure as for general valves except that the valve code does not apply. See 8.6.7: Labelling General Valves. See also 8.6.8: Labelling Port Valves. When labelling the balloon, use the same labelling procedure as for instruments. See 8.6.12: Labelling General Instruments. Any changes to the instrument balloon label positions in the project configuration file will only take effect if labels are removed and replaced. If a labelled control valve is copied, all labelling is removed except the Item Type reference in the balloon e.g., FT. A descriptor can be included in the label. Descriptors are used within VPE Workbench when assigning VPE Workbench item types to incoming instruments from AVEVA P&ID. For example, a descriptor of Vortex, Magnetic Flow, Coriolis, or Turbine could be used to specifically differentiate between different types of flow transmitters. A restricted choice of item types is available when the descriptor for the instrument is completed. Instrument label balloons can be moved independently from the instrument. There is also a facility to bulk edit instrument labels. See 8.6.30: Globally Editing Labels.
6.10.11 Labelling General Instruments This category of symbol includes instrument indicators with or without alarms, instrument valve balloons, instruments with I/P converters, and flow elements. General information on the principles of labelling general instruments is given below. Instrument label data may be inherited from the label of the owning pipe, as set-up on the Pipes - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. If it is not clear which pipe is the owning pipe, the List Item Details procedure should be used to identify it. For instructions on labelling general instruments, see 8.6.12: Labelling General Instruments. There is also a facility to bulk edit instrument labels. See 8.6.30: Globally Editing Labels.
•
Label Format An instrument label consists of up to either four or six parts, depending on project configuration: Block Function Prefix Type Number Suffix The names of the parts of the instrument label can be changed but the order cannot. Block and Function are only used if the project is set to use 6 tag fields for instruments on the Instrument - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
•
Label Positioning The default instrument label positioning is set in the Instrument Label Positions section of the Instruments - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. If different label positions are needed for different types of instrument balloons, the default positioning can be overridden by selecting the Instrument Label Positional data option in the List of Values Configuration Category.
•
Descriptors A descriptor can be included in the label. Descriptors are used within VPE Workbench when assigning VPE Workbench item types to incoming instruments from AVEVA P&ID. For example, a descriptor of Vortex, Magnetic Flow, Coriolis, or Turbine could be used to specifically differentiate between different types of flow transmitters. A restricted choice of item types is available when the descriptor for the instrument is completed.
•
Label Uniqueness Each instrument label must be unique on the drawing. In addition, the project may be set to require that selected fields or combination of fields in instrument labels must also be unique. Adding Alarm Labels If the item is a remote instrument, a prompt will be received to add up to four alarm labels, e.g., H - high and L - Low.
Automatic Suffix Assignment for Duplicate Instrument Tags Instruments can be assigned the same tag number, provided that separate suffixes are attached to the tag number of each instrument. The system automatically prompts for the assignation of these suffixes.
•
Labelling Instruments with I/P Convertors The presence of an I/P convertor on an instrument precludes the entry of a descriptor label.
•
Effects of Import Allowed or Disallowed If the project configuration has been set in the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program (using the Loop numbers from VPE Workbench checkbox on the Instruments - Labels SubSet) to allow import of loop numbers etc., the only visible difference when labelling instruments is that a Prefix, Loop number or Suffix (or equivalent field names) cannot be entered. They will appear greyed out in the Properties Dialogs. If the import of loop numbers is disallowed, a prompt will be received to enter a Prefix, Loop Number and Suffix when labelling instruments. Refer to 7.1: Exporting Data to an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database for information on what happens when externally generated loop numbers and I/O information is imported into AVEVA P&ID.
•
Flow Elements The flow element symbol category typically includes orifice plates, flow restrictions, venturi, flow straighteners and turbine meters. They all have label balloons attached. It is not possible to pick the flow element itself for labelling - the balloon must be chosen. Labelling is then as for ordinary instruments. No alarm labels are permitted. There are no associated project configuration options. For information on further aspects of labelling instruments see 6.10.12: Labelling General Instruments - Using Instrument Pattern Labels and 6.10.13: Labelling General Instruments Panel Reference Labels.
•
Instrument Loops Instrument loops may be defined, to which instruments may subsequently be added. See Creating Instrument Loops for details. Instruments in a loop can inherit properties from the loop they are assigned to, as set using in the Instruments - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
6.10.12 Labelling General Instruments - Using Instrument Pattern Labels The "patterns" facility is used to nominate an instrument record, displayed on a drawing, to act as a representative for further instrument records, which are not displayed, but will be exported on output along with the displayed item. A simple example of this is a Flow Indicator (FI) which could consist of the displayed Flow Indicator (FI) itself, which also represents a Flow Transmitter (FT) and a Flow Element (FE).
The AVEVA P&ID Item Type for a pattern label is XPR. It is a good idea to configure all pattern labels to be a set colour, in the Item Types - Standard Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. All users will then instantly recognize pattern labels on drawings that other users have worked on. Details of patterns are edited using the Instruments - Patterns Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. The instrument which has been physically drawn on the drawing is known as the substitute item in the pattern; it is expanded on output into all its components which are detailed in this pattern. An extra field is present in the output files. It is called Pattern Item and has an * (asterisk) in it if the item has been defined as a pattern item. To use the pattern facility, the pattern reference number is allocated when labelling any instrument (including remote and instrument valves) using the Instrument Balloon Properties Dialogs. See 8.6.12: Labelling General Instruments. A pattern can only be created for instruments with the same tag/loop number. This is because the tag/loop number is inherited from the substitute item. Suffixes must be used correctly to distinguish between identically labelled instruments. The Loop Number is read from the drawing and if no loop number has been assigned, a dummy tag, e.g., [234]34, will be exported. The grid reference for all pattern items is the same as for the substitute item. If VPE Workbench outputs any tag numbers (loop numbers) back to the drawing via the bidirectional link, data on pattern instruments is automatically excluded from the transfer as the instruments do not physically exist on the drawing.
All data is validated on output for the pattern items as if they had been drawn on the drawing.
6.10.13 Labelling General Instruments - Panel Reference Labels Panel Reference Labels are used when an instrument or instrument valve is to be panel mounted rather than, for example, rack or field-mounted. Many instruments/equipment items can be assigned to one panel reference. This instrument/panel association is exported to VPE Workbench. The panel reference consists of a Prefix, Type, Loop Number and Suffix. (The panel type can be selected as instrument or equipment type.) The four components of the label are positioned automatically according to the associated project configuration options. The panel reference is added when labelling the instrument. See 8.6.12: Labelling General Instruments.
6.10.14 Labelling System I/O Connections, Interlocks and Logic Boxes System I/O Connections, Interlocks and Logic Boxes are labelled with an item reference, but with no other data. Duplicate labels are permitted. See 8.6.13: Labelling System I/O Connections, Interlocks and Logic Boxes.
6.10.15 Labelling I/O Rockets I/O Rockets are used to assign single or multiple I/O (input/output) data against instruments or equipment. When I/O rockets are being used, the I/O data entered in VPE Workbench for those tagged items passes back onto the P&ID in a read-only form when AVEVA P&ID is initialised. I/O rockets can either be associated with an instrument, or can themselves be tagged as instruments. See 8.6.14: Labelling I/O Rockets.
•
Label Positioning The default instrument label positioning is set in the Instrument Label Positions section of the Instruments - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. The default positioning can be overridden by selecting the Instrument Label Positional data option in the List of Values Configuration Category.
•
Imported I/O Data There is no project configuration option to determine whether or not I/O rockets will import I/ O address data from an external source. The data, if available, is automatically imported when AVEVA P&ID is initialised. See 7.1: Exporting Data to an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database.
6.10.16 Labelling Nozzles Nozzles are placed on vessels and on other items of equipment. When labelling a nozzle, a nozzle tag must be placed. If no nozzle size label is applied and a pipe is attached to the nozzle, the nozzle will inherit the pipe size on output. The nozzle may have a different size to the pipe and hence be an enlarging or reducing nozzle.
Duplicate nozzle labels are not permitted on a vessel. An error message is displayed if this is attempted. Duplicate nozzles are permitted on different vessels, i.e., vessel V-100 and vessel V-200 may both have a nozzle labelled N1. If warnings about nozzles which have labels missing are not required when performing an output, ensure that the Nozzle error balloon placement checkbox on the Label Types Configuration Category on the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is checked. If nozzle sizes are to cascaded onto connecting pipes, check the Cascade Nozzle to Pipe checkbox on the Nozzles - Settings Sub-Set . To connect a nozzle to a pipe, so that sizes can be cascaded, see 8.5.20: Connecting Pipes to Nozzles and Equipment. To disconnect a nozzle from a pipe if cascading is not required for a particular pipe and nozzle, see 8.5.21: Disconnecting Pipes from Nozzles and Equipment If nozzles are to be labelled using an automatically incrementing number, check the Increment Nozzle Sequence checkbox on the Nozzles - Labels Sub-Set. If nozzles labels are to automatically include a prefix, enter this prefix in the Nozzle Prefix field on the Nozzles - Labels Sub-Set. See 8.6.6: Labelling Nozzles.
6.10.17 Labelling Miscellaneous Items Miscellaneous items include items such as Vessel Jackets. These cannot be labelled using the normal labelling facilities. It is possible however to attach notes to them. See 8.6.29: Adding Notes to Items.
6.10.18 Labelling Assemblies Graphical assemblies are reduced to their component AVEVA P&ID items on insertion. Items in an assembly should be labelled as individual items.
6.10.19 Labelling Clouds Clouds cannot be directly labelled using the normal labelling facilities, nor can they have notes added. Revision triangles should be inserted near the clouds (see 8.4: Inserting Symbols). The revision triangles should be then labelled using. See 8.6.15: Labelling Revision Triangles.
6.10.20 Labelling Pipe Flags Labelling Pipe Flags (i.e. off-sheet or page connectors) with their correct destination drawing number is crucial for the correct resolution of pipes across multiple P&IDs. If using sheet numbers they must be included as part of the pipe flag label. Pipe flags may be labelled from a list of drawings on which valid and available source/ destination pipe flags are located. If labelled in this way, a pipe flag may be hyperlinked, i.e. Ctrl-clicking on it, or selecting the Open Target Drawing option from the flag's right-click menu, will open the drawing on which connected pipe flag is located. Pipe flag labels can be deleted by selecting the Delete option from The Drawing Page menu for the label. If a pipe flag is to be used as well as pipe destination text, the pipe destination text must be used to record the actual destination. A note should be entered in the flag to refer to the pipe destination text. If an attempt is made to label the pipe flag with the destination as well as
using pipe destination text, there will be two recorded destinations, leading to confusion when data is output. Pipe flags can also be labelled with the grid reference of the pipe flag on the source/ destination drawing. See 8.6.18: Labelling and Connecting Pipe Flags.
6.10.21 Labelling Revision Triangles The labelling procedure can be used to place the revision text associated with the revision triangles. When a revision triangle is labelled, it is automatically labelled with a letter or number which is a reference to the revision text. This number can be changed if required. If grid referencing is on, a grid reference can be placed when a triangle is inserted, to show the location of the actual change. This grid reference is not maintained as the drawing is rearranged. Revision triangle data cannot be edited once it has been placed. The revision number inside the triangle is associated with the triangle and neither can be deleted separately. Instead, they must be deleted as a single item by selecting the Delete option from The Drawing Page or Engineering Explorer menus for the item. Revision text is also be deleted as a single item. If an attempt is made to label two revision triangles with the same revision number/letter, or if the revision number, reviser and description are not completed, an error message will be received. The Label offset from symbol origin fields in the Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program determine the position of the automatic revision label relative to the triangle symbol's insertion point. See 8.6.15: Labelling Revision Triangles.
6.10.22 Setting Properties Sheet fields to inherit previously entered values A project can be configured so that a value entered in a field in a Properties dialog is "inherited" by the same field when that Properties dialog is accessed again when labelling another, previously unlabelled, item of that type. For example, the functionality is switched on for equipment Prefix field, and an equipment item is labelled with a value of "20". The next time an equipment item is labelled for the first time, when the Properties dialog for this item is opened, the Prefix field will automatically be completed with the value "20". This can be replaced by another value if required. This new value will then be the "inherited" value for the equipment Prefix field. Select the Property dialog fields to which this function is applied using the Pipes - Settings Sub-Set, Instruments - Settings Sub-Set, Equipment - Settings Sub-Set, Valves - Settings Sub-Set and Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
6.10.23 Setting Labels to Inherit Values from Drawing Sheet Attributes The values of labels may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on the Advanced Drawing Properties dialog. The values entered for these sheet attributes may be values that are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design area. The inheritance facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The labels of items that do not
share these common values may subsequently be edited manually using their properties sheets. Values inherited from sheet attributes can be hidden, i.e. though they are part of labels and will be included in any exports of P&ID data, they are not displayed on P&IDs. Whether or not a value is hidden is set up on a field-by-field basis. Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings Sub-Set. Note that sheet attribute fields can be linked to lists of values, so that only values from those lists can be entered into the sheet attribute fields. This is also set up using the Drawing Information – Settings Sub-Set. Establish inheritance between item label and sheet attribute fields, and specify whether or not inherited values are to be hidden using the Pipes - Settings Sub-Set, Instruments Settings Sub-Set, Equipment - Settings Sub-Set, Valves - Settings Sub-Set and Line Fittings Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Note that if an instrument or valve label is set to inherit from the owning pipe, this takes priority over sheet attribute inheritance. Also note that unassigned P&ID Database items and unassigned VPE Workbench items, on insertion, do not inherit drawing sheet attributes. See Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Items and 6.7: Inserting Unassigned VPE Workbench Items.
•
Changing Inherited Values The following points should be considered when editing inherited values both at drawing sheet and item level: •
When sheet attribute inheritance is first activated, any existing pipe values will not be overwritten with sheet attribute values. Existing values for non-pipe labels will be overwritten. All null values for all item labels will be overwritten.
•
If a sheet attribute value is changed, all pipe label values that match the old attribute value are set to the new attribute value, regardless of whether that value was inherited or entered manually. For example, if the design area sheet attribute is changed from A to B, all pipe label fields set to inherit from this sheet attribute that were set to A are also changed to B.
•
If a sheet attribute value is changed, all non-pipe label values are changed to the new value, as long as that value was inherited. If the value was entered manually, it will not be subsequently affected by changes to sheet attribute values. To re-establish inheritance for a non-pipe label that has been changed manually, delete the label and re-label the item.
•
If an item label field is re-set after inheritance to inherit from a different sheet attribute field, any existing inherited values will behave as if the sheet attribute value had simply been changed, as described above.
•
All null values in fields that are set to inherit from sheet attributes will be updated when sheet attribute values are changed.
•
If a label field that must be populated from a list of valid values is set to inherit from a drawing sheet attribute field, that drawing sheet attribute field must also be populated from that same list of values.
•
If a sheet attribute value that was set to be hidden is changed, those items that were labelled with the previous value will still have that part of their labels hidden, even though it is no longer an inherited value. To "unhide" that part of their labels, open the Properties dialog for each item andpress the OK button.
6.10.24 Inserting Symbols with Labels Equipment and Inline Equipment labels may automatically have a symbol placed with them when they are inserted. For example, they may be placed in a box, or in a flag symbol. Create the symbols required for this purpose in the normal way using AutoCAD. Ensure that the symbol is placed in the \PMETSYM or \PIMPSYM project symbol directory as appropriate. This functionality is switched on and off for each item category, the required symbols selected, and the offsets from the labels specified using the Equipment - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. See 8.6.3: Labelling Equipment (with or without Trim).
6.10.25 Automatic Tagging The tags of valves and the number components of pipe, instrument and equipment tags may be set to be completed automatically. Note: If this facility is in used, valve tags and the number fields of pipe, instrument and equipment tags should not be set to (see 6.10.23: Setting Labels to Inherit Values from Drawing Sheet Attributes). This facility is turned on when the format for automatic valve tags is defined using thePipes - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Set, Instruments - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Set, Equipment - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Set, Valves - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. If automatic tagging is in use for pipe, instrument and equipment tags, the number component of such items is automatically completed with an automatically incrementing number in a format defined using the above panes. Automatic valve tags may also include an automatically incremented number. The automatically incremented number for a type of item may be reset to 0 for a project using a button on the relevant AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program pane. Automatic valve tags may include user-defined attributes of valves, as selected when the tag format is defined. The available properties for the format are defined in a DataSet which must be set up for this purpose (see Defining Valve Tag Properties for Automatic Valve Tagging). Automatic valve tags may also include selected attributes from owner pipes. If the facility is in use, the relevant fields on the Properties Dialogs are automatically completed when items are labelled. These values may be replaced by manual entry if required. Existing items that were not automatically labelled may be re-labelled with tags in the automatic tag format. See 8.6.26: Replacing Tags with Tags in the Automatic Tag Format. Note that items that were automatically labelled and then manually changed are not relabelled by this procedure.
General Information Pipes, branches, trim pipes, reducers and breaks can all be labelled. See 8.6: Labelling Symbols and Pipes. Several pipe labels may be placed on one pipe by a single use of this command. It is not possible to label across equipment when labelling a pipe. Labels are entered using Properties Dialogs. The command may operate automatically when a pipe is drawn. This is known as autolabelling'. Auto-labelling for pipes is switched on and off using the facilities in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab. Whether or not auto-labelling is on by default is set on the Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Facilities are provided to check the association between an existing label and a pipe, if this is not clear on the drawing. See 8.9.4: Show Associations between Items. The pipe with which a pipe label is associated can be changed if required. See 8.6.28: Changing the Association of a Pipe Label. Note: The current properties of items can be viewed on the drawing page by hovering the cursor over the symbol in question.
•
Pipe Label Fields A pipe label consists of the data entered into between three and fifteen fields, depending on the project configuration (set using the Pipes - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program). While the format of a label is fixed, it is possible to limit the number of fields that are actually displayed on a drawing by switching off fixed label formatting (see 6.11.2: Label Display Options).
•
Reformatting Existing Pipe Labels If the project configuration option dictating the order and/or number of the pipe label fields is altered, existing labels are reformatted automatically. This takes place when AVEVA P&ID is next initialised. Fields that have been added to the project configuration are populated with the default null character. Fields that have been removed from the project configuration are deleted.
Nodes When a pipe is labelled, 'nodes' are placed at the start and end of each pipe. All the pipe data is held at the start node.
At any time, a pipe route may be changed by moving these nodes. Revision time is minimised, as only the nodes need be moved and not whole associations of pipes, equipment etc. All pipe label field data is held on the start node.
•
Main Pipe Labels In the case of pipes that have multiple labels, one of these labels may be set as the "main pipe label". See 8.6.27: Setting a Pipe Label as the Main Label. By default, the properties of the pipe at the start node are presented as the "main" properties of the pipe on export. This option sets the label of another part of the pipe, which may be more representative of the properties of the pipe as a whole, to be the "main" properties. The main pipe label is displayed in a different colour on the P&ID, and the part of the pipe that has been labelled as the "main" pipe label is displayed at the top of the hierarchy of a pipe and its branches in the Engineering Explorer. If no main pipe label has been set, the pipe start node properties assume this position by default.
•
Reducer and Other Pipe Feature Labels In addition to the labels of the pipes themselves, reducers and inline breaks can be labelled. Examples of inline breaks include Specification Changes, Area Breaks, Insulation Breaks, Trace Breaks and Paint Breaks.
•
Dynamic Labels Pipes can also be labelled with dynamic labels that consist of selected data from a VPE Workbench project database. See 6.16: Dynamic Labelling.
•
Labelling with Data from the P&ID Grid All of the data displayed in the tables in the right-hand window of the P&ID Data Grid may be used to label the drawing. In this way, the drawing may be labelled with data not available using the normal labelling procedures, i.e. with properties of items that are not included in the standard labels. For details of this procedure see 8.6.22: Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid. See also 8.6.23: Refreshing P&ID Data Grid Labels.
Label Uniqueness Each pipe label must be unique on the drawing. In addition, the project may be set to require that selected fields or combination of fields in pipe labels must also be unique.
•
Associated Project Configuration Options The boilerplate text labelling the three project definable fields which appear on the pipe labelling Properties dialog are specified in the Pipes - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Pipe label format is also established in this pane. The character used as the field delimiter in pipe labels is specified in the Delimiter field. If this delimiter is to follow the area code field, the Delimiter after area field checkbox must be checked, otherwise the size of the space to be left after the area code field must be specified in the Number of characters field. The label fields which are to be checked for uniqueness are specified in the Unique Validation field.
6.11.2 •
Label Display Options Text Options The text of labels may either be in the default font select for the project, or in the text style assigned to the label type. Text styles are defined on the Text Styles Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, and assigned to label types using the Label Types Configuration Category. In addition, the height, justification and rotation settings of the text of a label are project configuration options, also set using the Label Types Configuration Category. These values can be overridden for individual labels using their Properties Dialogs.
•
Non-Standard (Single Property) Label Format Although the format of a label is fixed by the project configuration, it is possible to specify which part of a label is actually displayed on a drawing. This is achieved by selecting single property label formatting while labelling a pipe. For example, it may be required to have displayed only the specification part or only the number part of a label. It is possible to combine both fixed and non-standard label format on the same pipe, if multiple labels are applied. If fixed label formatting is to be used, the Fixed Pipe Label Format checkbox on the Pipes Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program must be checked. This controls the default setting of the Pipe Label Type field in the Pipeline Properties Dialogs. Note: Once a format has been chosen and the pipe label placed on the drawing, the format cannot be modified. The label must be deleted and reapplied.
Split Label Format Split Label Formatting is the placing of some fields of a pipe label above the pipe and the remainder below the pipe. Split Label Formatting is controlled by three associated project configuration options as discussed below.
The Split After Field field on the Pipes - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is used to select which field in the pipe format to split on. The number entered here determines how many fields to count from the left of the pipe label before the split occurs. Note: Do not confuse these numbers with the order numbers allocated to fields in the project configuration for pipe labels. For example, if the entry is 3, the pipe label will display with the first 3 fields above the pipe, and the remaining fields below it. When split label formatting is turned on, the Y offset above line and Y offset below line fields are responsible for setting the offset from the label point picked when placing the pipe label. If the point picked is directly on the pipe, the Y offset distances are equal and the text justification for the pipe label is set to MC (Middle Centre), the pipe label will appear as shown above.
Note: The pipe label justification is BC (Bottom Centre) by default in the project configuration file. It is possible to change the pipe label display from single label display to split pipe label display or vice versa. Note: If the configuration changes from single pipe label display to split pipe label display, the split pipe label configuration options are applied using the insertion point and display attributes of the original single pipe label as a reference. It is therefore possible that when the original single pipe label is too far from the pipe, the second pipe label may overlap the pipe and a manual displacement of the split pipe label needs to take place.
•
Null Characters The default null character (e.g. ?) can be selected for all or for specific pipe label fields, if pipe data is not yet available. The label will then appear with the null character as defined by the project configuration. This is the only application of this facility. For example, if the null character were used for each digit of the area number, pipe label 2"SW-2001-S1A-5L would appear as 2"-SW-??01-S1A-5L. Labelling pipes with null characters and then loading them into VPE Workbench has implications for uniqueness of pipe labels, which need to be considered. For further information, refer to AVEVA P&ID Technical Support.
6.11.3
Labelling Pipes Any number of labels can be placed on a pipe. Each segment of a pipe may be labelled, and pipe labels can be placed on either side of reducers and breaks as required. All or a part of a pipe label can be placed as required. Changes made to pipe properties are automatically reflected by all the labels of the pipe. For example, changes to the pipe size are automatically cascaded along the pipe flow, updating all pipe labels upstream and downstream. Reducer and inline break properties and labels are also automatically updated (see 6.11.4: Labelling Pipes with Reducers and Reducing Valves and 6.11.5: Labelling Pipes with Breaks and Inline Breaks for more information). Nozzle sizes may automatically be cascaded onto connected pipes, depending on the setting of the Cascade Nozzle to Pipe checkbox on the Nozzles - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Owned branches are not affected by size changes of parent pipes.
•
Trim Pipes A trim pipe is a pipe which forms part of a vessel's associated group of elements. The pipe may or may not be visibly connected to the vessel with which it is to be associated, and can be created in any pipe style. The vessel must already be labelled with a trim label before proceeding with the trim pipework. Trim pipes do not receive a full pipe label, simply a size, but inherit their other fields from the Trim label. A vessel can have multiple trim labels with trim pipes associated to each. The Trim Label Prefix field on the Pipes - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is used to specify the text prefix to the trim identifier in a trim label. Whenever a trim label is created on a vessel, this word appears in front of the main label.
Pipe Groups Pipes may be added to a pipe group created reporting purposes (see Creating Pipe Groups). If a pipe has been added to a group, details of the group are added to the properties of the pipe. The pipe groups that may be created are specified in a DataSet (see Defining the Pipe Groups DataSet) which is defined using the User Defined Attributes - DataSet Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
6.11.4
Labelling Pipes with Reducers and Reducing Valves See 8.6.19: Labelling Reducers and 8.6.7: Labelling General Valves. If a reducer or reducing valve is inserted into a labelled pipe, both upstream and downstream sizes are inherited from the label of the pipe segment that the symbol was inserted into. The properties of the reducer or reducing valve must then be edited so that the upstream and downstream sizes are different. If reducer upstream and downstream pipe sizes are identical, and error message is displayed. Upstream and downstream sizes may be the same for reducing valves. If the size properties of a reducer or reducing valves are changed, the size of the pipe is automatically changed as appropriate. For example, if the upstream size of a reducer is changed, the size of the pipe upstream from the reducer is also changed to reflect this. If there was a reducer upstream of the upstream pipe segment, its downstream size property would be automatically changed as well. In the same way, changes made to the size properties of a pipe segment are automatically applied to reducers and reducing valves at either end of that segment. For example, if the size of a pipe segment downstream of a reducer is changed, the downstream size property of that reducer is also changed to reflect this. If a reducer or reducing valve is deleted, the pipe segment that the symbol was inserted into adopts the size of the segment that was upstream of the deleted symbol.
6.11.5
Labelling Pipes with Breaks and Inline Breaks See 8.6.20: Labelling Breaks and Inline Breaks. Breaks can exist either at pipe boundaries or inline, within a pipe run. A Break signifies a change in specification, area, insulation or tracing from one pipe, or one segment of a pipe, to the next. For breaks at pipe boundaries, there will be a different line number on each side of the break. An inline break is within a pipe, and therefore the pipe number is the same either side of the break. A single break symbol can be labelled with multiple labels, signifying that the symbol represents more than one type of break, for example, where a trace break and an insulation break occur at the same point.
•
Labelling Breaks The procedure for labelling inline breaks and breaks at pipe boundaries is the same.
The upstream and downstream values of a break are initially blank. They are not inherited from the labels of the pipe segments on either side of the break. As required, enter the upstream and downstream values of the break to reflect the change(s) in properties from one side of the break to the other. Only enter the values for those properties that are different. The entered upstream and downstream values must be different. Values that are left blank will not label the break. If the properties of a break are changed, the properties of the pipe are automatically changed as appropriate. For example, if the upstream area property of a break is changed, the area property of the pipe upstream from the break is also changed to reflect this. If there was a break upstream of the upstream pipe segment, its downstream area property would be automatically changed as well. In the same way, changes made to the properties of a pipe segment are automatically applied to breaks at either end of that segment. For example, if the area of a pipe segment downstream of a break is changed, the downstream area property of that break is also changed to reflect this. Note that deleting a break symbol will not result in the change in properties being removed. Breaks are indicators of such changes only (unlike reducers).
6.11.6
Adding Pipe Destination Text Pipe destination text may be added only to pipes which are already labelled. This type of text can be used for situations such as labelling pipes which end in mid-air. For example, a pipe expelling steam may be labelled, 'To Atmos'. Destination text may also be placed on a start node, if desired. It should be noted that when VPE Workbench is being used, destination text must be limited to 32 characters. An automatic carriage return is placed at the end of each line of text and this should be included when counting how many characters have been used. If a pipe flag is to be used as well as pipe destination text, the pipe destination text must be used to record the actual destination. A note should be entered in the flag to refer to the pipe destination text. If an attempt is made to label the pipe flag with the destination as well as using pipe destination text, there will be two recorded destinations, leading to confusion when data is output. See 8.6.21: Adding Pipe Destination Text.
6.11.7
Modifying Pipe Label Fields and Cascading Changes Through a Pipe Run Cascading preserves data consistency across pipe branch networks and over pipe boundaries. When the properties of parent pipe label are edited, any changes to these properties may immediately be reflected in the labelling of the branches off that pipe. If required, cascading to pipe branches may be disabled for specified fields on the Pipes Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Note however that fields specified for unique validation (see 6.13.3: Label Uniqueness Validation) will still be cascaded regardless of these settings. Changes of size or spec are also cascaded onto other pipes which are butted end-on to the edited branches, with spec break and reducer, and reducing valves positions being taken
into account. Reducers and reducing valves behave intelligently throughout changes that affect pipe sizes. An alert box appears asking the users whether they wish to cascade the data change onto the highlighted pipe. If the user accepts by selecting 'OK', the changes cascade through. Changes to pipe properties can also be propagated to other pipes connected via linked pipe flags. See Propagating Changes to Pipe Properties.
6.11.8
Setting Properties Sheet fields to inherit previously entered values A project can be configured so that a value entered in a field in a Properties dialog is "inherited" by the same field when that Properties dialog is accessed again when labelling another, previously unlabelled, item of that type. For example, the functionality is switched on for equipment Prefix field, and an equipment item is labelled with a value of "20". The next time an equipment item is labelled for the first time, when the Properties dialog for this item is opened, the Prefix field will automatically be completed with the value "20". This can be replaced by another value if required. This new value will then be the "inherited" value for the equipment Prefix field. Select the Property dialog fields to which this function is applied using the Pipes - Settings Sub-Set, Instruments - Settings Sub-Set, Equipment - Settings Sub-Set, Valves - Settings Sub-Set and Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
6.11.9
Setting Labels to Inherit Values from Drawing Sheet Attributes The values of labels may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on the Advanced Drawing Properties dialog. The values entered for these sheet attributes may be values that are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design area. The inheritance facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The labels of items that do not share these common values may subsequently be edited manually using their properties sheets. Values inherited from sheet attributes can be hidden, i.e. though they are part of labels and will be included in any exports of P&ID data, they are not displayed on P&IDs. Whether or not a value is hidden is set up on a field-by-field basis. Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings Sub-Set. Note that sheet attribute fields can be linked to lists of values, so that only values from those lists can be entered into the sheet attribute fields. This is also set up using the Drawing Information – Settings pane. Establish inheritance between item label and sheet attribute fields, and specify whether or not inherited values are to be hidden using the Pipes - Settings Sub-Set, Instruments Settings Sub-Set, Equipment - Settings Sub-Set, Valves - Settings Sub-Set and Line Fittings Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Note that if an instrument or valve label is set to inherit from the owning pipe, this takes priority over sheet attribute inheritance. Also note that unassigned items, on insertion, do not inherit drawing sheet attributes. See 6.7: Inserting Unassigned VPE Workbench Items.
Changing Inherited Values The following points should be considered when editing inherited values both at drawing sheet and item level: •
When sheet attribute inheritance is first activated, any existing pipe values will not be overwritten with sheet attribute values. Existing values for non-pipe labels will be overwritten. All null values for all item labels will be overwritten.
•
If a sheet attribute value is changed, all pipe label values that match the old attribute value are set to the new attribute value, regardless of whether that value was inherited or entered manually. For example, if the design area sheet attribute is changed from A to B, all pipe label fields set to inherit from this sheet attribute that were set to A are also changed to B.
•
If a sheet attribute value is changed, non-pipe label values are not changed to the new value, whether or not they were inherited. Changes to sheet attribute values only affect items labelled subsequently.To re-establish inheritance for a non-pipe label that has been changed manually, delete the label and re-label the item.
•
If an item label field is re-set after inheritance to inherit from a different sheet attribute field, any existing inherited values will behave as if the sheet attribute value had simply been changed, as described above.
•
All null values in fields that are set to inherit from sheet attributes will be updated when sheet attribute values are changed.
•
If a label field that must be populated from a list of valid values is set to inherit from a drawing sheet attribute field, that drawing sheet attribute field must also be populated from that same list of values.
•
If a sheet attribute value that was set to be hidden is changed, those items that were labelled with the previous value will still have that part of their labels hidden, even though it is no longer an inherited value. To "unhide" that part of their labels, open the Properties dialog for each item and press the OK button.
6.11.10 Inserting Symbols with Labels Pipe labels may automatically have a symbol placed with them when they are inserted. For example, they may be placed in a box, or in a flag symbol. Create the symbols required for this purpose in the normal way using AutoCAD. Ensure that the symbol is placed in the \PMETSYM or \PIMPSYM project symbol directory as appropriate. This functionality is switched on and off for each item category, the required symbols selected, and the offsets from the labels specified using the Pipes - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. See 8.6.17: Labelling Pipes.
6.11.11 Automatic Tagging The tags of valves and the number components of pipe, instrument and equipment tags may be set to be completed automatically. Note: If this facility is in used, valve tags and the number fields of pipe, instrument and equipment tags should not be set to (see 6.10.23: Setting Labels to Inherit Values from Drawing Sheet Attributes).
This facility is turned on when the format for automatic valve tags is defined using thePipes - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Set, Instruments - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Set, Equipment - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Set, Valves - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. If automatic tagging is in use for pipe, instrument and equipment tags, the number component of such items is automatically completed with an automatically incrementing number in a format defined using the above panes. Automatic valve tags may also include an automatically incremented number. The automatically incremented number for a type of item may be reset to 0 for a project using a button on the relevant AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program pane. Automatic valve tags may include user-defined attributes of valves, as selected when the tag format is defined. The available properties for the format are defined in a DataSet which must be set up for this purpose (see Defining Valve Tag Properties for Automatic Valve Tagging). Automatic valve tags may also include selected attributes from owner pipes. If the facility is in use, the relevant fields on the Properties Dialogs are automatically completed when items are labelled. These values may be replaced by manual entry if required. Existing items that were not automatically labelled may be re-labelled with tags in the automatic tag format. See 8.6.26: Replacing Tags with Tags in the Automatic Tag Format. Note that items that were automatically labelled and then manually changed are not relabelled by this procedure.
Adding User-Defined Attributes User-defined Attributes (UDAs) can be defined in two ways: •
Attributes may be added to symbols and pipes using the standard AutoCAD Attribute Definition dialog, accessed from the Symbol Editor. Lists of valid values for these attributes can then be selected using the User Defined Attributes - UDA List of Values Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. To remove all such UDAs from selected symbols on a drawing, see 8.6.34: Removing UDAs from Symbols.
•
DataSet UDAs are groups of attributes that are set up for types of items or symbols that meet user-defined criteria. They are defined using the User Defined Attributes DataSet Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
Once defined, user-defined attribute values can be entered using the AVEVA P&ID Properties Dialogs. They will be grouped under a node called User Defined Attributes.
Items on a drawing may be labelled with these values is required. See 8.6.33: Labelling Items with UDAs. Note: If using the first method described above, a new attribute has been defined for a symbol of a type which already has labelled instances on a drawing, to add the new attribute to the labels of these symbols, enter UDAS at the command line, and select one of the symbols on the drawing. All the symbols of that type will then labelled with default value of the new attribute. Attributes may be exported from AVEVA P&ID using the standard export procedures, and are exported in a separate output file that can be imported into AVEVA P&ID Reports. See 7.1: Exporting Data to an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database for details.
Label Validation When P&ID graphics are labelled, online data validation may take place. There are five types of label validation: •
Label Validation against Lists of Valid Values
•
Label Format Validation
•
Label Uniqueness Validation
•
Label Validation across all Project P&IDs
•
Label Validation against Specifications
If possible, online validation should be left on, otherwise data is unchecked as it is entered, equating to a complete lack of automatic quality control. Manual checking would then have to be carried out.
6.13.1
Label Validation against Lists of Valid Values This type of validation is switched on or off by the On-Line Data Validation checkbox on the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. The default setting is on. When this type of validation is On, only valid entries may be selected when completing Properties Dialogs or entered at the command prompt, items with invalid labels are displayed in red in the Engineering Explorer, and drafting errors and omissions are highlighted with a balloon or symbol of the project's choice, and detailed in an error file. Where possible, these errors should be rectified before the data is exported to the database. Null characters may be used for pipe labels, if information is unknown. The following label data is validated: Area codes Block codes Equipment Type Letters (equipment descriptions for each equipment type). Fluid/Service codes Function codes Identical Instruments are identified by suffixes Instrument Types (i.e. PI=Pressure Indicator) Insulation Codes Line Number Uniqueness Line/Pipe Sizes Nozzle Sizes Nozzle Tag Uniqueness (per equipment item) Paint Codes Reducer Inlet and Outlet of different sizes Specification codes Tracing Codes Valve Closures (failure positions)
Validation Files Entered data is checked against the allowable project values held in the project validation files. The project validation files edited using the List of Values Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Alternatively, if the project is using VPE Workbench, the validation files can be supplied by that system and are then read-only. A directory path must be setup to VPE Workbench so that AVEVA P&ID can access these validation files. Online validation does not prevent the data export, as this might unnecessarily hold up a project, when information is missing for only a small number of items.
•
Typical Items When labels of typical items are validated on input, they are not only checked against the drawing labels but also typical labels on relevant items. The validation process checks for duplicates. These are reported when the OK button on the typical data entry dialog box is pressed. The dialog box remains open so that the required changes can be made.
•
Associated Project Configuration Options To activate online validation, check the On-Line Data Validation checkbox on the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. If unlabelled nozzles are to result in an error message, check the Nozzle error balloon placement checkbox. If unlabelled reducers are to result in an error message, check the Reducer not labelled error balloon placement checkbox. Enter the symbol used to indicate an error in the Symbol Name field. Enter the position in which error text is displayed in the Text position from origin field. The validation files are located in the Validation Directory identified on the Project Configuration Category of the Administration program.
6.13.2
Label Format Validation For certain label fields, the project may be set to check that entered labels correspond to a specified format, in other words, that they consist of the correct type of characters in the correct order. For example, the equipment Prefix field may be set so that all entries in this field must begin with an uppercase letter, followed by a lowercase letter, then a number, and so on. These settings are made using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, using the Pipes - Validation Sub-Set, Instruments - Validation Sub-Set, Equipment - Validation SubSet, Valves - Validation Sub-Set and Miscellaneous - Validation Sub-Set If an invalid entry is made in a Properties dialog an error message is displayed, and the invalid label may not be placed.
Label Uniqueness Validation Within most categories of item, for example, pipes or instruments, a label must be unique on a drawing. In addition, the project may be set to require that a selected field or a combination of fields in pipe, instrument and equipment labels also be unique. The fields that are to be checked for uniqueness are selected on the Pipes - Labels SubSet, Instruments - Labels Sub-Set and Equipment - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
6.13.4
Label Validation across all Project P&IDs The project may be set to check that all labels in all P&IDs in a project are unique within a category of item, for example, pipes or instruments. These settings are made using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, using the buttons in the Label Validation Across P&IDs sections of the Pipes - Settings Sub-Set, Instruments - Settings Sub-Set, Equipment - Settings Sub-Set, Valves - Settings Sub-Set and Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Set. If the Prevent option is selected, users are prevented from entering project duplicate labels for that category of item. If this is attempted, an error message is displayed and the duplicate labels may not be placed on the P&ID. The error message will identify the drawing number of the P&ID on which the other label (that the user attempted to duplicate) is located. If the Warn option is selected, users are warned if they enter project duplicate labels for that category of item. The entry of duplicate labels is permitted in this case, but a warning message will be displayed on the P&ID, and will accompany the label data if it is transferred to VPE Workbench. The warning message will identify the drawing number of the P&ID on which the other label (that the user is duplicating) is located. If the Ignore option is selected, no uniqueness validation of labels across P&IDs takes place. Duplicate labels may be entered in different P&IDs in this case. Duplicate labels are still not permitted in the same P&ID, except in the case of Valve and SPP labels. If Prevent or Warn options are selected, the uniqueness of labels across a project is checked against an external database, either a VPE Workbench database, or if VPE Workbench is not available, an SQL database.
•
Validation using a VPE Workbench Database If checking is against a VPE Workbench database, a connection to the VPE Workbench database should be established before labels are edited (see 8.8.7: Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database). This is because in order to check label uniqueness, AVEVA P&ID refers to a snapshot of the VPE Workbench database, stored in an XML file, which is generated when the connection is made. After this has taken place, the connection may be discontinued if required, and label data will be checked against the database snapshot. However, entered label data cannot then be validated against label changes made in other drawings after the disconnection. If Prevent or Warn options are selected, the system will also check for duplicate labels when a drawing is opened and when a connection to the VPE Workbench database is established. If any are detected, error or warning messages are placed on the drawing as appropriate.
If Prevent or Warn options are set, but no connection to the database has been made when a drawing is opened, the system will check for duplicate labels against the data the in XML snapshot file instead of the database.
•
Validation using an SQL Database The uniqueness of labels can alternatively be checked against an SQL database in a network location available to all project users of AVEVA P&ID. The database location is specified on the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Most label data is transferred to the database automatically when it is entered or changed if the Save to database on Update checkbox on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is checked. Some must be transferred using the Synchronise process. See 8.8.5: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database. The table below specifies which label values will be transferred to the database automatically and which ones will be transferred when the Synchronise process is executed.
Values deleted in a drawing will only be deleted in the SQL database once the Synchronise process is executed.
•
Validating Drawings Generated in other Locations If a project is being worked on in multiple locations, the P&IDs generated in these other locations must be sent to the office in which the validation database (either Workbench or SQL) is located. They must then be opened in AVEVA P&ID in order for the validation check to take place. P&IDs can be e-mailed using the eTransmit facility (accessed from the File menu), which is available in AVEVA P&ID. Using this facility, multiple drawings can be sent in a .zip file, accompanied by a transmittal. A number of other options are also available. See AutoCAD documentation for details.
•
6.13.5
Points to Note •
Duplicate labels that include null characters (e.g. "?") in the same positions are not validated and may be entered regardless of the project settings.
•
If the Ignore option was set, but is subsequently changed to Prevent or Warn, when a project drawing is reopened or refreshed, any duplicate labels for that category of item are displayed with an error message if the Prevent option was selected or a warning message if the Warn option was selected. Drawing data cannot be transferred to VPE Workbench if error messages are present.
•
Each part of an SPP label is placed separately and may be deleted separately. If a part of an SPP label is deleted and as a result the label is now a duplicate of an SPP label on another project drawing, an error or warning message may be displayed if the Prevent or Warn option is selected on the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Set.
Label Validation against Specifications Label validation against specifications is used to control which symbols can be inserted into pipes based on the specification of those pipes. For example, it may be specified that Ball Valve symbols may only be inserted into pipes with a specification of AAA3, and an inlet bore size of 20 and an outlet bor size of 20. The project may be set either to prevent the insertion of symbols into pipes that are not of the correct specification, or to display such symbols in a specified colour. Multiple combinations of pipe specs and sizes may be specified as compatible with the insertion of a symbol. If no specs or sizes are specified for a symbol, insertion of this symbol is unrestricted. Spec/size insertion restrictions may be set up for Valves, Instrument Valves and Reducers. Currently, only restrictions for 2-way symbols may be specified, but not symbols inserted at pipe junctions such as 3-way and 4-way valves. Label validation against specifications is set up using the Spec Driven Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Note: Changes to drawings resulting from changes to Spec Driven settings are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded. See 8.2.4: Updating Spec Driven Data.
Assemblies Collections of elements on drawing can be grouped together to create assemblies. Three types of assembly may be created (see 8.9.1: Creating Assemblies): •
Graphical Assemblies - pipes and symbols collected together into an AutoCAD block to act as templates, retaining the item associations
•
Design Data Templates - collections of VPE Workbench or P&ID Data Grid designators and values used to label items. See 6.16: Dynamic Labelling for further information.
•
Annotation Assemblies - there are two sub-types of Annotation Assemblies: •
Pipe: collections of pipe labels and symbols used to annotate pipes
•
UDA: collections of user-defined attribute labels and symbols used to annotate pipes, instruments and equipment.
Once an assembly is created, it is added to the Assemblies symbol folder of the project. There is a sub-folder for each assembly type. In addition, the Annotation Assembly subfolder contains sub-folders for each Annotation Assembly sub-type, and the UDA sub-type folder contains further sub-folders for each type of UDA assembly. It may then be inserted in the similar way to other symbols. See 8.4.11: Inserting Assemblies. Existing assemblies may only be removed by the AVEVA P&ID administrator.
6.15
Typical Items The AVEVA P&ID Typical Items feature enables one item to be identified as having data that is typical of many items. The details of the items represented by the typical item are added to the label of the item on the P&ID, but do not appear on the P&ID. See 8.6.25: Labelling Typical Items. The following items can be made typical of many: Pipes Off-Sheet Connectors (Pipe Flags) Instruments Equipment SPP Items Valve Items Nozzles. When data is transferred to VPE Workbench from the drawing, the data associated with each Typical Item is expanded into multiple sets where the items are created and revised in VPE Workbench as appropriate.
•
User Interface For each item that can be made into a Typical Item, The Drawing Page shortcut menu includes a Typicals option. This option is available if the Typical Item facility is enabled at project level, and if the item has been labelled with the minimum mandatory data for the item type. The option accesses a dialog box for the entry, deletion and modification of the typical data.
Note: Currently, entry of typical data is available only by means of the dialog box. Command line entry of typical data will be available in the future. For easy recognition of Typical items on the P&ID, each typical Item label should be displayed in a different colour to that of the equivalent non-typical label. These are selected using the project configuration options set using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
•
Order of Typical Data The ordering of typical data is illustrated by the following example: Typical pipe
1001
With Typical data:
1002 1003 1024
are connected to nozzle reference 'A' on: Typical Equipment
V-1600-A
With Typical data:
V-1600-B V-1600-C V-1600-D
This generates the following sets of destination information in the output file: Pipeline:
1001
Connected to:
Nozzle A on V-1600-A
Pipeline:
1002
Connected to:
Nozzle A on V-1600-B
Pipeline:
1003
Connected to:
Nozzle A on V-1600-C
Pipeline:
1024
Connected to:
Nozzle A on V-1600-D
To facilitate the ordering of data, an order number is provided against each Typical data record. This number is automatically generated on input, but can be modified manually to enable re-ordering of the data sets. Deletion of a record in the Typical data set will automatically re-order the data.
6.15.1
Validation Validation of typical items is discussed in 3.5: Validation.
Sheet-to-Sheet Connections Where Typical pipes are connected across drawing sheet boundaries, the following rule applies; if a Typical pipe has a Typical flag label, it must connect to either a Typical pipe on the connecting sheet, or to a series of drawn pipes on the connecting sheet. This rule ensures that when data is transferred to VPE Workbench and the typical crosssheet connections are expanded, the transfer process can connect the pipes together correctly across sheets.
6.15.3
Unique identifiers in VPE Workbench Unique identifiers are maintained by the Typical items feature to ensure that VPE Workbench does not unnecessarily flag items for secondary loading. Unique identifiers are stored in the drawing alongside each Typical data record, so editing of the Typical data records will not destroy the unique identifiers.
6.15.4
Typical Item Flag in AVEVA P&ID Output Typical item flags appear in the Pipe, Pipe items and Instrument output files, to indicate items that are typical and not drawn on the P&ID.
6.15.5
Typical Items in VPE Workbench VPE Workbench includes a Typical item flag in all the item tables for Pipes, Pipe items and Instruments.
6.15.6
Associated Project Configuration Options The Typical Item feature can be turned on or off by the Typical Labelling checkbox on the Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. The colours of typical items, as opposed to non-typical items, are also specified on this tab. There are fields for selecting colours for typical pipes, pipe flags, instruments, equipment, SPPs and valves.
6.16
Dynamic Labelling
6.16.1
Item Labels Items of equipment, instruments and lines may be labelled with dynamic labels. These consist of detail data selected from a VPE Workbench project database or from the P&ID Data Grid. See 8.8.9: Labelling with VPE Workbench Data and 8.6.22: Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid. These labels consist of a value, and optionally the designator associated with the value. The designator may be edited using the AVEVA P&ID labelling facilities (see 8.6: Labelling Symbols and Pipes). The value should not be edited, but should be kept up-to-date by refreshing them with the latest data from the VPE Workbench database (see 8.8.11: Refreshing VPE Workbench Data) or from the P&ID Data Grid (see 8.6.23: Refreshing P&ID Data Grid Labels). The project can be set-up so that VPE Workbench values are refreshed automatically, whenever a connection to VPE Workbench is made (see 8.8.7: Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database).
If no value exists for a designator, a placeholder for that value may be used instead. Once a value is defined for such a designator, the placeholder will be replaced by this value on refresh.
6.16.2
Design Data Templates A collection of values and designators can be grouped together to create an assembly. See 8.9.1: Creating Assemblies. The values and designators may be VPE Workbench values and designators or any of the values and designators that a drawing may be labelled with from the P&ID Data Grid, i.e. AVEVA P&ID, AVEVA P&ID Reports, AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Schematic Database data. Such assemblies are known as Design Data Templates, as opposed to the standard graphical assemblies consisting of pipes and symbols. Design Data Templates may be used on the same drawing or inserted into another drawing after creation. When a new Design Data Template is created, it is automatically placed in the relevant Project Assemblies>Design Data Templates symbol folder (Instrument, Equipment, Pipe or Drawing). Design Data Templates may then be associated with any appropriate symbol, pipe, or with a drawing. The data they display is dynamic as described above, and will change to reflect the values for the item or drawing they are associated with. See 8.4.11: Inserting Assemblies. Design Data Templates can only be removed by the AVEVA P&ID administrator. Selecting a refresh of VPE Workbench data requires that a connection to VPE Workbench be established. See 8.8.7: Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database.
6.16.3
Tables Tables of VPE Workbench data may be placed on P&IDs, and subsequently refreshed with current data. See 8.8.10: Inserting Tables of VPE Workbench Data. The appearance, position and content of these tables is specified on the VPE Workbench Tables Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Before tables of VPE Workbench data are placed or refreshed, a connection to VPE Workbench must be established. See 8.8.7: Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database.
6.17
General Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds General editing to drawings can be carried out by using the Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete and Rotate options on the shortcut menus. Items can also be stretched and mirrored using facilities in the Modify Group of the Home Tab. See: 8.7.2: Moving Drawing Objects 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels 8.7.6: Deleting Drawing Objects 8.7.5: Rotating Drawing Objects 8.7.4: Stretching Drawing Objects 8.7.3: Mirroring Drawing Objects
Inline items such as valves and reducers may be copied or moved from one pipe or process link to another by dropping the item onto the second pipe/process link, using the Cut/Copy, Paste options on the shortcut menu. This will correctly break the pipe/process link in the same way as a newly inserted item. Whole branches and pipe networks can be copied together by selecting in the explorer and using the shortcut menu. Note that you cannot cut or copy pipes that are flagged as 'invalid'. They must be validated successfully first. See 6.18: Deleting Items for more details of using the AVEVA P&ID delete facilities. Facilities are provided to move of one or more items to the Non-Plotting Layer set in the project configuration file. See 8.7.9: Moving Items to the Non-Plot Layer. Symbols may be exchanged individually or globally. For the individual symbol exchange option, you are prompted to select the new symbol from the Symbol List dialog box. The selected symbol must be of the same AVEVA P&ID type as the one being exchanged. The item type dictates the way AVEVA P&ID behaves when a symbol is inserted and these rules must be maintained at the symbol exchange. All labelling, including balloons, is retained. Undo twice to retrieve the original symbol if an error has been made, once to remove the new symbol, once to put back the old. If multiple symbols of the same type are selected in the drawing before the command is initialised they are all exchanged for the chosen symbol. See 8.7.7: Exchanging Individual Symbols. If it is required change all symbols of one type to another, for example, to change all Ball Valves (BAVA) to Gate Valves (GAVA), global symbol exchange capabilities can be used. This can be achieved by entering BAVA under the Old Symbol heading and GAVA under the adjacent New Symbol heading in the Symbol Exchange List, which is accessed from the List of Values Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, and by the use of the global symbol exchange facility used. This command can be used to swap symbols on demand provided that the two symbol item types are the same. It is not possible to swap one P&ID type for another, e.g.: Valves for Equipment. If the items do not match, an error will be received, listing the item types that do not match, and the old symbol is left in place. If problems are encountered, an AVEVA P&ID error balloon appears. See 8.7.8: Exchanging Symbols Globally. Notes may be added to items on a drawing, and changes from a previous revision may be highlighted with revision clouds. See 8.6.29: Adding Notes to Items and 8.7.10: Drawing Revision Clouds.
6.18
Deleting Items To delete items from a drawing use the shortcut menus available from the Engineering Explorer or The Drawing Page. These can be accessed after selecting single or multiple items. See 8.7.6: Deleting Drawing Objects. The consequences of deleting items in AVEVA P&ID vary because of the many different situations encountered. The results deleting using the AVEVA P&ID facilities are dictated by the item types involved and are summarised below. In general, items associated together are deleted together. Deleting an equipment item such as a vessel, with associated nozzles, pipe trim and electrical equipment from the explorer, will remove everything. •
When deleting an inline item from a pipe with tracing, select the tracing around the item as well as the item itself. Pipes are closed when inline items are deleted. Labels are removed automatically as appropriate or can be selectively removed.
When a labelled reducer is deleted, the line is closed and the user prompted for the size to retain. The size of the remaining pipe is revised accordingly, and cascades across pipe boundaries as necessary.
•
Deleting an inline instrument also removes the label balloon, then closes the line and removes labels as normal.
•
Non-AVEVA P&ID entities/elements are deleted as they would be in normal AutoCAD.
•
Deleting a Pipe which crosses over another pipe will only close the break in the line if the break symbols are selected.
•
Deleting an instrument also removes any associated I/O rockets.
•
Nozzle labels are not automatically deleted when the label of the associated equipment is deleted.
•
If a trim label is deleted, associated trim pipe labels are also deleted.
•
If the Number or Letter components of an equipment label are deleted, the rest of the label will be deleted also.
•
Each part of an SPP label is placed separately and may be deleted separately. If a part of an SPP label is deleted and as a result the label is now a duplicate of an SPP label on another project drawing, an error or warning message may be displayed if the Prevent or Warn option is selected on the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Set of AVEVA P&ID Administrator program.
•
A title block of a drawing sheet may not be deleted if that drawing sheet has attribute values that are inherited by items on the drawing. This is to prevent the accidental deletion of large amounts of label data should the title block be inadvertently deleted. Before such a title block can be deleted, the project settings must be changed to remove the inheritance, and the previously inherited sheet attribute values set to null.
Detecting Corrupted Items During the creation of an intelligent AVEVA P&ID drawing, it is possible that items on a drawing will become corrupt. Facilities are available to detect and highlight such items. Corrupted items are detected using the 8.8.1: Checking for Corrupted Items procedure. Items which are corrupted are then indicated with an error balloon.
Saving Changes Save changes to the drawing in the normal way using the standard AutoCAD facilities. When changes to a drawing are saved, the following dialog may be displayed, in which details of these changes and the current state of the drawing may be entered:
Whether or not the dialog is displayed in controlled by the setting of the Show Drawing History dialog box on the Drawing - Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Administration program.
Exporting Data to an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database Data is validated and exported for AVEVA P&ID Reports using the Exporting Data to a P&ID Reports Database procedure. Data can be exported in three ways using this procedure: •
In unconsolidated form to an intermediate database, from where it must subsequently be consolidated using AVEVA P&ID Reports facilities.
•
In unconsolidated form to a number of output files, from where it must subsequently be consolidated using AVEVA P&ID Reports facilities.
•
Consolidated drawing data transferred directly into the AVEVA P&ID Reports database.
Refer to the AVEVA P&ID Reports documentation for more information on AVEVA P&ID Reports facilities. In order for data to be transferred directly into a P&ID Reports database, that database must first be logged into. See 8.8.3: Connecting to a P&ID Reports Database. AVEVA P&ID Reports can be launched from AVEVA P&ID, and the database to which drawing data has been exported opened automatically. See 8.8.4: Opening a P&ID Reports Database. Note that the database must be logged into first (see above). Project configuration settings for the interface with P&ID Reports, such as the database to which drawing data is exported, are specified on the P&ID Reports Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
7.1.1
Data Validation Data validation automatically takes place when a drawing is exported. It checks the following: •
that all nozzles are identified
•
that all reducers are identified
•
instrument process connections
•
that all spec breaks are identified
•
assembles all item data for inclusion in the output files.
Only objects within the limits of drawings, as specified on the Drawing - Grid Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, will be validated.
Points to Note Additional Process During an export, the following additional processes may take place:
•
•
A copy of the drawing can be made available for AVEVA Model Management. In order for this to happen, the Save Copy checkbox on the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program must be checked.
•
Data can also be exported to VPE Workbench at the same time as it is exported to AVEVA P&ID Reports. See the Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database procedure for details.
Generating Line Lists If it is required to generate a simple line list from AVEVA P&ID using the export facility, line lists can be generated from "semi-intelligent" drawings, only partially upgraded from AutoCAD drawings (see 5: Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings), in which only the lines themselves are "intelligent" and any inline symbols are "dumb" AutoCAD blocks.
•
Drawing Number Before data is exported from a flow diagram, a drawing number must have been assigned and added to the drawing. See 8.1.6: Adding a Title to a Drawing and entering Drawing Sheet Attributes. It is also recommended that a Title be added. Without the drawing number, validation and data export cannot proceed.
•
Design Area If the 'Design area from title block used for Instrument Label Field 1' checkbox on the Drawing Labels pane is checked, and a design area is entered in the drawing Properties dialog, any instruments or equipment without a label prefix will have the design area exported as the prefix part of their label. For a vessel this may result in the label 20-V100, where 20 is the design area. Pre-existing instrument or equipment prefixes will not be overwritten. The area prefix is not visibly added to the label on the drawing; it is only added on export.
•
Specification If the 'Populate Spec in Database' checkbox on the Pipes - Settings Sub-Set is checked, specification attributes of items are exported. If this checkbox is not checked, the values will be set to null in the engineering database.
7.2
Transferring Data to and from AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical
7.2.1
Exporting to AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical When drawing data is synchronised (see 8.8.5: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database), copies of the synchronised drawings may be created in the Drawings Save Path field on the P&ID Reports Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
Item data from these drawings can be imported into an AVEVA Instrumentation (AI) or AVEVA Electrical (AE) project, and the drawings themselves viewed in AI or AE. For details of these facilities, refer to AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical documentation.
7.2.2
Importing from AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical Instruments from AVEVA Instrumentation and electrical equipment from AVEVA Electrical may be imported by placing them directly on to an AVEVA P&ID drawing. This procedure is carried out using the P&ID Data Grid. From the P&ID Data Grid, an AVEVA Instrumentation or AVEVA Electrical project may be logged onto. The P&ID Data Grid then lists the instruments/electrical equipment in the project which have been added to a drawing in the AVEVA P&ID drawing in the P&ID project (Assigned Instruments and Assigned Electrical Equipment), and those that have not (Unassigned Instruments and Unassigned Electrical Equipment). Instruments and electrical equipment are added to a drawing simply by dragging and dropping from the Unassigned Instruments and Unassigned Electrical Equipment nodes onto a drawing, and assigning a P&ID symbol type. For details of this procedure, see 8.8.12: Transferring Data from AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical. Imported instruments are added to the UNNAMED node in the Instrument Loops section of the Engineering Explorer. The Derive Instrument AREA From field on the AI Integration Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is used to specify the AVEVA P&ID Instrument tag field which will be populated with the Area values of instruments imported from AVEVA Instrumentation. The Derive Equipment AREA From field on the AE Integration Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is used to specify the AVEVA P&ID Equipment tag field which will be populated with the Area values of equipment imported from AVEVA Electrical.
7.3
Exporting to PDMS Schematic Databases Data can be exported directly from the current P&ID drawing into an AVEVA PDMS Schematic Database. The installation of PDMS that the AVEVA P&ID project is integrated with is selected on the PDMS Integration Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Configuration is also required in PDMS to set up the interface between AVEVA P&ID and PDMS. See 9.9: Setting up PDMS to Connect with P&ID for details. The database to which data is to be exported is selected a logged into using facilities provided by the P&ID Data Grid. The current content of the selected database can also be viewed in the P&ID Data Grid. See 4.5.6: Viewing and Exporting to a PDMS Schematic Database. See 8.8.13: Transferring Data to PDMS Schematic Databases for the export procedure. Note: Data can also be exported from single or multiple drawings to XML files in ISO 15928 format. This data can subsequently be imported into a PDMS Schematic database
using the PDMS Schematic Model Manager module. See 7.7: Exporting to an ISO 15926 File. Note: Data cannot currently be exported to AVEVA Marine Schematic Databases using this method.
7.4
Importing VPE Workbench Data Three types of data can be imported from a VPE Workbench project database into AVEVA P&ID. They are discussed below under the following headings: •
Importing Instrument Tag/Loop Numbers
•
Importing Equipment Design Data
•
Importing I/O Address Data.
In addition, drawings may be labelled with data from a VPE Workbench project database. See 6.16: Dynamic Labelling for details.
7.4.1
Importing Instrument Tag/Loop Numbers AVEVA P&ID imports instrument prefix, loop and suffix numbers from an external database. The information must be present in the correct format in the file .ENI, where is the filename of the flow diagram concerned. This file must be located in the data directory specified by the project configuration file. The data is automatically imported on initialisation or loading of the software, provided that this facility is enabled in the project configuration file. The limit and display position of loop information, such as prefix, loop, type etc., imported into the flow diagram is configurable by the project options for instrument balloon details. An exception report is created if items are not found on a flow diagram. On initialising AVEVA P&ID, if the .ENI file is found, the following message appears:
Writing Loop Numbers from External Database, Please Wait......
After data import, the program deletes the .ENI file from the data directory to prevent reload of the information the next time that the drawing is accessed.
•
Associated Project Configuration Options If instrument prefix, loop and suffix numbers are to be imported, the Loop Numbers from VPE Workbench checkbox on the Instruments - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program must be checked. The directory from which the data is imported is specified using the VPE Data Path field on the Project Configuration Category.
•
.ENI File Format The format of each record is: Handle | Prefix | Type | Loop | Suffix
For example: 2045 | 23 | PI | 1001 | NONE Note: The use of the word "NONE" in the file replaces the absence of a field (in the example, a Suffix). All fields may be a maximum of 32 characters in length. The List Item Details procedure may be used to obtain the handle of an item if manually constructing the file.
7.4.2
Importing Equipment Design Data The EDL item type is used to associate a special symbol with a piece of equipment. The EDL symbol may be any chosen symbol and may be placed on the non-plot layer. When an export of equipment data is carried out from VPE Workbench, an EDL file is created. The data is automatically imported when the P&ID is loaded and AVEVA P&ID is initialised, provided that this facility is enabled in the project configuration file. When imported, the data appears attached to the correct EDL symbol on the P&ID. The first label piece of information is placed on the insert point of the symbol. The offsetting of successive items of equipment information when the data appears on the EDL symbol is controlled by settings in the project configuration file.
•
Associated Project Configuration Options If the EDL data is to be imported, the Import Equipment Data checkbox on the Equipment Settings Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program must be checked. The placement of successive items of such equipment information is controlled by the Column X Offsets and Column Y offsets fields.
•
.EDL File Format The format of each record is: Handle | Prefix | Type | Loop | Suffix For example: 2045 | 23 | PI | 1001 | NONE Note: The use of the word "NONE" in the file replaces the absence of a field (in the example, a Suffix). All fields may be a maximum of 32 characters in length. The List Item Details procedure (see 8.9.5: List Item Details) may be used to obtain the handle of an item if manually constructing the file.
7.4.3
Importing I/O Address Data I/O Rockets are special symbols not supplied with the standard AVEVA P&ID set. I/O Rockets are used to assign single or multiple I/O (input/output) data against instruments or equipment. When I/O rockets are being used, the I/O data entered in VPE Workbench for those tagged items passes back onto the P&ID in a read-only form when AVEVA P&ID is initialised. The following message is received when this happens:
Writing I/O data from external database, Please wait......
I/O rocket labels may be placed on the non-plotting layer via a setting in the project configuration file. The labels for I/O Address, Card Type, Signal/Area Code and Remarks are automatically positioned in the same place for each rocket and the X, Y offsets in the project configuration options listed below control this automatic positioning with respect to the symbol insertion point. Once the export has occurred, the files named after the P&ID name with an IIO extension must be placed in the \VPE Workbench directory of the AVEVA P&ID installation. This enables automatic detection of the file the next time the P&ID is loaded.
•
Associated Project Configuration Options If I/O rocket labels are to be placed on the Non-plot layer, ensure that the Labels on Nonplot layer checkbox on the Instruments - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is checked. The X, Y offsets in the Offset from Symbol Origin fields control the automatic positioning of the I/O Address, Card Type, Signal/Area Code and Remarks components of the labels. The four components of labels may be individually rotated as they are brought in from VPE Workbench. Check the appropriate Rotate with Symbol checkboxes to activate the rotation.
7.5
Exporting Data to a VPE Workbench Database AVEVA P&ID can validate and export engineering item and connectivity data to the Plant Connectivity Model of a VPE Workbench database. This data can then be issued to the detailed engineering VPE Workbench modules and used as the basis for project documentation. The following methods for exporting data to a VPE Workbench project database are available: •
The Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database procedure, which is used to export data from a single AVEVA P&ID drawing. This procedure generates a number of output files. These may optionally be automatically copied to a specified publishing area, from where they are automatically imported into the intermediate data transfer tables of a specified VPE Workbench project. Optionally, the output files may be transferred (or re-transferred) to the publishing area using facilities on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, as described below.
•
Facilities are provided to export data from one or more previously synchronised drawings on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. This facility transfers the output files generated from synchronised drawings into the publishing area as described above.
•
The VPE Workbench Configuration Category also provides facilities to export data from one or more previously synchronised drawings to legacy VPE Workbench projects (i.e. pre-VPE Workbench 5.8). Data is transferred from the output files generated from synchronised drawings into the project database, into intermediate data transfer tables.
If exporting to a legacy project, a connection to the database in question must first be established by following the Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database procedure. Details of the output files can be found in 9.2: Output File Format. The folder into which these files are transferred to when a drawing is synchronised is set on the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
If exporting to a non-legacy project, the project and publishing area are defined on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category. Note: See also 9.8: Setting up AVEVA P&ID to Connect with VPE Workbench.
7.5.1
Data Validation Data validation automatically takes place when a drawing is synchronised. It checks the following: •
that all nozzles are identified
•
that all reducers are identified
•
instrument process connections
•
that all spec breaks are identified
•
assembles all item data for inclusion in the output files.
Only objects within the limits of drawings, as specified on the Drawing - Grid Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, will be validated.
7.5.2 •
Points to Note Additional Process During an export, the following additional processes may take place:
•
•
A copy of the drawing can be made available for AVEVA Model Management. In order for this to happen, the Save Copy checkbox on the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program must be checked.
•
Data can also be exported to an SQL database if a VPE Workbench database is not available. If a suitable SQL database has been identified in the project configuration, most data is transferred automatically as a drawing is labelled. Other data must be transferred using the synchronisation process (see below). Data transferred to either type of database can be used to validate the uniqueness of label data within a category of item within a project. See 6.13.4: Label Validation across all Project P&IDs.
•
Data can also be exported to AVEVA P&ID Reports at the same time as it is exported to VPE Workbench. See the Exporting Data to a P&ID Reports Database procedure for details.
Generating Line Lists If it is required to generate a simple line list from AVEVA P&ID using the Synchronise facility, line lists can be generated from "semi-intelligent" drawings, only partially upgraded from AutoCAD drawings (see 5: Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings), in which only the lines themselves are "intelligent" and any inline symbols are "dumb" AutoCAD blocks.
•
Drawing Number Before data is exported from a flow diagram, a drawing number must have been assigned and added to the drawing. See 8.1.6: Adding a Title to a Drawing and entering Drawing Sheet Attributes. It is also recommended that a Title be added. Without the drawing number, validation and data export cannot proceed.
•
Design Area If the 'Design area from title block used for Instrument Label Field 1' checkbox on the Drawing Labels pane is checked, and a design area is entered in the drawing Properties
dialog, any instruments or equipment without a label prefix will have the design area exported as the prefix part of their label. For a vessel this may result in the label 20-V100, where 20 is the design area. Pre-existing instrument or equipment prefixes will not be overwritten. The area prefix is not visibly added to the label on the drawing; it is only added on export.
•
Specification If the 'Populate Spec in Database' checkbox on the Pipes - Settings Sub-Set is checked, specification attributes of items are exported. If this checkbox is not checked, the values will be set to null in the engineering database.
•
Exporting Items without Tag Numbers AVEVA P&ID permits the export of items without tag numbers by using temporary tag numbers. These numbers are automatically assigned by AVEVA P&ID at the time of export and are unique identifiers that can be seen on the screen. They are exported to the database and appear in square brackets, for example: [21] [34] [45] [56] They can subsequently be edited in the database once the actual tag number is known. The updated tag numbers from the database then dynamically update the temporary tag numbers on the flow diagram when it is next loaded into AVEVA P&ID. Each time an export is carried out for the same flow diagram, these temporary tag numbers will be the same. This feature enables VPE Workbench to trace the changes since the previous import.
7.6
Exporting Data to AVEVA NET Data can be exported from AVEVA P&ID drawings into files that can subsequently be imported into AVEVA NET Portal: •
AVEVA EIWM (Engineering Information and Workflow Model) XML files containing the engineering data
•
SVG files which are used to display the AVEVA P&ID drawings in AVEVA NET Portal.
The export is configured using the AVEVA NET - Configurations Sub-Set, AVEVA NET Mappings Sub-Set and AVEVA NET - Setting Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Data can be exported from the current drawing in AVEVA P&ID. See 8.8.14: Publishing Data to AVEVA NET for details. Facilities are also provided to export data from a batch of drawing in the AVEVA NET Advanced Options Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. This pane also includes facilities to export data to a remote location such as a shared folder on a network.
Exporting to an ISO 15926 File Drawing data can be exported to XML files in ISO15926 format. These files contain both engineering item data and graphical data which can subsequently be imported into an AVEVA PDMS or AVEVA Marine Schematic databases using the Schematic Model Manager module. Data can be exported to an ISO 15926 file either from a single drawing, or from a batch of drawings. See 8.8.15: Exporting Data to ISO 15926 Files. Note: Data can also be exported directly from a single drawing into a PDMS Schematic database. See 7.3: Exporting to PDMS Schematic Databases. If data is to be exported to PDMS, ensure that instrument and miscellaneous item label delimiters are set, to ensure tag format consistency with PDMS. These delimiters are entered using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, in the Instrument Dialog Labels section of the Instruments - Settings Sub-Set and the Dialog Box Field Labels section of the Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-Set. If "Legacy" Process Links are to be used (PLK item type), i.e. Process Links without the functionality introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3, a number of factors should be considered when drawing process links if data is to be exported to an ISO 15926 file. For details, see Guidelines for Drawing Process Links. If exporting data that is to be imported by the 12.0 SP5 version of PDMS or later, the 3.3.3 version of the ISO 15926 schema may be used. If exporting data to previous versions of PDMS (e.g. 12.0 SP4), the 3.2.0 version of the ISO15926 schema must be used. Refer to 9.5: The ISO15926 (Version 3.2.0) Schema Specification or 9.6: The ISO15926 (Version 3.3.3) Schema Specification. Note: All port sizes of 3-way and 4-way components are exported. The third size is exported as the "Secondary_size_1" value in the XML file, the fourth size as "Secondary_size_2". See the image below for an example.
Transferring Data to and from Excel All the item and drawing data of a drawing can be exported to Microsoft Excel spreadsheets. This data can then be edited in the spreadsheet using Excel facilities and imported back into AVEVA P&ID to update the drawing. Data can be exported from and to a single drawing or a batch of drawings. See: •
8.8.16: Exporting Data to Excel
•
8.8.17: Editing P&ID Data in an Excel Spreadsheet
•
8.8.18: Importing Data from Excel
As part of the import procedure, changed data is validated. Invalid changes are highlighted on the spreadsheet so that they can easily be identified and corrected. The format of the exported spreadsheet and the scope of data that is imported are specified on the Excel Interface Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. For details of the format of the spreadsheet see 9.7: Format of the Excel Interface Spreadsheet.
Description AVEVA P&ID can be configured to suit project requirements by means of project options. These are set using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
•
Instructions Refer to 2.3: AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program.
8.1.2 •
Creating Drawings Description New AVEVA P&ID drawings can be created in a number of ways.
•
Instructions Refer to 6.2: Creating a New Drawing.
8.1.3 •
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings to AVEVA P&ID Drawings Description Existing "dumb" AutoCAD drawings can be upgraded to "intelligent" AVEVA P&ID drawings, using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility and procedures within AVEVA P&ID.
•
Instructions Refer to 5: Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings.
8.1.4 •
Upgrading Items from old Projects Description A revised version of pipe lines that improved the performance and usability of the application considerably was introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3.
For projects developed using previous versions of AVEVA P&ID, an upgrade of the pipes and symbols on the project drawings is required before the drawings can be used in AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3 or AVEVA P&ID 12.0 or later.
•
Instructions Refer to 2.1: Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects.
8.1.5 •
Opening a Drawing Description AVEVA P&ID drawings can be opened in a number of ways.
•
Instructions Refer to 6.3: Starting and Exiting AVEVA P&ID.
8.1.6 •
Adding a Title to a Drawing and entering Drawing Sheet Attributes Description This procedure is used to add or edit the drawing numbers, sheet numbers, revision numbers, client drawing numbers and drawing titles of drawings. The command is also used to specify a design area to be used for export purposes by instruments/equipment that do not have an associated design area, to view the range of line and loop numbers used on a drawing and to enter other drawing sheet attribute that may be inherited by items on the drawing. For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.4: Titling a Drawing. Note: If the drawing number is associated with a VPE Workbench project, details of that project may be viewed. See 8.8.9: Labelling with VPE Workbench Data.
Errors An error message will be received during validation if a drawing number is not associated with a drawing.
•
Associated Project Configuration Options •
If the design area is to appear in the title, ensure that the Design area from Title Block used for Instrument Label field 1 checkbox on the Drawing - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is checked.
•
If the project number is to be part of the drawing title, check the Place Project Number Label as part of Drawing Title checkbox.
•
The numbers of drawing areas, drawing numbers and project number labels to include in the title are specified in the 3 fields in this pane.
•
Sheet attribute field names and coordinates of their labels on drawing are set up using the Drawing - Settings Sub-Set.
•
Entries into sheet attribute fields may be restricted by setting up validation rules using the Drawing Information – Validation Sub-Set.
Establish inheritance between item label and sheet attribute fields using the Pipes Settings Sub-Set, Instruments - Settings Sub-Set, Equipment - Settings Sub-Set, Valves - Settings Sub-Set and Line Fittings Configuration Category.
Instructions 1. Start the procedure by selecting the Properties option from the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page. 2. The AVEVA P&ID Drawing properties dialog is then displayed (see 4.8: Properties Dialogs):
3. To enter, edit or view Sheet Attribute and Line and Loop Number Range Data in the fields provided:
Enter or edit data as required. Depending on project set up, the values entered in the Drawing Sheet Attribute fields may be inherited by items on the drawing. Click on OK to return to the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Properties dialog. 4. Once title details have been entered you will be prompted to position the data on the drawing. For example:
Position Drawing Number:
You will only be prompted to position data from fields that you have actually completed. While positioning title data you may be required to specify the rotation and height of the text.
Description Most project configuration changes are automatically implemented in a drawing when it is opened. However there are exceptions to this, and project configuration changes may also be implemented manually once a drawing has been opened, as described below.
•
Associated Project Configuration Options All project configuration changes are made using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program.
•
-
Instructions •
Configuration Changes that must be implemented by the user
•
Configuration Changes that may optionally be implemented
•
Implementing Configuration Changes made since a drawing was opened
Configuration Changes that must be implemented by the user Some configuration changes are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded using the following procedures:
-
•
Updating Equipment Tags
•
Updating PipeTags
•
Updating Spec Driven Data
•
Convert Project Label Units
Configuration Changes that may optionally be implemented If project configuration changes have been made to text styles or to the appearance settings of labels, or if they have been changed in the drawing and are now different from the project settings, the following message is displayed when a drawing is opened:
Click Yes to set the appearance of labels to those defined in the project settings. Click No the keep the current appearance of the labels on the drawing.
Implementing Configuration Changes made since a drawing was opened To implement configuration changes made since the drawing was opened, select the Refresh Settings option in the AVEVA P&ID Group of the Home Tab. The following message is then displayed:
Click Yes to continue. Configuration changes are then implemented with the exceptions described above.
8.2.2 •
Updating Equipment Tags Description Changes to drawings resulting from the Equipment Label Format project configuration settings being changed are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded using this procedure. Note: As an alternative to the procedure below, if only a single label is to be updated, opening and closing the Properties dialog (see 4.8: Properties Dialogs) of that equipment will update its label format.
•
Associated Project Configuration Options This procedure is used to implement changes made to the Equipment Label Format settings on the Equipment - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
•
Instructions 1. Start the procedure by selecting the Update Equipment Tag option in the Project Configuration Group of the Utilities Tab.. 2. The command prompt will display: Pick Equipments for reformatting the tags: Select the equipment the tags of which are to be updated. When all the required equipment has been selected, press Enter. If all equipment tags on the drawing are to be updated, enter "all" at the command prompt and press Enter. It is recommended that a Zoom Extents is performed before proceeding with this option.
3. The command prompt will display the number of selected equipment items (for example): 5 found The labels of the selected equipment are then updated. If many equipment items have been selected, this may take a few moments.
8.2.3 •
Updating PipeTags Description Changes to drawings resulting from the Display Label Format project configuration setting beings changed are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded using this procedure. Note: Split pipe labels cannot be updated using this procedure. Note: As an alternative to the procedure below, if only a single label is to be updated, opening and closing the Properties dialog (see 4.8: Properties Dialogs) of that pipe will update its label format.
•
Associated Project Configuration Options This procedure is used to implement changes made to the Display Label Format settings on the Pipes - Labels Sub-Set of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
•
Instructions 1. Start the procedure by selecting the Update Pipe Tag option in the Project Configuration Group of the Utilities Tab.. 2. The command prompt will display: Pick pipe group for reformatting the tags: Select the pipes the tags of which are to be updated. When all the required pipes havw been selected, press Enter. If all pipe tags on the drawing are to be updated, enter "all" at the command prompt and press Enter. It is recommended that a Zoom Extents is performed before proceeding with this option. 3. The command prompt will display the number of selected pipes (for example): 5 found The labels of the selected pipes are then updated. If many pipes have been selected, this may take a few moments.
Updating Spec Driven Data Description Changes to drawings resulting from changes to Spec Driven Project Configuration settings are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded using this procedure.
•
Example: Out of spec items highlighted in magenta:
•
Associated Project Configuration Options This procedure is used to implement changes made to the settings on the Spec Driven Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
•
Instructions 1. Start the procedure by selecting the Update Spec Driven Data option in the Project Configuration Group of the Utilities Tab.. It is recommended that a Zoom Extents is performed before proceeding. 2. The command prompt will display: Regenerating model. Symbols on the drawing are then checked against the new settings and the drawing is regenerated so that the symbols that are now "out of spec" are displayed in the colour selected for such items in the project settings. 3. The command prompt will display then number of symbols that are out of spec, the number of symbols which are in spec, and the colour in which out of spec symbols are displayed, for example: 7 symbols are out of spec; 68 symbols highlighted in 6 color are out of spec
Convert Project Label Units Description Changes to drawings resulting from the label units project configuration setting being changed are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded using this procedure.
•
Associated Project Configuration Options This procedure is used to implement changes resulting from the Label Units setting on the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program being changed.
•
Instructions 1. Start the procedure by selecting the Convert Units option in the Project Configuration Group of the Utilities Tab. 2. The command prompt will display: Select objects or
•
DrawingBorder This element may be used to separate the drawing frame and borders from the drawing annotation. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
Presentation
0..1
The Presentation element has no purpose in this context.
Extent
1
The minimum bounding geometry of the geometric contents of the Drawing element and its descendants.
BsplineCurve
0..*
A geometric primitive
Circle
0..*
A geometric primitive
CompositeCurve
0..*
A geometric primitive
Ellipse
0..*
A geometric primitive
Line
0..*
A geometric primitive
Polyline
0..*
A geometric primitive
Shape
0..*
A geometric primitive
TrimmedCurve
0..*
A geometric primitive
Text
0..*
DrawingBorder
0..*
This element may be used to store the drawing border/outline but this is at the discretion of the export tool.
GenericAttributes
0..*
Any application specific properties relating to the Drawing.
Attribute Name
Required
Description
Name
N
Identity for the drawing border
Size
N
This is a free text string and has no defined syntax. See Character encoding.
EndDiameter This is the internal bore for a segment or a PipingNetworkSystem at its destination. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Value
Y
The bore size
Units
N
This may be any of the distance units permitted. See Units for permitted values and semantics if not present.
Example:
•
Equipment An Equipment element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
Discipline
0..1
Functional domain of Equipment
NormalOperatingPressure
0..1
MinimumDesignPressure
0..1
MaximumDesignPressure
0..1
MinimumDesignTemperatu 0..1 re MaximumDesignTemperat ure
A free form string identifying, if required, the process area that this equipment resides in (See Character encoding).
Purpose
N
A free form string describing the function of this equipment in the process (see Character encoding).
Example: … …
•
Extent A minimum bounding geometry describing the minimum and maximum coordinates of the descendants of this elements parent. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
Min
1
Minimum values for all geometric descendants of the Extent elements parent.
Max
1
Maximum values for all geometric descendants of the Extent elements parent
FabricationCategory This is a free form string element that may be unit qualified. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Units
N
This may contain any of the permitted units types See Units.
Example: None
•
GenericAttributes This element permits application specific attributes/properties to be output into an XML file. The properties themselves must adhere to the following complex type definition: Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
Xsd:any
@Number
The contents of a GenericAttributes element are not validated and may be any valid XML content. However the XML applications will expect the contents to conform to the schema fragment provided above.
Height This is the height of the Nozzle origin on it’s parent Equipment, measured from the origin of the Equipment. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Value
Y
The height value
Units
N
This may be any of the distance units permitted. See Units for permitted values and semantics if not present.
Example:
•
History This is provided to contain an audit trail of the changes to an item. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
Transaction
0..*
An entry in the audit trail
Attribute Name
Required
Description
NumTransactions
Y
The number of Transaction child elements
Attributes:
Example:
•
Identifier This element is used to capture the structure of an identifier such as a Tag. Not usually used.
This may be any of the distance units permitted. See Units for permitted values and semantics if not present.
Example:
•
InstrumentLoop A collection of related instruments. This element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Inline instruments are associated to instrument loops by using the Association element. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
ProcessInstrument
0..*
An off-line instrument that is part of this set.
SignalLine
0..*
SignalConnectorSymbol
0..*
Connection
0..*
Attributes: See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes are defined. Example:
The coordinates defining the start and end of the line.
GenericAttributes
0..*
A geometric primitive
Attributes: None Example:
•
Location A Location element matches the definition of a Coordinated, it is a Tuple of ordinates denoting a location in the drawing plane. For 2D drawings the Z ordinates should always be 0. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
X
Y
The X Axis ordinate as a double
Y
Y
The Y Axis ordinate as a double
Z
N
The Z Axis ordinate as a double, If not present this defaults to 0.0
Example:
•
Manufacturer The manufacturer responsible for producing the item Child elements: None Attributes:
This may be any of the temperature units permitted. See Units for permitted values and semantics if not present.
Example:
•
Nozzle A Nozzle element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
NozzleType
0..1
NominalDiameter
0..1
Internal nominal bore of nozzle
Height
0..1
Height of Nozzle on the Equipment
Attributes: See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes Example:
This may be any of the distance units permitted. See Units for permitted values and semantics if not present.
Example:
•
PConnectionPoints See Issues.
•
PersistentID The PersistentID element contains a source system identifier for an object that remains consistent between exports of a drawing. A PersistentID is made up of two components the identifier and its scope. A PersistentID should be the same for an object that appears on multiple drawings where it is practicable to do this. If this cannot be achieved the T, if present, will be used by P&ID Manager for rationalising objects. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Identifier
Y
The persistent identifier for an XML element. The Identifier must be unique within the set of XML files that may interact directly or indirectly with this drawing for the stated context. This a free form string type, see Character encoding.
Context
N
This scopes a persistent identifier. In this way an item may have different Identifiers for different systems/contexts and each identifier may be represented. Ideally this would be encoded as a URI. For example http://www.aveva.com/P&ID Designer/ProjectName.
PipeConnector An on or off page connector that represents the connectivity of a PipingNetworkSegment across a page boundary. These are contained by the PipingNetworkSegment elements and reference as the segment source or destination. A PipeConnector element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
CrossPageConnection
0..1
Information describing the matching criteria for the PipeConnector that is connected to this one.
Attributes: See ‘PlantItem’, no Additional attributes Example:
•
PipeFlowArrow This element is an annotation primitive to represent the direction of flow of a PipingNetworkSegment. A PipeFlowArrow element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: See ‘PlantItem’, no additional elements Attributes: See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes Example:
PipingNetworkSystem A PipingNetworkSystem contains the information for a physical PipingNetworkSystem in the plant or a section thereof as contained within a module. The PipingNetworkSystem contains all of the PlantItems that belong to it. A PipingNetworkSystem may have multiple sources and multiple destinations.' A PipingNetworkSystem element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
PipingComponent This represents a physical component that is common to piping systems. A PipingComponent element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
PipingComponent
0..*
Contained PipingComponent.
ConnectionType
0..1
NominalDiameter
0..1
InsideDiameter
0..1
None Outside Diameter
0..1
OperatorType
0..1
WallThickness
0..1
FabricationCategory
0..1
Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
ConnectionType
N
This is a free text string and has no defined syntax. See Character encoding
Rating
N
This is a free text string and has no defined syntax. See Character encoding
Standard
N
This is a free text string and has no defined syntax. See Character encoding
ISOSymbol
N
This is a free text string and has no defined syntax. See Character encoding
PipingNetworkSegment A PipingNetworkSegment is a subsection of a PipingNetworkSystem where the engineering parameters are common. A PipingNetworkSegment will start at a Nozzle, SpecificationBreak or the downstream end of a Reducer or Tee and end at a Nozzle, SpecificationBreak, Reducer, Tee or an open pipe. For a P&ID it can also start or end with a PipeConnector. It will contain one or more CenterLine, PipingComponent, Equipment and ProcessInstrument elements. For a P&ID it is the CenterLines that join the successive components together and these should be considered in the same way as the other symbols and all must occur in the order head to tail. A PipingNetworkSegment element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. PipeConnectors representing on and off page connectivity are contained by the PipingNetworkSegment. See for details of PipingNetworkSegment connectivity. Child Elements: Element Name
Cardinality
NominalDiameter
0..1
InsideDiameter
0..1
None Outside Diameter
0..1
StartDiameter
0..1
EndDiameter
0..1
NormalDesignPressure
0..1
MinimumDesignPressure
0..1
MaximumDesignPressure
0..1
Description
NormalDesignTemperature 0..1 MinimumDesignTemperatu 0..1 re MaximumDesignTemperat ure
0..1
NormalOperatingPressure
0..1
MinimumOperatingPressur 0..1 e MaximumOperatingPressu 0..1 re TestPressure
PlantArea In the P&ID content of an XML file this is just an object that may be used to represent the name and attributes of named part(area) of a plant. A plant Area is not permitted to contain model elements but may be referenced to associated segments, Equipment etc with a named PlantArea. A PlantArea element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: See ‘PlantItem’, no additional elements Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Name
N
A string representing the name of the area. See Character encoding.
Example:
•
PlantInformation This element collects the metadata for a PlantModel. The Date and Time attributes should be the Date and Time of the XML file creation. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
UnitsOfMeasure
1
Defines the default units of measure for the file.
The distance units of measure for the geometry in the file.
Discipline
Y
Fixed value of ‘PID’
Example:
•
PlantItem This element is a base abstract type of many elements within an XML file, it defines the common elements and attributes for these items. Child elements: Element Name
The minimum bounding geometry of the element and its descendants
Coordinate
1..*
The coordinates defining the line primitive
Attribute Name
Required
Description
NumPoints
Y
The number of child Coordinate elements.
Attributes:
Example:
•
Position This defines the place where an items origin is on a P&ID drawing. This is in effect the location of the items symbol. The Axis and Reference attributes are used to define the coordinate orientation in 3D space. The drawing is considered to be on the plane of Z=0. Child elements: Attributes: None Example:
•
Presentation The element defines a styles used to draw geometric and textual content. Whle all attributes are defined as optional in the schema the R, G, B, LineWeight and LineType attributes are expected for all geometric primitives, otherwise the behaviour is undefined. Child elements: None
Name of the layer in which the graphical elements resides. This has no functional semantics associated with it.
Color
N
A lookup in a color index. This isn’t to be used for P&ID Manager P&ID files.
LineType
N
One of the numbers or names from the following (Object Model document v2.2):0 Solid 1 Dotted 2 Dashed 3 Long Dash 4 Long Dash + Short Dash, CenterLine 5 Short Dash 6 Long Dash + Short Dash + Short Dash 7 Dash + Short Dash
LineWeight
N
or or Where: is an real value. is a space character () is a distance units from Units If the value isn’t qualified with units then the behaviour is undefined.
R
N
0 to 1 (double) 1 = maximum intensity of Red component.
G
N
0 to 1 (double) 1 = maximum intensity of Green component.
B
N
0 to 1 (double) 1 = maximum intensity of blue component.
Example:
•
ProcessInstrument This represents a physical instrument that is common to piping systems.
A ProcessInstrument element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
PlantItem
0..*
Contained PipingComponent.
NominalDiameter
0..1
InsideDiameter
0..1
None Outside Diameter
0..1
OperatorType
0..1
WallThickness
0..1
Attributes: See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes Example:
•
Rating This is a unit qualified string value to describe the rating of an item. Child elements: None
This may be any of the units permitted since the type of measurement isn’t specified. See Units for permitted values, the semantics if Units are not present are unclear.
Example:
•
Reference See Geometries (Axis and Reference). Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
X
Y
Double
Y
Y
Double
Z
Y
Double
Example:
•
Remark A string comment element Child elements: None Attributes: None Example: WP2134
•
Scale The scale element is used when symbols are drawn from a shape catalogue. The Scale element enables symbols to be rescaled when positioned in a drawing. Child elements: None
ShapeCatalogue A Shape Catalogue defines a symbol library for a file. The elements for which the symbols can be defined are currently limited to Equipment and PipingComponent elements only. See ComponentName for how to reference and name a symbol in the catalogue. See Scale for how to scale symbols when drawn. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
Equipment
0..*
Equipment symbols
PipingComponent
0..*
PipingComponent symbols
Nozzle
0..*
Nozzle symbols
ProcessInstrument
0..*
ProcessInstrument symbols
Component
0..*
Component symbols
PipeConnector
0..*
PipeConnector symbols
SignalConnectorSymbol
0..*
SignalConnector symbols
Attribute Name
Required
Description
Name
Y
The name of the symbol catalogue, this is a string attribute.
Version
N
The version of the symbol set.
Units
N
The distance units that the symbols are defined in. This affects the size of the symbol with respect to the units defined by the PlantInformation/UnitsOfMeasure/ @Distance attribute. i.e if Units is different to the PlantInformation default then the symbol is scaled. See the distance section of Units for valid values.
Date
N
The date the symbol library was created/ modified.
SignalConnectorSymbol An on or off page connector that represents the connectivity of a SignalLine across a page boundary. A SignalConnectorSymbol element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
CrossPageConnection
0..1
Information describing the matching criteria for the SignalConnector that is connected to this one.
Attributes: See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes Example:
•
SignalLine A connection between two instruments carrying instrumentation signals. A SignalLine element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Attributes: See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes Example:
•
SpecificationBreak This represents the point at which there is a change in specification of the piping. See Issues. A SpecificationBreak element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. A SpecificationBreak may only be contained by a PipingNetworkSystem element. Child elements : (See ‘PlantItem’) No Additional elements Attributes : (See ‘PlantItem’) No Additional attributes Example : Change in Insulation
TestPressure The pressure that should be used to test an item Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Value
Y
The pressure
Units
N
This may be any of the pressure units permitted. See Units for permitted values and semantics if not present.
Example:
•
Text This defines the textual annotation for a drawing. The text may be provided in an attribute, referenced using attributes on this item, referenced on attributes of another item or provided as a set of String elements. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
Presentation
1
The style to use to draw the text.
Extent
1
The minimum bounding rectangle around the text.
Position
1
The position of the text
String
0..*
Used when the text contains a line break.
GenericAttributes
0..*
Any application specific attributes, this could include attributes that contain the text content to write.
The number of text lines being represented. If not present then a value of 1 is assumed.
String
N
If present this is the text to be drawn. If the text contains a line break then it should be split into the String child elements instead of being in the attribute or the line break character replaced with an appropriate character reference.
Font
Y
The font family name to use.
Justification
The location of Position within the Text to be written. Where the text is on multiple lines then Justification denotes the location of Position for the first line of text. One of the following: LeftTop LeftCenter LeftBottom CenterTop CenterCenter CenterBottom RightTop RightCenter RightBottom Defaults to LeftBottom if not provided.
Width
Y
The full width of the Text string once rendered
Height
Y
The full height of the Text string once rendered
TextAngle
This is the angle that the base line of the text string makes with the positive X axis measured anticlockwise in degrees.
SlantAngle
This is the angle, in degrees, of slant of the text characters measured clockwise from the positive Y axis. E.g. for the character I it is the angle that the vertical stroke makes with the positive Y axis.
ItemID
If provided then the text string is to be constructed from the attributes of another element. The ID may be provided as the ID of the element, the PersistentID/ @Identifier or the Tag of the element. See Tag Referencing.
If the text is to be obtained from a child of a GenericAttributes element then the set name for the GenericAttributes element may be provided to avoid ambiguity.
DependantAttribute
The template for the textual contents if obtaining the text from referenced attributes. The value of the DependantAttribute can contain a single attribute or a list of Attributes and explicit text. IF a single attribute is referenced it may appear just as the attribute name. Where multiple attributes or explicit text is used the attribute names are contained in square brackets. E.g “[Tagprefix][Tagnumber][Tagsuffix]”. The search order will be the Attributes of the PlantItem, ItemAttributes then GenericAttributes of the Text followed by the GenericAttributes of the parent or the object explicitly identified by the ItemID. The first occurrence of the named Attribute will be used, there is no mechanism for handling multiple attributes of the same name.
Amended Nozzle parameters for new specificationWP2134
•
TrimmedCurve An arc based on a circle or ellipse definition Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
Circle
0..1
Only present if Ellipse isn’t present. The base Circle used to define the arc.
Ellipse
0..1
Only present if Circle isn’t present. The base ellipse used to define the arc.
GenericAttributes
0..*
Any application specific attributes
Attribute Name
Required
Description
StartAngle
Y
The rotation around the circle/ellipse to start the arc from. 0 = up. The direction of the rotation is governed by the Z axis specifier on the geometry. Angle specified in degrees (0-360).
EndAngle
Y
The rotation around the circle/ellipse to end the arc at. 0 = up. The direction of the rotation is governed by the Z axis specifier on the geometry. Angle specified in degrees (0-360).
UnitsOfMeasure This element specifies the default units of measure for the file for each type of measured value. Child Elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Distance
N
See Units for permitted distance values. Default value is ‘Millimetre’.
Angle
N
See Units for permitted angle values. Default value is ‘Degree’.
Temperature
N
See Units for permitted temperature values. Default value is ‘DegreeCelsius’.
Pressure
N
See Units for permitted pressure values. Default value is ‘Bar’.
Weight
N
See Units for permitted weight values. Default value is ‘Kilogram’.
Example:
•
WallThickness The thickness of the element construction. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Value
N
The thickness value. Nb this is a string type and so could be represented in many ways.
Units
N
The units of measure (See Units for permitted values). If not present then this defaults to the units specified by PlantInformation/UnitsOfMeasure.
Introduction The 3.3.3 version of the ISO15926 schema can only be used to export data that is to be imported by the 12.0 SP5 version of PDMS or later. If exporting data to previous versions of PDMS (e.g. 12.0 SP4), the 3.2.0 version of the ISO15926 schema must be used. See 9.5: The ISO15926 (Version 3.2.0) Schema Specification.
•
Notation Where the notation ‘…’ is used in examples it implies content that has been omitted due to it not being relevant for the example. Elements in examples have been abbreviated to to show structure but limit content.
9.6.2 •
Model Details XML File Document Structure The document structure is defined in the XML schema for the P&ID profile (See below). An output file that conforms to this document must validate against the profile schema. The first line of the file must be an XML declaration, for example:
The document is to be encoded using UTF-8. The root node of a file is a PlantModel element. See the Element Definitions (below) for the definitions of its attribute and element contents. XML elements are not defined within an XML namespace and so are not namespace qualified. Elements are not defined within an XML namespace and so are not namespace qualified. The following class model provides an overview of the significant structural elements contained within a P&ID profile. The arrows indicate and parent/child element relationship in the file. The elements and their attributes are defined in section 4 of this document. Child elements of the ShapeCatalogue element have been omitted for clarity. Geometric and annotation elements have also been omitted.
Topology Two elements within the file format are used to represent explicit connectivity between engineering components. These elements are:
-
•
Connection - on the PipingNetworkSegment and SignalLine elements
•
CrossPageConnection - on the PipeConnectorSymbol and SignalConnectorSymbol elements
PipingNetworkSegment Topology (Connection element) Components within a PipingNetworkSegment are considered to be implicitly connected, by their main flow in and flow out connections points, in the order that they are represented in the PipingNetworkSegment. This ordering may differ between a P&ID and 3D model. Each PipingNetworkSegment is a collection of Components with common engineering properties that define a single process flow. Where there is a junction in the flow or a change of specification the PipingNetworkSegment will terminate and be connected to PipingNetworkSegments for each subsequent flow. Subsidiary flows or connections for the purposes of instrumentation are not considered as terminating conditions for a PipingNetworkSegment A PipingNetworkSegment, as its upstream or head reference (PipingNetworkSegment/ Connection/@FromID), will reference a Nozzle, InstrumentConnection, splitting component (such as a Tee, Wye, Cross, Three Way Valve etc), Reducer, ProcessInstrument or PropertyBreak that it doesn't contain or it will reference a PipeConnectorSymbol that it contains as its first engineering component for connections to other drawings
A PipingNetworkSegment, as its downstream or tail reference (PipingNetworkSegment/ Connection/@ToID), will reference a Nozzle, InstrumentConnection, merging component (such as a Tee, Wye or Cross), ProcessInstrument or PropertyBreak that it doesn't contain or it will reference a splitting component (such as a Tee, Wye or Cross), Reducer or PipeConnectorSymbol that it contains as its last engineering component.
References to contained components by the Connection element, with the exception of PipeConnectorSymbol elements, require a ToNode attribute which references the downstream ConnectionPoint of the component (i.e. the main flow out of the segment). Components contained by other segments must be referenced using a ToNode or FromNode attribute as appropriate. References to Nozzle, PipeConnectorSymbol, PropertyBreak and ProcessInstrument elements do not require a ToNode/FromNode attribute.
The following diagrams demonstrates all permissible PipingNetworkSegment relationships expressed via the Connection element:
-
SignalLine Topology (Connection element) This part of the overall specification has not been clarified.
-
Connections across drawings Connections across drawings are managed by the CrossPageConnection element that is present on PipeConnectorSymbol and SignalConnectorSymbol elements. The connection is expressed by the following: •
DrawingName - Identifying the drawing that the connection is to (optional)
•
LinkLabel - A unique key used to match with another Connector Symbol (optional)
•
LinkedPersistentID - The PersistentID of the connected Connector Symbol (optional)
Connections are only valid if: •
The matching criteria are met in both directions
•
The connection elements are of the same type e.g. PipeConnectorSymbol -> PipeConnectorSymbol
For Example, the following would be matched if in the appropriate drawing files:
See the Element Definitions for further information.
•
Geometries (Axis and Reference) All geometries in a P&ID file are accompanied by Axis and Reference elements. These define rotations around 3 dimensional axis that define how to map the coordinates defined for the item into the target environment. For most 2D drawing work the following values give the expected behaviour (i.e. the coordinates are defined in the 2D drawing plane). Some curve primitives such as ellipses in XMpLant require more complex use of Axis and Reference in order to define the 2D forms. The value defines a unit vector in 3D space about which an object should rotate. For 2D diagrams nearly all geometries will define this element as which denotes a vector aligned with the Z-axis. The element defines what is effectively the rotation about the element. When you see the value written as it indicates that the XAxis with which the object's points are defined use the same X-Axis on the output surface/ window with which to orientate - in other words no rotation is required when you have the following paired elements; Common variations include: Inverted z axis (flip around y axis) : Rotation about the origin : Where: [sinØ] - is the sine of the rotation angle [cosØ] - is the cosine of the rotation angle The rotation is measured anti-clockwise
Character Encoding XMpLant is encoded using UTF-8. This means that most characters used in western languages are encoded using a single byte representation, more complex characters are encoded using either a 2 byte encoding or a numerical substitution.
•
TagName Referencing TagName attributes may be used to reference elements instead of referencing by the ID attribute. The P&ID profile prefers the use of ID referencing as it gives a consistent referencing mechanism that can be used regardless of the presence of a Tag attribute. If TagName attributes are used then there is a special case for referencing Nozzle elements. In this instance the TagName is only unique within the scope of the containing Equipment element so the Equipment TagName must also be included in the reference. The reference must have the form - and can only be used where the component doesn't contain a '-' character. For Example: Where: Equipment/@TagName = ‘VP-1234-DNJ09’ Equipment/Nozzle/@TagName = ‘N1’ The reference would be: VP-1234-DNJ09-N1
•
PersistentID Referencing As long as the context attribute used to scope PersistentID elements is at least equal in scope to the file scope then PersistentID attributes may be used for cross referencing elements. The PersistentID/@Identifier value is supported in any ItemId attribute. The PersistentID/@Context is not specified when referencing by PersistentID.
9.6.3 •
Shared Attribute Definitions ID The ID attributes of the elements must conform to XML identity constraints. See http:// www.w3.org/TR/2006/REC-xml-20060816/#id for more details. These id values may be used for cross referencing elements and are transient. i.e. these ids are generated for each version of the file and cannot be used to match file contents between two different exports of the same drawing. For example:
•
TagName This should contain the full TagName for an item without additional text. This is an xsd:string attribute with no specific validation (see Character encoding for character constraints)
Specification This is to be the name of the relevant pipe specification for the component. This is a free text field but should only contain the name of the specification.
•
StockNumber This is defined as: ‘A code that will identify a purchasable plant item ‘The StockNumber attribute contains the unique name of this component that can be used to relate to the complete set of information that is contained in the vendor catalogue for the component. This attribute taken with the Specification and NominalDiameter will identify a specific item, fully defining its parameters size and optionally material and all other information available for it.’ This attribute is an xsd:string attribute and has no specific validation or constraints other than those defined in the ‘Character encoding’ section of this document.
•
ComponentName If present on a component that is inside a ShapeCatalogue element then this is the unique id for the symbol within the file. If present on a component that is not inside a ShapeCatalogue element then this is the reference to the geometry of the components symbol. The component may have additional annotation defined within it. The symbol referenced may be scaled (See Scale) or rotated (See Geometries (Axis and Reference)) by the Position element.
•
ComponentClass This attribute is the RDL Designation field from the ISO 15926 RDL specification. The value of this field is converted to Camel Case with all spaces removed. Notes : some fields contain characters that must be substituted when written in XML (e.g. ‘&’ characters must be substituted with &). For example:
Revision If known this attribute should contain the revision or version of the item. This has the type of xsd:string and therefore has no specific syntax or format constraints other than those detailed in Character encoding.
•
Status One of the following values :‘Current’ – This implies this is the latest version of an item ‘Deleted’ – This item has been superseded or removed from the drawing. ‘Modified’ – The last change to this item was a modification.
‘New’ – This is the first version of the item in the drawing. Items marked as 'Deleted' may be ignored by an import.
•
Units The Units attribute is to be taken from the ISO15926 RDL catalogue using the name from the catalogue converted to camel-case. All measurement values such as distances and pressures are either accompanied by their units of measure or defaulted to the value provided on the PlantInformation/UnitsOfMeasure element. The unit of measure for the coordinate geometry is stipulated in the PlantInformation/@Units attribute. The permitted values are as follows: Angles: Degree, Radian, deg, rad Area : SquareMillimetre, SquareCentimetre, SquareMetre, SquareKilometre, SquareInch, SquareFoot, SquareYard, SquareMile, sq mm, sq cm, sq m, sq km Distances: Micron, Millimetre, Centimetre, Decimetre, Metre, Kilometre, Inch, Foot, Yard, Mile, mm, cm, m, km, in, ft, yd Pressures: MillinewtonMetreSquared, NewtonMetreSquared, KilonewtonMetreSquared, Picopascal, Micropascal, Millipascal, Pascal, Kilopascal, Megapascal, Gigapascal, Bar, Bara, Barg Temperatures: DegreeKelvin, DegreeCelsius, DegreeRankine, DegreeFahrenheit, degC, degF, degK Volume : CubicMillimetre, CubicCentimetre, CubicMetre, CubicInch, CubicFeet, CubicYard, cc, litres, gallons, USGallons, barrels Weight: Microgram, Milligram, Gram, Kilogram, Megagram, PoundMass, OunceMass, mg, Kg, lb, oz Note: All values are case sensitive.
PlantModel This is the root node of an XML document and only exists as the root node of an XML file. Other than the first two child elements, PlantInformation and Extent, the ordering of child elements within a PlantModel element is not significant. There shouldn’t be any need to place graphical elements into a PlantModel element as all drawing annotation such as borders and floating text should be child elements of the drawing element. While a Position element may be provided is has no attached semantics and is often defaulted to 0,0,0. Child Elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
PlantInformation
1
The properties of a plant model This includes properties like its name, modification date, editing system etc. The PlantInformation element must be the first child element of a PlantModel element.
Extent
1
The minimum bounding rectangle that encloses the full graphical contents of the PlantModel instance. The Extent element must be the second child element of a PlantModel element
BsplineCurve
0..*
A geometric primitive
Circle
0..*
A geometric primitive
CompositeCurve
0..*
A composite geometry
Drawing
1
Metadata and graphical annotation related to the P&ID drawing being represented
AnnotationItem This element is a base abstract type of many elements within an XMpLant file, it defines the common elements and attributes for these items. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Presentation
0..1
Extent
1
PersistentID
0..*
Position
1
Scale
0..1
Circle
0..*
CompositeCurve
0..*
ConnectionPoints
0..*
Ellipse
0..*
Line
0..*
PolyLine
0..*
Shape
0..*
TrimmedCurve
0..*
BsplineCurve
0..*
Text
0..*
Description
0..1
GenericAttributes
0..*
History
0..1
Association
0..*
Description
Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
ID
Y
The unique identity for the item in the file. See ID
Association The Association element is used to relate engineering items to other resources. One documented use of this is to relate in-line ProcessInstrument elements with InstrumentLoop elements. In this case each in-line ProcessInstrument element has an Association child element which details the relationship using the Type attribute with a value of ‘is a part of’. Child elements : None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Type
Y
The meaning/semantics relationship.
ItemID
N
The ID or PersistentID/@Identifier attribute value of the item being referenced.
TagName
N
The TagName attribute value of the item being referenced. (See TagName Referencing)
Name
N
The Name attribute value of the item being referenced.
URI
N
A URI identifying an associated resource
Context
N
If omitted then the resource is assumed to be part of the model in the same file. If you want to state the context as the current model then use the value ‘XML’.
of
the
Example: ...
•
Axis See Geometries (Axis and Reference). Child elements : None
CenterLine Geometric curve primitive detailing the line geometry between the components of a PipingNetworkSegment. A CenterLine element is used to imply the presence of tubing. The interpolation between each coordinate is linear. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
Presentation
0..1
The style to use when drawing the line. The drawing behaviour is undefined if the Presentation element is missing.
Extent
1
The minimum bounding geometry of the CenterLine element and its descendants
Component Used to group geometric and text primitives within a Drawing element. This inherits all elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Component
0..*
Description
Attiribute : See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes are defined. Example: …
•
CompositeCurve A collection of geometric curve primitives
The Presentation element has no purpose in this context.
Extent
1
The minimum bounding geometry of the geometric contents of the Drawing element and its descendants.
BsplineCurve
0..*
A geometric primitive
Circle
0..*
A geometric primitive
CompositeCurve
0..*
A geometric primitive
Ellipse
0..*
A geometric primitive
Line
0..*
A geometric primitive
Polyline
0..*
A geometric primitive
Shape
0..*
A geometric primitive
TrimmedCurve
0..*
A geometric primitive
GenericAttributes
0..*
Any application specific properties relating to the Drawing.
Attributes: None Example:
•
Connection This element is used to describe the flow connectivity between elements. The source of the flow is defined using the attributes FromID and FromNode while the flow destination is defined using ToID and ToNode. A connection element and its attributes are not mandatory but must be present to represent the topology of a network. If the FromID/ToID attributes reference a Nozzle, PipeConnectorSymbol or PropertyBreak element then the FromNode/ ToNode attributes are not required. See ConnectionPoints for details on what is being referenced.
The ID, PersistentID/@Identifier or TagName of the referenced item that is the flow destination for the parent of the Connection element. See TagName Referencing.
ToNode
N
The index of the ConnectionPoints Node element within the ConnectionPoints element of the destination element. Nb this is a 0 based index and is only required if the destination is not a Nozzle, PipeConnectorSymbol or PropertyBreak.
FromID
N
The ID, PersistentID/@Identifier or TagName of the referenced item that is the flow source for the parent of the Connection element. See TagName Referencing.
FromNode
N
The index of the ConnectionPoints Node element within the ConnectionPoints element of the source element. Nb this is a 0 based index and is only required if the source is not a Nozzle, PipeConnectorSymbol or PropertyBreak.
Example: … …
•
ConnectionPoints This element is used to describe the potential flow connections from and to the parent of this element. Each potential connection location is represented as a Node element. Nodes are ordered and positioned on the drawing. Each Node element may be referenced by at most one Connection element. The first node (known as Node 0) represents the geometric origin of the parent of the ConnectionPoints element.
The Presentation element has no purpose in this context.
Extent
0..1
The minimum bounding geometry of the geometric contents of the ConnectionPoints element and its descendants.
Node
1..*
The first node (Node 0) represents the geometric location of the parent element. Nodes 1..n represent the locations that other elements may connect to.
GenericAttributes
0..*
Any Application connectivity
Attribute Name
Required
Description
NumPoints
Y
The number of Node elements in this ConnectionPoints element.
FlowIn
N
The index of the Node that is used for the primary flow into the parent of the ConnectionPoints element. This Defaults to 1 if not present.
FlowOut
N
The index of the Node that is used for the primary flow from the parent of the ConnectionPoints element. This defaults to 2 if not present.
ControlPointWeight This is defined as an any but should be considered to be of type xsd:integer. Child elements: None Attributes : None Example: 1
•
Coordinate A Coordinate element is a Tuple of ordinates denoting a location in the drawing plane. For 2D drawings the Z ordinates should always be 0. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
X
Y
The X Axis ordinate as a double
Y
Y
The Y Axis ordinate as a double
Z
N
The Z Axis ordinate as a double, If not present this defaults to 0.0
Example:
•
CrossPageConnection An element describing how to match PipeConnectorSymbol and SignalConnectorSymbol to represent cross page connectivity on a P&ID. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
LinkedPersistentID
0..*
The identities of the element that the parent connector symbol connected to
The Name attribute of the Drawing that matching ConnectorSymbol is Depending on whether the attribute matching is unique to a drawing or entire project this may be required.
LinkLabel
N
The unique key used to match this connector with its matching counterpart. If DrawingName is provided this should be unique to the referenced drawing, otherwise this must be unique to the project.
the on. for the
Example:
•
Description A textual description of an item Child elements: None Attributes: None Example: some piece of plant equipment
•
Discipline This is a simple element with no attributes containing one of the following values to classify an element: Electrical Mechanical Process HVAC Telecomms Example: Mechanical
Drawing This contains metadata about the drawing and graphical annotation for the drawing that the file contains. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
Presentation
1
The R, G and B values of this element define the background colour for the drawing. This is in contrast to the normal use of the Presentation element that defines foreground style information.
Extent
1
The minimum bounding geometry of the geometric contents of the Drawing element and its descendants.
Component
0..*
A PlantItem used to group annotation.
BsplineCurve
0..*
A geometric primitive
Circle
0..*
A geometric primitive
CompositeCurve
0..*
A geometric primitive
Ellipse
0..*
A geometric primitive
Line
0..*
A geometric primitive
Polyline
0..*
A geometric primitive
Shape
0..*
A geometric primitive
TrimmedCurve
0..*
A geometric primitive
Text
0..*
Textual annotation on the drawing
DrawingBorder
0..*
This element may be used to store the drawing border/outline but this is at the discretion of the export tool.
Label
0..*
InsulationSymbol
0..*
ScopeBubble
0..*
GenericAttributes
0..*
Any application specific properties relating to the Drawing.
Attribute Name
Required
Description
Name
Y
Identity for the drawing, this must be unique in the project.
EndDiameter This is the internal bore for a segment or a PipingNetworkSystem at its destination. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Value
Y
The bore size
Units
N
This may be any of the distance units permitted. See Units for permitted values and semantics if not present.
Example:
•
Equipment An Equipment element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
Discipline
0..1
Functional domain of Equipment
NormalOperatingPressure
0..1
MinimumDesignPressure
0..1
MaximumDesignPressure
0..1
MinimumDesignTemperatu 0..1 re MaximumDesignTemperat ure
The units of measure for the field if relevant. If not present this defaults to the values in PlantInformation. See PlantInformation and Units.
Format
N
One of the following values (as per 32 bit architecture): string byte short integer long ulong float double
URI
N
A URI to the RDL WIP qualifying the attribute being represented.
Example:
•
GenericAttributes This element groups application specific attributes/properties to be output into an XMpLant file. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
GenericAttribute
@Number
The contents of a GenericAttributes element are not validated and may be any valid XML content. However the XML applications will expect the contents to conform to the schema fragment provided above.
Height This is the height of the Nozzle origin on it’s parent Equipment, measured from the origin of the Equipment. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Value
Y
The height value
Units
N
This may be any of the distance units permitted. See Units for permitted values and semantics if not present.
Example:
•
History This is provided to contain an audit trail of the changes to an item. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
Transaction
0..*
An entry in the audit trail
Attribute Name
Required
Description
NumTransactions
Y
The number of Transaction child elements
Attributes:
Example:
•
Identifier This element is used to capture the structure of an identifier such as a TagName. Not usually used.
This may be any of the distance units permitted. See Units for permitted values and semantics if not present.
Example:
•
InstrumentComponent This represents a physical instrument that is common to piping systems that is not part of the process line. An InstrumentComponent element inherits elements and attributes from the base type 'PlantItem'. See 'PlantItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
InstrumentComponent
0..*
Contained Instrument.
NominalDiameter
0..1
InsideDiameter
0..1
None OutsideDiameter
0..1
OperatorType
0..1
WallThickness
0..1
Component
0..*
Attributes: (See 'PlantItem') No Additional elements Examples:
InstrumentConnection This represents a connection for purposes of instrumentation to a process line. Even though this is a topological break this doesn't terminate the PipingNetworkSegment (see PipingNetworkSegment Topology (Connection element)) An InstrumentConnection element inherits elements and attributes from the base type 'PlantItem'. See 'PlantItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: See 'PlantItem'. Attributes: (See 'PlantItem') No Additional elements Examples: …
•
InstrumentLoop A collection of related instruments. This element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Inline instruments are associated to instrument loops by using the Association element. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
ProcessInstrument
0..*
An off-line instrument that is part of this set.
SignalLine
0..*
SignalConnectorSymbol
0..*
Attributes: See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes are defined. Example:
InsulationSymbol This element is an annotation primitive to represent a label on a P&ID. An InsulationSymbol element inherits elements and attributes from the base type 'AnnotationItem'. See 'AnnotationItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements : See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional elements Attributes : See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional attributes Example : …
Knot This is defined as an any but should be considered to be of type xsd:integer. Child elements : None Attributes: None Example: 1
•
Knots Child elements:
•
Element Name
Cardinality
Knot
1..*
Description
Label This element is an annotation primitive to represent a label on a P&ID. A Label element inherits elements and attributes from the base type 'AnnotationItem'. See 'AnnotationItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: (See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional elements Attributes: (See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional attributes Example:
•
Line A linear geometry defined by two points. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
Presentation
1
This defines the drawing style to be used for the ellipse.
Extent
1
The minimum bounding geometry of the geometric contents of the Drawing element and its descendants.
Coordinate
2
The coordinates defining the start and end of the line.
GenericAttributes
0..*
A geometric primitive
Attributes: None Example:
•
LinkedPersistentID The LinkedPersistentID element contains a source system identifier for an for a PipeConnectorSymbol or SignalConnectorSymbol that the containing connector element is linked to. The Identifier and the Context must match the PersistentIdentifier attributes on the reference element. See PersistentID. Child elements: None Attributes:
Location A Location element matches the definition of a Coordinated, it is a Tuple of ordinates denoting a location in the drawing plane. For 2D drawings the Z ordinates should always be 0. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
X
Y
The X Axis ordinate as a double
Y
Y
The Y Axis ordinate as a double
Z
N
The Z Axis ordinate as a double, If not present this defaults to 0.0
Example:
•
Manufacturer The manufacturer responsible for producing the item Child elements: None Attributes: None Example: My company
•
Material The name of the Material used to construct the item Child elements:
NormalOperatingPressure Operating pressure of an item under normal conditions. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Value
Y
The pressure value as a double
Units
N
This may be any of the pressure units permitted. See Units for permitted values and semantics if not present.
Example:
•
NormalOperatingTemperature Operating temperature of an item under normal conditions Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Value
Y
The temperature value as a double
Units
N
This may be any of the temperature units permitted. See Units for permitted values and semantics if not present.
Example:
•
Nozzle A Nozzle element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
PersistentID The PersistentID element contains a source system identifier for an object that remains consistent between exports of a drawing. A PersistentID is made up of two components the identifier and its scope. A PersistentID should be the same for an object that appears on multiple drawings where it is practicable to do this. If this cannot be achieved the TagName, if present, will be used by P&ID Manager for rationalising objects. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Identifier
Y
The persistent identifier for an XML element. The Identifier must be unique within the set of XML files that may interact directly or indirectly with this drawing for the stated context. This a free form string type, see Character encoding.
Context
N
This scopes a persistent identifier. In this way an item may have different Identifiers for different systems/contexts and each identifier may be represented. Ideally this would be encoded as a URI. For example http://www.aveva.com/P&ID Designer/ProjectName.
Example:
•
PipeConnectorSymbol An on or off page connector that represents the connectivity of a PipingNetworkSegment across a page boundary. These are contained by the PipingNetworkSegment elements and reference as the segment source or destination. A PipeConnectorSymbol element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘AnnotationItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
CrossPageConnection
0..1
Information describing the matching criteria for the PipeConnectorSymbol that is connected to this one.
Attributes: See ‘AnnotationItem’, no Additional attributes Example:
•
PipeFlowArrow This element is an annotation primitive to represent the direction of flow of a PipingNetworkSegment. A PipeFlowArrow element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘AnnotationItem’. See ‘AnnotationItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: See ‘AnnotationItem’, no additional elements Attributes: See ‘AnnotationItem, no additional attributes Example:
PipingComponent This represents a physical component that is common to piping systems. A PipingComponent element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
PipingComponent
0..*
Contained PipingComponent.
ConnectionType
0..1
NominalDiameter
0..1
InsideDiameter
0..1
None Outside Diameter
0..1
OperatorType
0..1
WallThickness
0..1
FabricationCategory
0..1
PipingComponent
0..*
Component
0..*
Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
ConnectionType
N
This is a free text string and has no defined syntax. See Character encoding
Rating
N
This is a free text string and has no defined syntax. See Character encoding
Standard
N
This is a free text string and has no defined syntax. See Character encoding
ISOSymbol
N
This is a free text string and has no defined syntax. See Character encoding
PipingNetworkSegment See PipingNetworkSegment Topology (Connection element) for details on the use of PipingNetworkSegments. A PipingNetworkSegment element inherits elements and attributes from the base type 'PlantItem'. See 'PlantItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents. PipeConnectorSymbol elements representing on and off page connectivity are contained by the PipingNetworkSegment. See for details of PipingNetworkSegment connectivity. If a PipingNetworkSegment represents the connectivity between an instrument and a process line then the ComponentClass attribute will be given the value 'ProcessInstrumentConnection' Child Elements: Element Name
Cardinality
NominalDiameter
0..1
InsideDiameter
0..1
None Outside Diameter
0..1
StartDiameter
0..1
EndDiameter
0..1
NormalDesignPressure
0..1
MinimumDesignPressure
0..1
MaximumDesignPressure
0..1
Description
NormalDesignTemperature 0..1 MinimumDesignTemperatu 0..1 re MaximumDesignTemperat ure
PipingNetworkSystem 'A PipingNetworkSystem contains the information for a physical PipingNetworkSystem in the plant or a section thereof as contained within a module. The PipingNetworkSystem contains all of the PlantItems that belong to it. A PipingNetworkSystem may have multiple sources and multiple destinations.' A PipingNetworkSystem element inherits elements and attributes from the base type 'PlantItem'. See 'PlantItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Points at which changes occur in the pipe specification. This causes a break in the segment.
Attributes : (See 'PlantItem') No Additional attributes Example :
•
PipingSystem To be defined.
•
PlantArea In the P&ID content of an XML file this is just an object that may be used to represent the name and attributes of named part(area) of a plant. A plant Area is not permitted to contain model elements but may be referenced to associated segments, Equipment etc with a named PlantArea.
A PlantArea element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Component
0..*
Description
Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Name
N
A string representing the name of the area. See Character encoding.
Example:
•
PlantInformation This element collects the metadata for a PlantModel. The Date and Time attributes should be the Date and Time of the XML file creation. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
UnitsOfMeasure
1
Defines the default units of measure for the file.
The distance units of measure for the geometry in the file.
Discipline
Y
Fixed value of ‘PID’
Example:
•
PlantItem This element is a base abstract type of many elements within an XML file, it defines the common elements and attributes for these items. Child elements: Element Name
The style to use when drawing the line. The drawing behaviour is undefined if the Presentation element is missing.
Extent
1
The minimum bounding geometry of the element and its descendants
Coordinate
1..*
The coordinates defining the line primitive
Attribute Name
Required
Description
NumPoints
Y
The number of child Coordinate elements.
Attributes:
Example:
•
Position This defines the place where an items origin is on a P&ID drawing. This is in effect the location of the items symbol. The Axis and Reference attributes are used to define the coordinate orientation in 3D space (see Geometries (Axis and Reference)). The drawing is considered to be on the plane of Z=0. Child elements: Attributes: None Example:
Presentation The element defines a styles used to draw geometric and textual content. Whle all attributes are defined as optional in the schema the R, G, B, LineWeight and LineType attributes are expected for all geometric primitives, otherwise the behaviour is undefined. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Layer
N
Name of the layer in which the graphical elements resides. This has no functional semantics associated with it.
Color
N
A lookup in a color index. This is not used by AVEVA software.
LineType
N
One of the numbers or names from the following (Object Model document v2.2):0 Solid 1 Dotted 2 Dashed 3 Long Dash 4 Long Dash + Short Dash, CenterLine 5 Short Dash 6 Long Dash + Short Dash + Short Dash 7 Dash + Short Dash
LineWeight
N
or or Where: is an real value. is a space character () is a distance units from Units If the value isn’t qualified with units then the behaviour is undefined.
R
N
0 to 1 (double) 1 = maximum intensity of Red component.
G
N
0 to 1 (double) 1 = maximum intensity of Green component.
B
N
0 to 1 (double) 1 = maximum intensity of blue component.
ProcessInstrument This represents a physical instrument that is common to piping systems. A ProcessInstrument element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
PlantItem
0..*
Contained ProcessInstrument.
NominalDiameter
0..1
InsideDiameter
0..1
None Outside Diameter
0..1
OperatorType
0..1
WallThickness
0..1
Component
0..*
Attributes: See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes Example:
•
PropertyBreak This represents the point at which there is a change in specification of the piping. See Error! Reference source not found. A PropertyBreak element inherits elements and attributes from the base type 'PlantItem'. See 'AnnotationItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents.
A PropertyBreak may be contained by a PipingNetworkSystem or PipingNetworkSegment element. PropertyBreak elements inside a PipingNetworkSystem are those associated with components such as Tees and Angled Relief Valves. PropertyBreak elements inside a PipingNetworkSegment are involved in the segment topology. Child elements: (See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional elements Attributes: (See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional attributes Example: Change in Insulation
•
Rating This is a unit qualified string value to describe the rating of an item. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Value
Y
Maximum safe load
Units
N
This may be any of the units permitted since the type of measurement isn’t specified. See Units for permitted values, the semantics if Units are not present are unclear.
Example:
•
Reference See Geometries (Axis and Reference). Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Remark A string comment element Child elements: None Attributes: None Example: WP2134
•
Scale The scale element is used when symbols are drawn from a shape catalogue. The Scale element enables symbols to be rescaled when positioned in a drawing. Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
X
Y
X scale factor
Y
Y
Y scale factor
Z
N
Z scale factor
Example:
•
ScopeBubble This element is an annotation primitive to represent a scoped bubble or cloud on a P&ID. A ScopeBubble element inherits elements and attributes from the base type 'AnnotationItem'. See 'AnnotationItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional elements Attributes: (See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional attributes Example:
ShapeCatalogue A Shape Catalogue defines a symbol library for a file. See ComponentName for how to reference and name a symbol in the catalogue. See Scale for how to scale symbols when drawn. See Position for how to rotate a symbol. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
Equipment
0..*
Equipment symbols
PipingComponent
0..*
PipingComponent symbols
Nozzle
0..*
Nozzle symbols
ProcessInstrument
0..*
ProcessInstrument symbols
ImstrumentComponent
0..*
Component
0..*
Component symbols
PipeConnector
0..*
PipeConnectorSymbol
SignalConnectorSymbol
0..*
SignalConnectorSymbol
InsulationSymbol
0..*
PropertyBreak
0..*
Label
0..*
PipeFlowArrow
0..*
Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Name
Y
The name of the symbol catalogue, this is a string attribute.
Version
N
The version of the symbol set.
Units
N
The distance units that the symbols are defined in. This affects the size of the symbol with respect to the units defined by the PlantInformation/UnitsOfMeasure/ @Distance attribute. i.e if Units is different to the PlantInformation default then the symbol is scaled. See the distance section of Units for valid values.
Date
N
The date the symbol library was created/ modified.
SignalConnectorSymbol An on or off page connector that represents the connectivity of a SignalLine across a page boundary. A SignalConnectorSymbol element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘AnnotationItem’. See ‘AnnotationItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Cardinality
Description
CrossPageConnection
0..1
Information describing the matching criteria for the SignalConnectorSymbol that is connected to this one.
Attributes: See ‘AnnotationItem’, no additional attributes Example:
•
SignalLine A connection between two instruments carrying instrumentation signals. A SignalLine element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Child elements: Element Name
Supplier This is the name of the supplier for an item. Child elements: None Attributes: None Example: My supplier
•
Surface To be defined.
•
System To be defined.
•
TestPressure The pressure that should be used to test an item Child elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Value
Y
The pressure
Units
N
This may be any of the pressure units permitted. See Units for permitted values and semantics if not present.
Example:
•
Text This defines the textual annotation for a drawing. The text may be provided in an attribute, referenced using attributes on this item, referenced on attributes of another item or provided as a set of String elements. The text itself can be marked up using text, text and text for bold, italic and underlined styles. The '<' and '>' characters have to be escaped in this case. Child elements: Element Name
Any application specific attributes, this could include attributes that contain the text content to write.
Attribute Name
Required
Description
NumLines
N
The number of text lines being represented. If not present then a value of 1 is assumed.
String
N
If present this is the text to be drawn. If the text contains a line break then it should be split into the String child elements instead of being in the attribute or the line break character replaced with an appropriate character reference.
Font
Y
The font family name to use.
Attributes:
Justification
The location of Position within the Text to be written. Where the text is on multiple lines then Justification denotes the location of Position for the first line of text. One of the following: LeftTop LeftCenter LeftBottom CenterTop CenterCenter CenterBottom RightTop RightCenter RightBottom Defaults to LeftBottom if not provided.
This is the angle that the base line of the text string makes with the positive X axis measured anticlockwise in degrees.
9:163
12.1
AVEVA P&ID 12.1 User Guide Appendices
Attribute Name
Required
Description
SlantAngle
This is the angle, in degrees, of slant of the text characters measured clockwise from the positive Y axis. E.g. for the character I it is the angle that the vertical stroke makes with the positive Y axis.
ItemID
If provided then the text string is to be constructed from the attributes of another element. The ID may be provided as the ID of the element, the PersistentID/@Identifier or the TagName of the element. See TagName Referencing.
Set
If the text is to be obtained from a child of a GenericAttributes element then the set name for the GenericAttributes element may be provided to avoid ambiguity.
DependantAttribute
The template for the textual contents if obtaining the text from referenced attributes. The value of the DependantAttribute can contain a single attribute or a list of Attributes and explicit text. IF a single attribute is referenced it may appear just as the attribute name. Where multiple attributes or explicit text is used the attribute names are contained in square brackets. E.g “[Tagprefix][Tagnumber][Tagsuffix]”. The search order will be the Attributes of the PlantItem, ItemAttributes then GenericAttributes of the Text followed by the GenericAttributes of the parent or the object explicitly identified by the ItemID. The first occurrence of the named Attribute will be used, there is no mechanism for handling multiple attributes of the same name.
UnitsOfMeasure This element specifies the default units of measure for the file for each type of measured value. Child Elements: None Attributes: Attribute Name
Required
Description
Distance
N
See Units for permitted distance values. Default value is ‘Millimetre’.
Area
N
See Units for permitted distance values. Default value is 'SquareMetres'.
Angle
N
See Units for permitted angle values. Default value is ‘Degree’.
Temperature
N
See Units for permitted temperature values. Default value is ‘DegreeCelsius’.
Pressure
N
See Units for permitted pressure values. Default value is ‘Bar’.
Volume
N
See Units for permitted volume values. Default value is 'CubicMetres'.
Weight
N
See Units for permitted weight values. Default value is ‘Kilogram’.
Example:
•
WallThickness The thickness of the element construction. Child elements: None
The Spreadsheet Formats The Excel Interface spreadsheet can be generated in two formats: Item Type and Item Group. Each format has a different set of worksheets: •
If a spreadsheet is in the Item Type format, data for each item type that was exported is displayed on its own worksheet.
•
If a spreadsheet is in the Item Group format, item type data is grouped into item categories: pipes, instruments, equipment, valves, line fittings, reducers, nozzles and off-sheet connectors. There is a worksheet for each category.
In both formats, there is also a worksheet for drawing data. The format is selected on the Excel Interface Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
9.7.2
Item Worksheets The first column of every item worksheet is the HANDLE column. This displays the unique identifier of each item on the worksheet. This must not be edited. Typical items are listed after the item that is typical of them. They will have the same handle as that of the representative item, followed by a #. The first typical item handle will be followed by a # only. Further items will be followed by a # and a number, i.e. #1, #2 etc. The second column of every item worksheet is the DRAWING column. This displays the number of the drawing on which each item is located. Changes made in this column are ignored.
Subsequent columns display item data for editing. For guidance on editing item data, refer to the Editing P&ID Data in an Excel Spreadsheet procedure.
The third column displays the drawing grid in which each item is located. The next three columns, if applicable to the category of item, display coordinates of the item and its angle of rotation. For tagged items, the item tag numbers are displayed in the next column or columns, followed where applicable by the offset from the item and angle of rotation of the label. Other columns include item types, the parent tags of nozzles, the upstream and downstream sizes of reducers, the drawing number that off-sheet connectors reference, pipe attributes such insulation and paint codes, and instrument loop and alarm details.
9.7.3
Drawing Data Worksheets The Drawing Data worksheet displays the drawing number, revision, client drawing number and the drawing title/description text. Changes to the drawing number can be made using this worksheet.
9.7.4
NEW Fields Each column in a worksheet containing values that can be edited has a corresponding NEW column in which new values can be entered instead of editing the current values. For example, in a worksheet containing a TAG column, there will also be a NEW TAG column. The NEW fields are provided to enable users to compare the original values with the modified ones. Whether or not data is to be imported from NEW columns is specified by project configuration for each item group. Note that if an item type is set by project configuration to import from the NEW columns, all validated NEW fields for that item type must be populated. If any validated NEW fields are left blank, these will be regarded as invalid by the import process as they do not contain valid values.
9.7.5
Insertable and Updateable Fields Some worksheet fields are insertable, others are only updateable (assuming they are not read-only). Updateable fields can only be amended in a spreadsheet. In other words, if they do not already exist on a drawing (and therefore can be exported to a spreadsheet), they can only be changed in a spreadsheet, not added. Insertable fields are label fields that can be added as new labels for items. When the spreadsheet is imported, these new labels will be place on the drawing. Columns in which
insertable labels can entered can be identified on a spreadsheet as the subsequent columns will columns used to add the offset and rotation properties of any new labels. For example:
9.7.6
Validated Rows When changed data is imported back into a AVEVA P&ID drawing it is validated. After validation, rows in the spreadsheet containing errors are displayed in red. In this example, the value in the SIZE field of the first item row is invalid:
Rows in the spreadsheet containing valid changes displayed in green:
Setting up AVEVA P&ID to Connect with VPE Workbench The following configuration is required in AVEVA P&ID in order to set up the interface between AVEVA P&ID and AVEVA VPE Workbench (see 7.5: Exporting Data to a VPE Workbench Database).
9.8.1
Installing the VPE Middle Tier During the installation of AVEVA P&ID, Workbench Components should be installed on Middle Tier:
Checking the Windows status of the EngAPI Service Run “%SystemRoot%\system32\services.msc /s” to open services running on the machine:
Check that the service status of “AVEVA PID ENGAPIService” is "Started". -
Changing Ports Run “C:\Aveva\P&ID\Aveva EngAPI Service\ ServiceEditor.exe”. Using the dialog that is then displayed, as required, change the port used by the service and restart the service.
Starting the EngAPI Service To start up the service successfully, users must enter the same user name and password used during the installation of the service, because the settings for the service are saved at the local machine level in the registry.
Configuring the AVEVA P&ID Client This procedure is carried out using the VPE Workbench Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
The VPE.ini file identified in the VPE Config File field provides a list of the available VPE Workbench projects. This file is provided by VPE Workbench. Users may copy this file to their local machines. The VPE Service Path is the http path used to connect to the EngAPI service. After creating a new project, the user is expected to change the server “WBServer” and port “8080” settings to the middle tier server name and port. The Test button is provided to check whether the service is ready to use. This test button will check whether the service: •
exists at path provided by VPE Service Path
•
is started on VPE Middle Tier
•
can connect to VPE Workbench
The Publisher Folder is the location to which synchronized files from the AVEVA P&ID project's output folder are copied. This folder will be continuously watched by the Publisher, and when synchronized files are copied to this folder; it will publish them to the Subscriber. The Publisher folder name should match with that of the Publisher configuration file. The user can select the Database Project from available list. The project list will be populated with those listed in the VPE.ini file.
The Export to VPE Workbench check box controls the default setting of the Export Data to Publishing Area checkbox on the Synchronise dialog.
After loading data into VPE Workbench, Subscriber will send e-mails reporting the status of load process. The e-mail addresses will depend on machine user ids of P&ID users. If a user id is not in the e-mail address table then e-mail will be sent to the USERNAME_DEFAULT e-mail address. Typically, the format of these e-mails will be as below:
9.8.3
Synchronising The Synchronise procedure (see 8.8.5: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database) will copy the files from the AVEVA P&ID project's output folder to Publisher folder if the Export Data to Publishing Area checkbox is checked on the Synchronise dialog. On successfully copying the files, the Publisher service will export these files to the Subscriber.
The Select Drawings to Publish window lists the drawings in the "Vantage" folder. Users can select drawings from list and click on the > button to copy these drawings to Publisher folder. They will be displayed in the Publishing Area list. The >> button will copy all the listed drawings into the Published folder. On successfully copying the files, the Publisher service will export these files to the Subscriber. If middle tier has older VPE Workbench versions like 5.6 or 5.7 installed on it, and Publisher is not installed on the machine, drawings can be loaded to VPE Workbench from the Publisher folder by: 1. Checking the Using Workbench Legacy Version (5.6/5.7) checkbox. This will enable the Login button. 2. Selecting the files to be loaded as described above, using the > and >> buttons (the Clear button will delete selected files from Publishing Area list). 3. Logging in. After a successful login, the Load button will be enabled. 4. Clicking the Load button to load the drawings to VPE Workbench (5.6/5.7). The load progress will be shown in the progress bar, and status messages will be displayed in the text box below. 5. The View Log button will open a log file containing the status messages from VPE Workbench load process. 6. The files successfully loaded to VPE Workbench will be removed from the Publishing area.
Setting up PDMS to Connect with P&ID The following configuration is required in PDMS in order to set up the interface between AVEVA P&ID and PDMS (see 7.3: Exporting to PDMS Schematic Databases). •
In the Admin module, ensure the “Toolbox” module is defined and that it is set to open Schematic type databases in RW mode (as defined in the supplied file MODMAC.MAC, with the standard PDMS install). To define the TOOLBOX module if it does not already exist, enter the following at the command prompt: MODULE 95 TOOLBOX M DESI RW M NSEQ RW M ISOD R M SCHE RW M CATA R M PROP R M DICT R M MANU R M DESI DEFAULT M TRAN RW BUFFER 12800000 If the Toolbox module already exists but the Schematic DB is not set to open in RW mode, then enter: edit module 95 mode SCHE RW
•
The Schematic Model database and the Catalogue Data database should be set to multi-write implicit, to allow the loading PDMS and P&ID at the same time. For instance, in the SAM project the following databases must be set to multi-write: - SAMPLE/DESI - ADMIN/REFDATA
